Home

Canon LASER CLASS 3170series user manual

1. 2 20 Setting Up Chapter 2 5 Close the printer cover and the MP tray e Save all the packing materials You may want to insert them again if you have to transport the fax unit e When removing the packing materials from inside the printer area be careful not to touch the transfer charging roller Otherwise the print quality may deteriorate Removing the Packing Materials from Paper Cassette 1 1 Pull out the Paper Cassette 1 and remove it from the fax unit 2 Set Paper Cassette 1 down on a flat stable surface 3 If tapes are attached to the paper cassette remove them Then remove the white spacers under the paper guide clips by first pressing down on the bottom metal plate with one hand and then sliding the white spacers inwards with the other hand 4 Insert Paper Cassette 1 in the fax unit gt 2 37 Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 21 Removing the Protective Plastic Sheet The LCD on the operation panel is covered with a plastic sheet to protect it during shipping This protective material should be
2. 18 5 467 mm 23 3 588 mm HANDSET option Chapter 2 Power Requirements J Place the fax near a standard 120 V AC power outlet This fax unit is intended for domestic use Do not attempt to use it outside the country where you purchased it Do not plug the power cord into an extension cord connector or power strip shared with other plugs Do not plug the fax into a power outlet shared with an air conditioner personal computer electric typewriter copier or other equipment that generates electrical noise Check the plug frequently and make sure that it is firmly plugged into the socket Do not plug the power cord into an uninterruptable power supply UPS Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 7 General Precautions 2 8 Setting Up TO AVOID SERIOUS INJURY NEVER DISASSEMBLE THE FAX EXPOSED POWER POINTS INSIDE THE FAX CAN CAUSE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF YOU TOUCH THEM After you unplug the fax unit always wait at least 5 seconds before you plug it in again Always unplug before you move the fax During electrical storms disconnect the plug from the power outlet The fax can hold documents in the memory for up to 12 hours Before you attach or remove the plug from the power outlet make sure your hands are dry Do not stack boxes or furniture around the power outlet Keep the area open so you can reach the outlet
3. Moist paper Paper that is wavy curled or damaged Folded clipped or stapled paper Paper with cut outs or perforations not recommended Paper containing materials that melt vaporize offset discolor or emit dangerous fumes at a temperature of 374 F 190 C or higher Setting Up 2 43 Avoid pressing or applying excessive force on the MP tray as this may cause damage e The paper stack must not exceed the paper limit mark e Do not load different sizes of paper on the MP tray at the same time e Do not add paper to the MP tray if paper is already loaded incorrect paper feed or a paper jam may occur Only add paper when the MP tray is empty If a printed page comes out of the fax all curled up you can correct the problem by turning over the paper stack in the MP tray so that the bottom sheet in the stack is now at the top If the leading edge of the paper is curled straighten it out as much as possible before loading it into the tray Do not set the paper guides so tight that the paper stack bends Do not set the paper guides so loose that the paper stack is not evenly aligned Do not set the paper guides so loose that there is room between the guides and the paper Do not place the paper into the tray at an angle Do not load fanned out paper Make sure the edges of the paper stack are evenly aligned when loading 2 44 Setting Up Chapter 2 1 Pull the MP tray out using the handle on the panel
4. If the LASER CLASS 3170 Series does not operate normally when you have followed the instructions in the User s Guide Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions in the User s Guide Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and may require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation If the LASER CLASS 3170 Series has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged If the LASER CLASS 3170 Series exhibits a distinct change in performance indicating a need for service You must register your fax number your name or company name and the date and time in the LASER CLASS 3170 Series before you use it This is required by the FCC rules governing the use of fax equipment 43 12 THE OPTIONAL HANDSET EMITS LOW LEVEL ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES IF YOU USE A CARDIAC Caution PACEMAKER AND FEEL ABNORMALITIES PLEASE MOVE AWAY FROM THIS PRODUCT AND CONSULT YOUR DOCTOR Preface XU Laser Safety This fax complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 This means that the fax does not produce hazardous radiation Since radiation emitted inside the fax is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape from the machi
5. The ITU T password for the other party s confidential mailbox The ITU T subaddress for the other party s confidential mailbox Chapter 4 ORIG RELAY TX 1 PASSWORD 2 SUBADDRESS PSWD SUBADDRESS 1 PASSWORD 2 SUBADDRESS POLLING RX 1 PASSWORD 2 SUBADDRESS Designates the transaction as a relay transmission with your fax as the origina tor Press Set then enter the subaddress and password for the relay broadcast 9 10 The ITU T password for the relay broad cast The ITU T subaddress for the relay broadcast Allows you to enter an ITU T password or subaddress for the transmission 6 28 The ITU T password for the transmission The ITU T subaddress for the transmission Allows you to set a Coded Speed Dialing button to poll another fax every time you use it to dial Press Set then enter the ITU T subaddress and password 11 3 The ITU T password for the other party s polling box The ITU T subaddress for the other party s polling box Display the TX TYPE you wish to register then press Set Next set the ITU T password and subaddress for the feature you just selected You can cancel the currently set TX TYPE by selecting REGULAR TX Note displayed first F Only one feature can be set for TX TYPE The next time you open the TX TYPE menu to change the setting you will see the currently set item OPTIONAL SETTING 3 LONG DISTANCE Chapter 4 Setting Up and Using Sp
6. a Se a 3 The MP tray holds approximately 100 sheets of paper Before you load paper on the MP tray tap the edges of the stack to make sure the leading edge and sides of the stack are even WR Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 45 4 Insert the paper stack as far as it will go into the fax unit with the print side facing up and the top of the paper going into the fax unit first Then adjust the paper guides to the size of the paper PAPER SENSOR PAPER FEED ROLLER Ai e Make sure that the leading edge of the paper is inserted all the way Seal into the MP tray so that it is below the paper feed roller The paper Note sensor for the MP tray is located to the left of the paper feed roller when viewed from the front of the fax unit Please note the following points when loading small size paper in the MP tray If the paper is not loaded correctly the paper will not be detected by the fax and a message will appear asking you to load paper in the MP tray e Make sure that the paper stack is not higher than the load limit marks mm on the paper guides LOAD LIMIT MARK 2 46 Setting Up Chapter 2 e Make sure that the paper guides are set correctly To print with the MP S tray you also need to select the paper size in the USE MP TRAY menu Note 2 48 e Make sure that the paper is loaded correctly and that the leading edge is fully inserted into the fax unit e Make sure that the pa
7. pe ok ok ok ok ok KK ok K K K K Ok K K K K K K K K e a2 O TRANSMISSION OK e l TX RX NO 0007 5 5 THIS ITEM DEPT ACCESS CODE 2222 e APPEARS ONLY IF CONNECTION TEL 732 2233 w G THE DAC CONNECTION ID ADAM BOOKS CPA DEPARTMENT ST TIME 12 31 12 28 gt USAGE T 00 16 ACCESS CODE Sagan a HAS BEEN SET RESULT OK WORLD ESTATE INC West 44th Street New York NY U S A Global Real Estate Consubtants in the Heart of Vow York December 28 1999 Dear Member By now you have all had a chance to become familiar with your new Canon fax units and are ready to set up a reliable economical communications network that offers many exciting features We can save money by scanning documents in the memory and then setting the delayed timer to send all the documents at the same time later at night to take advantage of late night rates Many of us are separated by long distances and reside in different time zones We can set up the polling feature to poll and receive documents from each other when we are not in the office For sensitive material about clients and confidential bids we can set up and use the confidential mailbox features We will also be able to keep down costs by limiting use of the fax to operators who know the correct department codes and passwords Relay sending is another money saver We can designate one relay fax in your area send one transmission from the home office on the East coast and then
8. 15 28 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 3 Release the upper unit of the ADF cover by pushing the hook inside with your finger or using a pencil ROLLERS po Ve aS SRK S d gt L Use a dry cloth to wipe clean the underside of the ADF cover L Use a dry cloth to wipe up paper dust around the rollers Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 29 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 5 Gently close the upper unit of the ADF cover until you hear it lock MAKE SURE THAT THE UPPER UNIT OF THE ADF COVER IS LOCKED IN POSITION SECURELY BEFORE PROCEEDING TO Caution STEP 6 6 Lift the document feeder tray and gently open the ADF cover until it stops grasping the document feeder tray and the ADF cover at the same time 15 30 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 7 While holding the ADF cover open with one hand use one finger of your other hand to gently push in the black plastic loop to separate it from the stub on the fax machine Questions J Oo wt O N oqa co gt 5E ES ss a Li Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 31 9 Usea soft dry cloth to wipe clean the scanning glass the white strip above rollers and the area around the glass Use a soft cloth that will not scratch the scanning glass WHITE STRIP SCANNING GLASS ROLLERS STAMP m GR a N y D a A
9. 2 ir 3 A What Is Polling Polling means a fax calls another fax and requests that the other fax send a document that it is holding Unlike normal sending and receiving in polling the receiver always calls the sender This is called polling to receive a document The sender sends the document in response to the polling by a telephone call from the receiver Ai Your fax can be set up to function in both roles Your fax can poll to Sol receive a document or it can be polled to send a document that it is Note holding Before You Use Polling Receiving Before you try to set up polling note the following points I With one operation you can poll several faxes You can dial up to 210 telephone numbers and poll those faxes to receive documents that they are holding You can poll a document at any time but you may find it more useful to set your fax for polling other faxes at specified times throughout the day 11 5 You must know if the other fax is holding the document under both a subaddress and password or only a subaddress or password You must also know the subaddress and password so you can enter them on your fax If you do not know the subaddress or password contact the other party If the other party s documents are registered for polling without a subaddress or password you can still perform polling receiving If the other party s fax does not support ITU T subaddress password transactions you can ask them
10. 415 2 If the document does not feed correctly clean the rollers 15 29 CHECK PAPER SIZE For Paper size matching error of the MP tray You have set different paper the LASER CLASS 3170 sizes in the fax menus and in the printer menus or you have not turned 3175 with the PCL6 Printer off USE MP TRAY while you are using the MP tray for the printer Board installed function and loading paper of sizes other than letter legal or A4 Set the correct paper size in both of the fax and printer menus or turn off USE MP TRAY in the fax menus CHECK POLLING ID Your attempt at polling receiving failed The polling ID may be incorrect or your subaddress password does not match the subaddress password set on the polling box of the other party s fax unit Contact the other party and make sure you are using the correct polling ID or subaddress password 11 3 CHECK PRINTER Printer malfunction Press Stop Unplug the fax unit from its power source wait a few minutes then plug in power cord again If the fax is connected to an uninterruptable power supply UPS unplug the power cord and then plug it to an AC outlet If message remains in the LCD display and the fax unit cannot return to standby call for service CHECK PRINTER COVER Check the printer cover and make sure that it is completely closed Make sure a toner cartridge is installed under the printer cover CHECK SUBADDR PASSWD You attempted sending or polling receiving with an i
11. A y _ JL Set Set J Open the PRESET POLLING menu Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 6 FILE SETTINGS Press Set FILE SETTINGS 1 CONFID MAILBOX Press the search buttons until you see the display below FILE SETTINGS 4 PRESET POLLING Press Set PRESET POLLING 1 SETUP FILE 2 Press Set SETUP FILE SET BOX OO 11 6 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 11 press Set A SETUP FILE oS 1 FILE NAME 4 Enter a file name CJ Press Set _ 3 Enter a two digit box number 00 99 for the polling box Then FILE NAME A This is the name of the file that will hold the polled document you receive va Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name of up to D 2 3 24 characters long 3 7 Press Set SETUP FILE 2 PASSWORD po SE 5 5 Ifyou want to set a password go to the next step m A This is the operation password to protect your preset polling Es settings To change the settings later you will have to enter this 7 8 password 7 if not If you do not want to set a password press the down search button to display the next item Chapter 11 Setting Up and Using Polling 11 7 wm D Press Set to set a password L O 2 Enter a fo
12. Button press sound VOLUME CON Every time you press a button on the numeric keypad you TROL will hear a beep The volume of this beep can be adjusted KEYPAD VOLUME or it can be turned off 16 6 Date format DATE SETUP In the standby mode the date is given in the format MM DD YYYY Two other formats are available 716 30 Dialing timeout TIME OUT The fax automatically pauses five seconds after you press a speed dialing button to allow you to dial other numbers for sequential broadcasting You can turn the timeout feature off 16 11 Document smaller SELECT CASSETTE If you receive a letter size document and only a larger than paper CASSETTE SW B paper size is available the fax prints the document on the larger paper If you do not want the smaller documents printed on larger paper you can receive them in the memory This switch is effective only when the letter size paper runs out 16 17 Document too large SELECT CASSETTE If you receive a legal size document and only letter size for paper CASSETTE SW A paper is available the document will be divided over two pages or reduced If you do not want to divide documents you can receive them in the memory This switch is effective only when the paper cassettes are set to legal size and out of legal size paper 16 17 12 12 Other Special Features Chapter 12 ECM sending ECM TX receiving ECM RX Energy Saver ENERGY SAVER Language DISPLAY LAN GUAGE Manual receiv
13. Follow this procedure to turn the memory lock off and print the documents received in the memory P If the timer is set for the memory lock feature the fax will enter and lt leave the memory lock mode automatically 13 17 Note 1 When the memory lock is on a message is displayed MEMORY LOCK RX 13 20 Restricting Use of the Fax Chapter 13 K 2 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press p gt Memory Reception Bee MEM LOCK PASSWORD C 2 C3 3 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four digit Q a ae Ou ww O o 0 Q ce memory lock password and press Set w All the documents received in the memory while the fax was in O the memory lock mode are printed OPER__ SYMBOLS Setting Up and Using PIN Codes PIN Personal Identification Number codes prevent unauthorized personnel from making calls To protect privileged access to the tele phone lines only authorized users are entrusted with the PIN codes for daily operations Some Private Branch Exchange PBX systems require that a PIN code be entered when dialing a number to make a call or send a document by fax Depending on the requirements of the PBX system the PIN code may be entered either before the number as a prefix or after the number as a suffix If your PBX requires a PIN code to connect to an outside line the fax machine can be set up with the USER DATA SETTINGS to prompt
14. INSTALL CARTRIDGE displayed at power on 2 42 ITU T password memory box 8 11 sending document 6 27 ITU T subaddress memory box 8 11 sending document 6 27 J jam document feed 15 2 printer feed 15 4 L language switching 16 30 location choosing 2 4 ideal temperature 2 4 space around fax unit 2 6 long distance setting for Coded Speed Dialing 4 22 setting for One touch Speed Dialing 4 12 M manual receiving disabled with optional Dual line 7 2 7 7 manual auto switching 7 5 16 14 procedure 7 7 manual sending described 6 17 procedure 6 17 memory creating memory box 8 11 deleting document 8 9 8 10 erasing document 8 9 locking to receive all documents 13 17 power failure 8 27 printing document in memory 8 6 printing memory list 8 5 re sending to different destination 8 7 sending with memory full 6 15 memory box canceling 8 23 changing settings 8 22 creating 8 11 8 12 8 14 ITU T subaddress password 8 11 preparation for setting up 8 12 printing document from 8 25 sending document 8 24 I 4 setting 16 22 setup summary 8 16 Memory Box Report sample 14 16 Memory Clear Report sample 14 20 memory list printing 8 5 memory lock described 13 17 MEMORY LOCK RX 16 29 setting password 13 17 setting time 13 17 summary settings 13 19 turning on 13 20 MEMORY LOCK RX setting 13 17 16 29 memory sending described 6 12 procedure 6 12
15. If you turn this feature ON select one of the options described on the next page Stop 6 When you are finished press Stop to return to standby O Features amp Q 3 Q a ihe 3 s O Chapter 12 Other Special Features 12 9 TX Stamp Setup Summary The default settings shown in bold remain in effect unless you change them ON Turns on the stamp feature After you set this switch ON documents will be stamped according to the following settings If you do not want to stamp temporarily you can use the STAMP button to turn the stamp feature off STAMP ACTION DIRECT amp Stamps all documents you scan MEMORY TX for direct sending or memory sending DIRECT TX Stamps only documents you scan for direct sending OFF Turns off stamping documents scanned for sending However before you scan a document you can still turn on the stamp feature for a document you want to stamp with Stamp button Turning the Stamp Feature ON OFF If you have turned the TX STAMP setting ON documents will be stamped according to the above setting If you have not turned on the TX STAMP feature but you still want to occasionally stamp documents you scan for sending or if you have turned on the TX STAMP feature but you want to turn it off occasionally follow the procedure below 1 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can also select a sender s name wi
16. USER SETTINGS 10 TEL LINE TYPE C3 5 Press Set TEL LINE TYPE TOUCH TONE Set C JC 6 Display and check the current line setting Use the search buttons to alternate the settings TEL LINE TYPE 3 TOUCH TONE E TEL LINE TYPE E ROTARY PULSE 5 0 6 Set 7 Display the setting you need then press Set Stop 8 Press Stop to return to standby Q Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 11 Registering Required Sender Information According to recent amendments to the FCC rules governing the use of facsimile equipment in the United States the following sender informa tion must be printed on every facsimile transmission LJ Your fax number _I Your personal name or company name _J Time and date of transmission Your fax is already set to print this information at the top of every docu ment you send but you must register your fax unit s telephone number your personal name or company name the current date and the current time with the features provided in the USER SETTINGS menu 16 4 What is Sender Information After your fax is received the other party will know immediately where it came from because your sender information will be printed at the top of every page you send DATE AND TIME This is the date and time of the transmission TELEPHONE NUMBER This is your fax telephone number You can set TX TERMINAL ID feature to set the prefix for this number as FAX or TEL 16 5 UNIT NAME OR SENDER S NAM
17. You can enter up to 199 numbers Set When you are finished entering telephone numbers press Set GROUP DIAL 2 NAME Enter a name for the group Set C3 Press Set NAME A Mn Oe Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name for the D 2 3 number up to 16 characters long 3 7 900 NAME A T 9 CANON GROUP A Q 4 26 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 Set Press Set NAME A DATA ENTRY OK GROUP DIAL 3 SET TIME 5 Set the time for the group transmission This setting is optional If you do not set the timer the trans mission will begin after you press the One touch Speed Dialing button or press Coded Dial followed by a three digit code for the group L If you set the timer for the Group Dialing code every docu ment you send with this code will be sent at the same time every day L You can set up to 5 different times in a 24 hour period for sending L You can use this feature together with BATCH TX If BATCH TX is ON the documents will be grouped and sent together at the preset time The fax unit will make only one phone call Es saving you time and money 316 34 i S m Q Pr Set m C93 Press Set 25 to SET TIME on ib enter the time Enter the time in the 24 hour format e g 1 00 p m as 13 00 OIO SET TIME 00 30 C3 Press Set SET TIME 2 Chapter 4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 27 O Press Set again then use the buttons on the
18. E ne eo 62 k O 7 Q x 2 G Confidential Mailbox Set Set OPER__ SYMBOLS 10 12 Using Confidential Mailboxes Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels and press Confidential Mailbox CONFID TX RX 1 CONFIDENTIAL TX Press Set CONFIDENTIAL TX SELECT LOCATIONS oi lt Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number 6 7 if not Close the One touch Speed Dialing panels and press a One touch Speed dialing button to dial the number or press Coded Dial and enter the three digit code 4 29 4 31 if not Dial the number with directory dialing 4 35 _J You can dial only one number L The transmission mode settings for the speed dialing button are ignored Press Set SUBADDRESS Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU T subaddress Then press Set TELS 123 4567 01 CANON INC Chapter 10 Password C9 6 Ifyou must also enter an ITU T password press Password Other wise just go on to the next step PASSWORD You must press Password within 5 seconds of pressing Set If you wait longer than the timeout interval before pressing Password the fax will start scanning the document The timeout interval can be turned off 16 11 9 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU T pass word Then press Set o TELS 123 4567 o 01 CANON INC Start Scan ae 7 Press Start Scan to start the
19. EKSPONERING FOR STR LEN i E COAN OARTAAATRL V KAMAHENTUVET LD P HICESENAWUKDICUTCHRAL RS5 8169 Preface Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Contents Contents Welcome l chesrsccetsesencas ceed sadiesdenttedsssserovedgenestsheotsvansontcostesousvecursavcsvonessongsvaneotes 1 1 Mun HC AUTOS sapen enen E EES 1 2 OPUONS una ion ieee ete atte 1 5 CUSLOMEE SUP DOK ea n A A AAR 1 6 SEEING Pos aces stacks AAA A A A AAA 2 1 How t Use This Ui C vce td ireci dace ah tas nn na a mieecnaeidetnncsealdeseie 2 3 Where toset Up the FAX wide cd reco Se cxcauesnscancacioohdseelnnnsceaceductaw nbseneseabsnedie 2 4 Space Around the FAN serii diet oat ees aaa coteccan antennae herent 2 6 DOWEL REG UIT CII Sri a e wacies antics iaterietsstamatetarneerma ted iasioaeaaees 2 7 General Precautions nerien S 2 8 Moving the Fax Unib aserite at i ENE ae 2 10 Unpacking Have You Got Everything eeesseceeisrerrrrrrreeres 2 11 For the LASER CLASS 3170 Series n se 2 13 For the LASER CLASS 3175 Only see sessseeceseeeseceeteeeeteees 2 14 For the LASER CLASS 3170MS Only ec eeeceecceeeeseeeeeeeeeees 2 14 PHOS AV alla lendan a a 2 16 SUPP ersan aa a 2 16 Parts ofthe Tie en er er eee eer ene E ene erTs Senne es 2 17 ET OLME NLC We Sreca te couce aa acca atone aeee ese uae tee gus acon 2 17 REI VIEW sacectseestidonissauthsaxhaagutsuath ain aseanitoatasansaaeracost a 2 18 FHandsel opion Mennrreer renter emerey treet aD tec nO re terrestres
20. LONG DISTANCE LONG DISTANCE 1 Select LONG DISTANCE 1 and try to send the document again If this setting does not solve the problem try settings 2 and 3 Set C Press Set OPTIONAL SETTING 4 TX SPEED 11 Change the transmission speed if it takes a long time for your document transmissions to begin Set C Press Set TX SPEED 33600bps eS Oe oe i F If your document transmissions are slow in starting this may mean that So amp the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition Select a lower a g gt Note speed You can select 33600 14400 9600 or 4800 bps a EET A v Do CJC Press the search buttons to display the speed you want to select om Sai Then press Set L OPTIONAL SETTING 5 ECM Chapter 4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 13 12 Turn ECM off or on Set C3 Press Set ECM ON A vy CJC Press the search buttons to display OFF or ON F ECM error correction mode reduces system and line errors during L 4 sending or receiving with another fax that supports ECM Otherwise Note this setting is ignored If transmission speed appears to be extremely slow you may be able to speed up transmission time by turning ECM off C93 Press Set 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL 11 This completes all settings for telephone registration of a One touch Speed Dialing button If you want to set up other buttons repeat from step 2 if not Stop Press Stop to return to standby
21. menu button summary 3 9 defined 2 3 opening 3 6 returning to previous level 3 6 using 3 5 mode changing entry mode 3 7 MP tray adjusting paper size 2 46 loading 2 43 setting 16 17 Multi transaction Report N sample 14 14 numeric keypad buttons O entering text numbers 3 7 summary 3 9 One touch Speed Dial List 1 sample 14 3 Index One touch Speed Dial List 2 sample 14 4 One touch Speed Dialing defined 4 5 registering for Group Dialing 4 25 setting for long distance 4 12 setting time 4 9 setting transmission speed 4 13 setting up 4 6 turning ECM on off 4 14 using 4 29 operation panel buttons 3 2 3 4 using 3 5 options Document Distribution System 1 6 Dual line Upgrade Kit II 1 5 fax memory 1 5 listed 1 5 Printer Board I 1 6 printer options 1 6 OUTPUT TRAY FULL message 8 2 P paper loading MP tray 2 43 loading Paper Cassettes 1 and 2 2 31 storing 15 15 15 16 Paper Cassettes 1 and 2 adjusting for paper size 2 32 inserting in fax unit 2 37 loading 2 31 Paper delivery selecting face up tray 2 53 selecting upper and lower output trays 2 50 16 19 paper jams avoiding 2 9 removing 15 4 pauses adjusting length 4 3 entering for dialing 4 2 MID PAUSE SET 16 10 Index PHONE NO CHECK setting 16 31 PIN codes described 13 21 dialing after number 13 24 dialing before number 13 25 forced 13 28 setting 13 21 setting for spe
22. 123 4567 01 CANON INC Press Set SUBADDRESS Using a Relay Network 9 13 Network gt amp Q es D D 3 C9 4 Enter the ITU T subaddress required to start the relay broadcast o o on the other party s fax Then press Set Fac TELS 123 4567 IOIO 01 CANON INC If a password is not required go on to the next step if not Password C If an ITU T password is also required to start the relay broadcast press Password PASSWORD You must press Password within 5 seconds of pressing Set If you wait longer than the timeout interval before pressing Password the fax will start scanning the document The timeout interval can be turned off 16 11 Enter the ITU T password required to start the relay broadcast on Q the other party s fax Then press Set 2 4 2 TEL 123 4567 DOWD 01 CANON INC 90 Start Scan ee 5 Press Start Scan to start the transmission F The Fax will begin scanning automatically if the Time Out function is set to on 6 23 16 11 Note 9 14 Using a Relay Network Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 10 Using Confidential Mailboxes This chapter shows you how to send and receive confidential docu ments A confidential document is a document that does not print as soon as it is received The receiving party must use a password to unlock his or her mailbox in order to print the document Use confidential sending and receiving for documents that you want
23. 4 TX PASSWORD 5 RX PASSWORD SS SSS SSS SSS Feature settings 6 RECEIVE 7 TRANSMIT 8 POLLING TX 8 12 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 Chapter 8 Access Settings SET BOX A two digit code 00 99 you assign to the box to select it when you need to scan documents into the box or to open it to view or change the settings The box number and file name appear in printed reports for reference PASSWORD If you set a password when you create the memory box below 2 PASSWORD you will have to enter the password to view or change the rest of the settings afterwards Main Settings 1 FILE NAME A personal name you can assign to the memory box to identify it in printed reports 2 PASSWORD A four digit password you assign to the memory box to protect the settings from unauthorized access You must also use this password and the box number to print documents stored in the memory box Assigning a password is optional but strongly recommended especially if you want to keep the memory box setup and the documents you receive confidential 3 SUBADDRESS This is the ITU T subaddress 4 TX PASSWORD This is your TX password TX password is only for polling sending Your TX password must match the ITU T password with which the other party calls you If they do not match the other party will not receive your document 5 RX PASSWORD This is your RX password Your RX password must match the ITU T password assigned to documents that you rec
24. 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 LA You cannot set sender s name when sending manually 2 Press Hook After you press Hook the In Use lamp blinks green and you will be able to hear the dial tone if not Without pressing Hook just pick up the handset if you have installed the optional handset D E S Q a Documents Chapter 6 Sending Documents 6 17 Start Scan 14 e 6 18 Sending Documents Dial the other party s fax number Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number 6 7 if not Press a One touch Speed Dialing button to dial the number 4 29 if not Press Coded Dial and a three digit code to dial the number 4 31 if not Press Directory and search for the name to dial the number and press Set Then press Start Scan 4 35 If you make a mistake during dialing press Stop to return to standby and start again When you hear the other party answer the call you can talk When you hear the other party answer pick up the handset so you can talk if you have not already done so Then go to step 5 if not If you hear a high pitched signal instead of the other party s voice they are ready to receive your document Go to step 7 Ask the other party to press the start button on their fax and then hang up their handset After the other party presses the start button on their fax you will hear a high pitched signal
25. Delete the setting to poll at preset time Set the box number for the box you want to delete Enter the password of the file you want to delete Set up a polling box to store a document in your fax machine until your fax machine is polled to send the document 11 15 Set up a polling box to hold a document until it is polled by and sent to another fax machine Set a box number for the polling box Enter a file name 24 characters Enter a password to protect the polling box settings Enter a 20 digit max standard ITU T subaddress Enter a 20 digit max standard ITU T password Tell the fax machine how to handle the document after it is polled and sent Document is erased from the memory after it is polled and sent Document is not erased and remains in the memory after it is polled and sent Change the settings on the polling box You can now change any of the settings listed in the table above 1 SETUP FILE Set a box number you want to change Summary of Important Settings 16 25 Go fe i G E E N e G Pe ihn fe Q z iz Ca 5 t sbs sks 3 7 PASSWORD 3 DELETE FILE SET BOX PASSWORD 6 TRANSFER 1 SETUP FILE 1 FILE NAME Enter the password of the polling box you want to change You can now change any of the settings listed in the table above 1 SETUP FILE Delete the polling box file Set the box number for the box you want to delete Enter the passwo
26. Does the ITU T subaddress password match those of the other party Make sure you set the correct subaddress password 410 10 Is the memory of the other fax full Check with the other party and make sure there is enough memory to receive your document Ask the other party to clear their memory then try again L Cannot relay a document from another fax Does the other fax unit support subaddress password transactions If the other party s fax does not support subaddress password transactions you cannot relay documents Make sure you have both registered the same ITU T subaddress password 9 4 Is your fax set up to relay documents Make sure your fax is set up properly to relay documents The relay feature must be turned on 9 7 Does the other party s fax support ITU T subaddresses and pass words Contact the other party and confirm that they called you with the correct subaddress password Are the originator s subaddress password correct The originator must send you the document with the correct ITU T subaddress password The ITU T password setting is optional However if you set a password on your relay TX group then the originator must send a password Otherwise your fax will not receive the document for relay broadcasting 9 6 Check the relay TX group and determine if it has been set to check the identity of the originator before it receives the docu ment for a relay broadcast 9 6 L Other party
27. How Your Registered Data Is Protected This is what happens when the fax is disconnected Q K j 5 H L The backup battery takes over and keeps a trickle of current flowing to the memory in order to preserve all the documents in the memory waiting to be sent or printed Memory Features L However if the fax is left off for longer than approximately 12 hours all documents in the fax memory will be lost after the battery runs down and as soon as power is restored to the fax a Memory Clear Report is printed that shows you what documents were erased 14 20 I Because your user data and speed dialing settings are constantly refreshed by a lithium battery they will not be lost as a result of a power failure even if power to the fax is cut off for longer than approximately 12 hours L When many documents are stored in the fax memory the fax may need about 2 minutes to recover after power is restored to the fax About the Backup Battery Here is a list of things to keep in mind about the backup battery L The backup battery that preserves document data in the memory for up to 12 hours in case of a power loss is a rechargeable battery and it requires about 1 day to reach full charge after power to the fax unit is restored L Frequently disconnecting the fax unit from the power source short ens the service life of the battery Chapter 8 Using the Memory Features 8 27 L To avoid shortening the backup b
28. MEMORY LIST A v C J3 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below MEMORY REFERENCE 2 PRINT DOCUMENT Set C 3 Press Set to set up to print PRINT DOCUMENT TX RX NO 0002 If you want to know the destination telephone number and time of the document press the cursor buttons lt 4 gt Press the search buttons to display the transaction number of the document you want to print Then press Set If you have set the operation password enter the password here PRINT 1ST PG ONLY YES NO G Press to print only the first page of a multi page document or or i i press to print the entire document If you have set the operation password enter the password here TX RX NO 0358 PRINTING P 001 002 Stop 4 Press Stop to return to standby 8 6 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 Sending a Document in Memory to a Different Destination Follow this procedure to select another destination for a document waiting to be polled To select a document for sending you must know its transaction number You may want to print a memory list for reference 8 5 O r ape D S m Memory Features M K 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press gt Memory Reference Poe MEMORY REFERENCE C9 1 DOC MEMORY LIST A v C JC 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below MEMORY REFERENCE 3 RESEND DOCUMENT Set C 3 Press Set then select t
29. No time is displayed for a document currently being sent or being stored in the memory for pending transmission Stop 3 Press Stop to return to standby is 8 4 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 Printing a Memory List Follow this procedure to print a list of all documents currently stored in the memory I 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Hy Memory Reference Memory If no documents are currently stored in the memory you will see Reference C9 this message NO DOC STORED o ape D S m Memory Features If documents are stored in the memory the first item on the MEMORY REFERENCE menu is displayed MEMORY REFERENCE 1 DOC MEMORY LIST Set C 2 Press Set to start printing the memory list PRINTING REPORT 12 31 1999 13 01 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 71001 DOC MEMORY LIST K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K TX RX NO MODE CONNECTION TEL ID PGS SET TIME ST TIME SENDER NAME 0011 TRANSMIT 002 HUNT INVESTMENTS 12 31 13 00 23 30 R LOUIS Chapter 8 Using the Memory Features 8 5 Printing a Document in the Memory Follow this procedure to print a document in the memory To select a document for printing you must know its transaction num ber You may want to print a memory list for reference 8 5 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Memory Reference Memory pees MEMORY REFERENCE 1 DOC
30. PASSWORD D 2 3 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four digit password between 0000 and 9999 O PASSWORD O 9 3377 o 3 Record the password number and store it in a safe location Q a ae Ou ww O o 0 Q ce P You must enter this system password every time you open the System s Settings menu Note Set C Press Set SYSTEM SETTINGS 2 RESTRICTIVE CODES Stop 4 Press Stop to return to standby Q Chapter 13 Restricting Use of the Fax 13 3 Changing or Canceling the System Settings Password Data Registration Set OPER__ SYMBOLS 13 4 Restricting Use of the Fax Follow this procedure to cancel or change the System Settings password Open the SYSTEM SETTINGS with your password Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS Press Set SYSTEM SETTINGS PASSWORD Enter the current four digit system settings password Then press Set SYSTEM SETTINGS 1 PASSWORD Chapter 13 Set C 2 Press Set PASSWORD BE 3 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the current ie password Then press Set The current password is not displayed 6 as it is entered IOO PASSWORD OJO a O 3 4 Enter the new password and press Set
31. Press Copy USER ACCESS CODE 13 12 Restricting Use of the Fax Chapter 13 ae Set 3 CO YO DOO O 4 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four digit user access code that you set previously to restrict access to copying Then press Set COPY 01 CASSETTE 1 LTR Follow the normal procedure to complete copying the document gt 5 6 Printing a Report with Restrictions ON Follow this procedure to print a report about information stored in the fax with the printing restriction set up and turned on Report A y CIE 4 OPER__ SYMBOLS Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Report REPORT 1 ACTIVITY REPORT Press the search buttons to select the type of report you want to print then press Set USER ACCESS CODE Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four digit user access code you set to protect printing reports Then press Set The fax starts printing the report PRINTING REPORT Using the Telephone with Restrictions ON When the telephone restriction feature is turned on the handset and Hook button are disabled If you pick up the handset or press the Hook button you will not hear a dial tone Chapter 13 Restricting Use of the Fax 13 13 Q a Ou ww O o 0 Q ce Turning Restrictions OFF and ON Follow this procedure to turn off the following features temporarily without changing the settings 1 Open the SYSTEM SETTI
32. Q 13 After you register a number for One touch Speed Dialing make sure you write the name of the other party on a destination label and stick it on the One touch Speed Dialing panel above the number of the One touch Speed Dialing button where the number is registered 4 14 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 Setting Up Coded Speed Dialing Coded Speed Dialing allows you to dial a number and send a document by pressing four buttons First you press Coded Dial and then enter a three digit code You can register up to 128 fax numbers for this speed dialing method In addition to the telephone number and name of the other party you can set the timer for the transmission and as well as enter other important settings identical to those for One touch Speed Dialing Follow this procedure to register a telephone number for Coded Speed Dialing 1 Open the Coded Speed Dialing menu M les Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press LS Data Registration Data REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION D D Q D R r 5 CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display below REGISTRATION 2 TEL REGISTRATION Set C3 Press Set pe c o E Q Fr tez 2 a A 7 o gt TEL REGISTRATION 1 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display below TEL REGISTRATION 2 CODED SPD DIAL Chapter 4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 15 C Press Set
33. Set i 5 Press Set USE MP TRAY OFF 6 Press the search buttons to display ON USE MP TRAY ON F If you use the MP tray for the printer function and load paper of sizes _ other than letter legal or A4 it is necessary to set USE MP TRAY to OFF Note on the FAX S PRINTER SET menu 7 Press Set SET MP TRAY SIZE LTR a aes 8 Press the search buttons to select the paper size you are loading onto the MP tray SET MP TRAY SIZE A4 Set L 9 Press Set FAX S PRINTER SET 2 OF RX COPIES Stop 10 Press Stop to return to standby Q Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 49 Selecting Paper Delivery The fax machine has three output trays an upper output tray a lower output tray and a face up tray The paper delivery method used by the fax is determined by whether the face up tray is open or closed and by the settings you make in the FAX S PRINTER SET menu Setting Face down Paper Delivery for Upper and Lower Output Trays UPPER OUTPUT TRAY LOWER OUTPUT TRAY When the face up tray is open the fax will automatically select face up delivery To select face down delivery make sure the face up tray is closed If the extension of the face up tray is extended be sure to push it back into the tray before closing You can also designate an output tray for each function FAX COPY REPORT and PRINTER Follow the procedure described below If no setting is made for face down delivery and the face up tr
34. This feature can be turned off with the User Data Settings 16 8 Relay Broadcast Report The Relay Broadcast Report is sent from a relay unit to the originator after the documents from the originator have been relayed by the relay unit This feature is set with the TX REPORT item in the RELAY TX GROUP menu 9 7 16 22 12 31 1999 14 37 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC ADAM BOOK CPA 001 001 EEEE HC He He eC ee ee ee eee ee 2 oe 2 kk kk 2k kk ok RELAY BROADCAST REPORT kkk EEEE HC AC He ee ee ee eC ee 2 2 oe 2 2 kk 2k kK ok kk ok TX RX NO 5010 PGS 1 TX RX INCOMPLETE 02 761 1298 JOHN BARRISTER TRANSACTION OK 011732 2233 ADAM BOOKS CPA 03 1 914 438 3619 SEYMOUR GREEN ERROR INFORMATION 14 16 Printing Reports and Lists Chapter 14 Memory Lists These reports list information about what is contained in the memory at the current time Confidential Mailbox List Follow this procedure to print a list of all confidential mailboxes regis tered in the fax This list also shows you which confidential mailboxes are currently holding documents This list does not list the passwords for the confidential mailboxes and Lists e Pe ihe fe Q 3 a 5 t zk rs A 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Report REPORT 1 ACTIVITY REPORT e o gt Oo O jC 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below REPORT 5 CONF MAILBX LIST Set C
35. Using the Fax as a Copier sccssicsiei ccasccestevessassiscnssanssssansaocensbivastessersassanoucnsanas 5 1 Preparing the Document cscesesseceeeeseeseeeeeesseececesseesecsseasseeseaenees 5 2 Setting a Document On the Fax sistocessedeassazstietacsonjetsadelreebieceseaeoederesoe 5 3 Performing the Document Settings cssseseeeereeeeeeteeeeseeneeaeeees 5 4 Making Coples asnarin enaa eaves aw A ne 5 6 Chapter6 Sending Documents co cstces csss skies naissante aio e RES AA 6 1 Setting a Document for Sending seesessessesssererrersrsresesrsrrsrsresrsrsresrseeees 6 2 Preparing thie MOCUm eit sarearen a ENE 6 2 Setting the Document on the Fax ssssssssssssesesesreseerereresreresrsreresrerss 6 3 Adjusting the Scanning Settings 0 0 0 sssesecsssecseeeseesseeceeeseeereees 6 4 Delecline a sen der IN aie oren rae gcse AA ode 6 6 Usine Reeular DanS serrian i a a a R ANE 6 7 Canceling Sending a DOCUMeNt sissies isis ane aisi 6 8 To Cancel Sending on a Single Line eee eeeeeeeeees 6 8 To Cancel Sending on a Dual Line cece anaa 6 9 Dialing Long Distance with Regular Dialing 0 ee eeeteeeeee 6 10 Overview of Sending Methods ssessssesessssssessssesesessesesessesesenseseses 6 12 Memory pendini rasei E 6 12 Directo endih ennio E 6 15 Manual Sending siroaa tan Sarai one ia ectueueeeneaets 6 17 Re dialing When the Line is Busy cc ssseseeeeeeeeeeteeeeseneeeeaeeees 6 19 What is Automatic Redialing 20
36. feature with a user software switch included with the user data settings For better security the PIN codes are not displayed on the LCD display during dialing only a C appears and they do not appear in printed activity reports Expanded transaction features You can create up to 50 private memory boxes and set them up to receive documents If the other party s fax can use ITU T subaddresses and passwords you can set up and use memory boxes even if the other party s fax unit is not a Canon fax Chapter 1 JBIG Improved image data compression JBIG is anew ITU T standard image data compression method JBIG s compression method allows data to be compressed more efficiently than MMR a conven tional compression method JBIG is especially effec tive when transmitting halftone image documents Because the smaller data size requires less transmis sion time JBIG saves you time and money Actual compression ratio may vary with image Super G3 is a phrase used to describe the new generation of fax machines that use ITU T V 34 standard 33 6Kbps modems Super G3 High Speed Fax machines allow transmission time of approximately 3 seconds per page which results in Hea PEro EROGIMILE reduced telephone line charges Approximately 3 seconds per page fax transmission time based on CCITT ITU T No 1 Chart JBIG Standard Mode at 33 6Kbps modem speed The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN currently supports 2
37. note the message then look it up in the error message table 715 38 N Note 7 4 Receiving Documents Chapter 7 Turning on and Adjusting the Auto Switch Time If you have installed the optional handset or connected an extension telephone to the fax machine follow this procedure to set the ring time before the fax switches automatically to the document receive mode while in the manual receive mode This allows more time for you to pick up the handset and answer the telephone for voice communication before the fax switches to the receive mode of Et EF os aT 26 xA 1 Open the RX SETTINGS menu M Q Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press LS Data Registration e C REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Set C3 Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS A vy CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 4 RX SETTINGS Set C Press Set RX SETTINGS 1 ECM RX 2 Open the MAN AUTO SWITCH menu CJC Press the search button until you see the display below RX SETTINGS 2 MAN AUTO SWITCH Chapter 7 Receiving Documents 7 5 Set Set vlan Manual RX C Press Set MAN AUTO SWITCH OFF Press the search buttons until you see the display below MAN AUTO SWITCH ON F T RING TIME 15SEC Set the amount of time the fax waits before automatically switch ing to the document receive mode Press Set Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to
38. 0 eesesseeseeseceeeseeeseeseeseees 6 19 Setane UP RCC Tea sires A R E EA 6 20 Auto Redial Setup SUMMATY serotina wesusvocasideesees 6 21 Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One Location 6 22 Sending Documents at a Preset Time cee eee nanei 6 24 Sending a Document with a Subaddress Password seee 6 27 Subaddress Password Sending with Speed Dialing 6 27 Subaddress Password Sending with the Operation Panel DU LLONS ascesa E A E N 6 28 Chapter 7 Receiving DocumeniSsossasnnusninscainian a a 7 1 Receiving Documents Automatically essssesssseeeseesrseserersresesrseesesreses 7 2 Contents xix Setting the Automatic Receive Mode uu ceesseseseeeteeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 2 Messages Displayed When Receiving a Document e0 7 2 Turning on and Adjusting the Auto Switch Time eee 7 5 Receiving Documents Manually with the Optional Handset 7 7 Receiving a Document Manually at the Fax nsss 7 7 Receiving a Document Manually with an Extension Telephone ccscsssssscsseceseesecesseesecceessenseassessserseees 7 8 Changing the Remote Receive ID ou eeseseeeteeceseneeeeseeeeeeneeeees 7 9 Canceling Receiving a Document eee eee eeeeetseteeeeeeeeeeeeeens 7 11 To Cancel Receiving on a Single Line eee eeeeeeeeee 7 11 To Cancel Receiving on a Dual Line ccc cecseseseeseeseoees 7 12 Transterring Documents aerineuoiiiacinia aa n Eea 7 13
39. 2 18 Removing the Shipping Material 0 ce eeeseseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesees 2 19 Removing the Shipping Tapes 0 0 ccsseseseseeseeeeseeeeesceeesseneees 2 19 Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Fax Unit 2 19 Removing the Packing Materials from Paper Cassette 1 2 21 Removing the Protective Plastic Sheet o n 2 22 Assembling the Fax sanien Set orades a a iaetieeiaaeest 2 23 Installing the Toner Cartridge eseeeseseeeseeeesiseerrsrsrrrrrrerereresrsrn 2 23 Attaching the Document Output Tray and the Upper Output Tray sinen e aot ai ogee 2 26 Attaching the Document Feeder Tray 0 esssesseeeteneeeeeeeees 2 27 Installing Paper Cassette 2 For the LASER CLASS 3175 ONIY sscaracscsseszscaneboanidosrseessseseatad 2 28 Loading Paper in Paper Cassettes 1 and 2 seses 2 31 Connecting the Handset Option 0 cesseseeseeeeeeeeeteseeeeneeeeees 2 38 Connecting the Telephone Line 00 0 ee eeeseeeeseeeeseteeeeseeeeeneeeees 2 39 Connecting an Extension Phone ccsssesseseesereeeeseeeeeseneeeeees 2 40 Turine on the POW OF osadena a 2 41 Usine the MP ar genera ee ee E AREE EEE 2 43 Roading the VP I ay as ccseen ch ions aececbieaed E 2 43 Turning on and off USE MP TRAY and Setting the Paper Size in the USE MP TRAY Menu 2 48 pelectines Paper Delivery zean ie Ai 2 50 Setting Face down Paper Delivery for Upper and Lower OULDUL TRAYS eanna A 2 50 Using the Face up Tray cccssssssc
40. 2 40 OP Tarr onthe POW CN irion A 2 41 Setting Up 2 1 ErUsme Ee NVI Ay set stars ets seslotaacs E TEAR 2 43 Loading the MP Tray aeareemmnerte mererere eye e A ER 2 43 e Turning on and off USE MP TRAY and Setting the Paper Size in the USE MP TRAY Menu ee 2 48 el Seleetine Paper DeUe oeer in A E E 2 50 e Setting Face down Paper Delivery for Upper and Lower OCU UE Tay oecuosno iioi E ENR 2 50 eUsine the Faceup Tray ohon EA teehee 2 53 A Usine the Optimal Daal Line ssisssssnssgn orenean naen i 2 54 e Connecting Two Telephone Lines se sssseeeesseessreresererereerereresrers 2 54 e How the Two Telephone Lines Operate seseseeeeeeeeeeeeerrerereees 2 56 e Registering the Telephone Numbers for the Lines 0 2 57 2 2 Setting Up Chapter 2 How to Use This Guide Before you use this guide read this list of symbols terms and abbrevia tions and make sure you know what they mean A complete glossary of terms is included at the end of this User s Guide 2 12 default document menu search buttons transaction number TX RX NO RX TX Chapter 2 A number preceded by an arrow and enclosed in parentheses references a page number in this User s Guide which contains more information about the topic of the previous sentence A factory setting that remains in effect unless you change it A document is the original sheet s of paper you send receive or copy on the facsimile A m
41. 2 59 LINE1 TX PRIORITY When both lines are open transmission is sent on Line 1 If Line 1 is busy and Line 2 is open transmission is sent on Line 2 LINE2 TX PRIORITY When both lines are open transmission is sent on Line 2 If Line 2 is busy and Line 1 is open transmission is sent on Line 1 LINE1 TX PROHIBIT Even if both lines are open transmission is sent on Line 2 Line 1 is only available for receiving LINE2 TX PROHIBIT Even if both lines are open transmission is sent on Line 1 Line 2 is only available for receiving a sE Looy ot s EE ESO 50 N Chapter 16 Summary of Important Settings 16 33 Relationship between BATCH TX QUICK ON LINE TX and Timer Settings QUICK ON LINE TX BATCH TX Documents go into memory and are grouped Group is sent at the specified time Documents go into memory and are grouped The group is sent at the specified time Documents go into memory but are not grouped Each document is sent at the specified time Documents go into memory but are not grouped Each document is sent at the specified time 16 34 Summary of Important Settings TIMER SET WITH SPEED DIALING BUTTONS If the line is available documents are not grouped and are sent immediately If the line is busy documents go into memory are grouped then are sent when the line becomes available Documents go into memory are grouped and then are sent when the line becomes available If the
42. 3 Press Set to start printing the report PRINTING REPORT 12 31 1999 14 50 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 1001 CONFID MBOX CONFID MBOX NAME 01 LOUIS 02 ROBERTS 03 THOMAS 04 DILLON Chapter 14 Printing Reports and Lists 14 17 Document Memory List Follow this procedure to print a Document Memory List for all docu ments currently stored in the memory f Report 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press M N CO Report n n n REPORT 1 ACTIVITY REPORT C J J 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below REPORT 4 DOC MEMORY LIST Set 3 Press Set PRINTING REPORT 12 31 1999 13 01 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 7 001 ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok OK ok ok ok ok ok ok ok Ok ok ok ok ok Ok ok OK Ok Kk ok DOC MEMORY LIST 2k 2k ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok OK ok ok ok ok ok ok ok Ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok Ok TX RX NO MODE CONNECTION TEL ID PGS SET TIME ST TIME SENDER NAME 0011 TRANSMIT 002 HUNT INVESTMENTS 12 31 13 00 23 30 R LOUIS 14 18 Printing Reports and Lists Chapter 14 Received memory box list Follow this procedure to list all documents currently received and held in memory boxes Repot 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press gt C Report REPORT 1 ACTIVITY REPORT 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below and Lists REPORT 6 RX MEM BOX LIST PRINTING REPORT C
43. 33600 14400 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps 8 RX START SPEED Set the transmission speed for all documents you receive Available settings 33600 14400 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps 9 RX PASSWORD Set an RX password to match the ITU T password of all incoming document transmissions Enter a 20 digit max ITU T password To receive a document this RX password must match the ITU T password of the incoming document After the RX password has been set all incoming docu ments must have a matching ITU T password if not The document will be received regardless of this setting if the incoming document has a matching subaddress and password for a memory box 16 30 Summary of Important Settings Chapter 16 10 ENERGY SAVER OFF ON Set the fax machine to reduce power consumption when not in use 3 21 Fax machine does not power down even when it is idle The fax machine reduces power consumption after it has remained idle for a specified length of time ENERGY SVR TIME Set the idle time to elapse and trigger reduced power con sumption 03 to 30MIN Default is O3MIN If you have installed the Dual line Upgrade kit or the PCL6 Printer Board the energy saver feature will not work and 10 ENERGY SAVER will not be displayed in the menu 10 PHONE NO CHECK will be displayed instead 11 PHONE NO CHECK Allows you to prevent sending a document to an un OFF ON Chapter 16 wanted destination The number you dial i
44. 8 13 IVIAIT DO PCLIA ES sairiactpantut cance oseiuusite ncaa EA 8 13 Feature SOtH IN S saei en a a a 8 14 Creanne a Memory BOX sosirea as a a ganiens 8 14 Changing the Memory Box Settings eeseseeeeeeeeserrererrsrreresee 8 22 Canceling a Memory BOX csscsssescesaseottons acevetdmsanceoehdvadstessauivenesnesasdes 8 23 Sending a Document Stored in the Memory BoX ieee 8 24 Printing a Document Received in a Memory BoxX eee 8 25 What Happens to Memory after a Power Failure cece 8 27 How Your Registered Data Is Protected s es 8 27 About the Backup Battery 20 0 0 esssesecsssesseesseeseceeeeesesseesseeseeseses 8 27 Chapter9 Using a Relay Network vsssssssscsssnosaionssscnscscninssucescdacanssarersiadsnarasrursnnonssboonesas 9 1 XX Contents Whatis Relay Broadcasting isidstansaestsddpesessarestausdesetacieasiatoneanesneseirests 9 2 Setting Up and Using a Standard Relay Unit eee 9 3 Setting Your Fax asia Relay Unit ais sissajstdvictsasssonsesncsesnscconnduntedesstoss 9 4 Changing the Relay Broadcast Settings cceceseseseeseeeeteeeeseees 9 7 Deleting the Relay Group sac csesescasascsseacacasaessencnacsiet gt satzennpunscaastebaazece 9 9 Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for Relay Broadcasting 9 10 Sending a Document to a Relay Unit with Speed Dialing 9 12 Sending with the Relay Broadcast Button ceeeeeneeeeteneees 9 12 Chapter 10 Using Confidential Mailboxes sesseeseessossoeseossoss
45. 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 1001 FILE NAME TX RX NO CONNECTION TEL 1 213 978 3314 SUBADDRESS 0000 CONNECTION ID BELZER INC ST TIME 12 31 13 29 USAGE T 00 18 PGS 1 RESULT OK Chapter 8 Using the Memory Features 8 25 A message will alternate with the standby display date and time until you print the document received in the memory box RECEIVED IN MEM BOX M K 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press p Memory Box MEMORY BOX 1 MEMORY BOX TX A vy C J3 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below Set C 3 Press Set SUBADDRESS MEMORY BOX 2 MEMORY BOX RX CJ 4 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU T subaddress of the memory box holding the document you want to print Then press Set MEMORY BOX RX PASSWORD If you have not set the operation password the documents starts printing CJ 5 Enter the four digit operation password that protects the memory box setup and press Set After you enter the operation password the document starts O printing MEMORY BOX RX PRINTING P 001 002 8 26 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 What Happens to Memory after a Power Failure If power to the fax is lost due to a power failure or if the fax is acciden tally unplugged a built in battery keeps a trickle of current supplied to the memory so all the documents currently stored in the memory can be saved for up to approximately 12 hours
46. CODED SPD DIAL x000 2 Specify the Coded Speed Dialing code that you want to register e Press Coded Dial Then use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a three digit code 000 127 Q 2 if not 99 9 Press the search buttons to scroll the display Press the down ores visors search button to scroll to the next number or press the up search 09 button to scroll to the previous number Ai If a telephone number is already registered for a three digit code you _ will see that number displayed If a button is registered for Group Note Dialing you will see GROUP DIAL displayed CODED SPD DIAL x012 Set C With the code you want to register displayed on the LCD press Set CODED SPD DIAL 1 TELEPHONE NUMBER Set C3 Press Set again TELEPHONE NUMBER TELS 4 16 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 Set Set 4 Enter a name 3 Enter the telephone number L Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number I To enter a space press Space Spaces are optional and ignored during dialing L After you have entered the number if you see that one of the digits is incorrect press the left cursor key lt 4 to move the cursor to the digit you want to correct and press Delete Then enter the correct number L If you make a mistake press Clear to erase the number and start again TELEPHONE NUMBER TEL 123 4567_ Press Set TELEPHONE NUMBER DATA ENTRY OK CODED SPD DIAL 2 NA
47. Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 12 Other Special Features This chapter describes some convenient features that you may want to use in daily operations Ld Using the Telephone s ssessssssessssssesessesesesssseseseesesesessoseseseesesesenseseseseess 12 2 L Tone Dialing on a Pulse Line ieee ie aan 12 3 _ Setting and Using the Program Button s sssssssssssseesessseseseseststsreseseseses 12 5 L Setting Up and Using the Optional Stamp Feature eee 12 8 e Setting Up the Stamp Feature gc oscz sans cesncvensensaneiendenatapseniesttageraiuenees 12 8 Turning the Stamp Feature ON OFF sssansstuiasansrsenrissecvierssdavinans 12 10 L How the Fax Operates with Default Settings seeeeeeeeeeerereseee 12 12 Other Special Features 12 1 amp Q 3 Q a ihe 3 s O Features Using the Telephone Follow this procedure to use the telephone for voice communication if you have installed the optional handset kit 42 38 Hook 12 2 Other Special Features Pick up the handset if not Press the Hook button When you hear the dial tone dial the telephone number Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number 6 7 if not Press a One touch Speed Dialing button to dial the number 4 29 if not Press Coded Dial and a three digit code to dial the number 4 31 if not Dial the number with directory dialing 4 35 If you make a mistake during dialing press Stop to return to
48. Displays menu items and PRINTER COVER messages Covers the toner cartridge HANDSET option es yy Detachable handset LOWER OUTPUT TRAY z 2 52225 Holds printed documents after they LESSING Ve S are ejected from the fax M LESSEE f ENE SAA OPERATION PANEL PAPER GUIDES SS i EA U l gt 4 se the operation panel buttons Adjust to the width of EG eX SS to operate the LASER CLASS tha napar SS 3170 Series MP TRAY ______ L aa SPEAKER VOLUME Adjustable to letter A4 and legal Zee SWITCH paper sizes Holds about 100 lt i Adjusts the speaker s volume sheets of paper PAPER VOLUME STATUS BARS PAPER CASSETTE 1 Adjustable to letter A4 and legal paper sizes Holds about 500 sheets of paper PAPER CASSETTE 2 Adjustable to letter A4 legal B5 and executive paper sizes Holds about 500 sheets of paper Paper Cassette 2 is a standard feature for the LASER CLASS 3175 and optional for the LASER CLASS 3170 3170MS IN USE MEMORY LAMP Blinks green when the fax is transmitting or receiving documents Lights green when there are documents stored in memory ERROR LAMP Blinks red when a problem occurs Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 17 Rear View EXTENSION PHONE JACK Connect the optional handset jack or an extension phone jack here FACE UP TRAY Holds printed documents after they are ejected from the fax TEST PRINT BUTTON This b
49. Ink CS 20 Yellow L Do not use the stamp feature for at least one hour If you have to send a document turn off the stamp feature for the first hour 712 10 TO AVOID INK SPILLAGE APPLY ONLY ONE DROP OF INK TO THE STAMP PAD Caution 4 Follow steps 10 to 12 on pages 15 32 and 15 33 to close the ADF cover lower the document feeder tray and connect the power cord of the fax unit to the power source P e Make sure that you do not drip ink on any other part of the fax amp Make sure that you put the plastic loop back in place when you close Note the ADF cover 15 33 15 34 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 Error Code Table listed by number Errors in reports are recorded as numbers because there is not enough space to print a detailed description of the error in the report When errors are recorded in your reports note the number and check it against the table below to learn more about what caused the error CODE PROBLEM SOLUTION 0001 A document may be jammed in the automatic Remove the jammed document and try again document feeder ADF 15 2 0003 The document is longer than 39 4 inches 1 Make a reduced copy of the document with a meter copy machine and then send the copy or cut the document and paste it up on smaller sheets of paper gt B 2 0005 The other party s fax did not respond within Send the document again Contact the other 35 seconds party and have them ch
50. L Store toner cartridges at a constant temperature within a range of 32 F to 95 F 0 C to 35 C Do not store cartridges in locations subject to extreme fluctuation of temperature and humidity L To prevent caking in the toner never stand the cartridge on its end and do not store it upside down If the toner becomes caked as a result of being stored in an odd position for too long it may be impossible to dissolve it completely even by shaking the cartridge L Do not store the cartridge in salty or corrosive air I Never attempt to disassemble a toner cartridge or attempt to refill it L Make sure that you use a stored toner cartridge before the expiration date printed on the toner cartridge box Questions J Oo wt O N oqa o gt 5 TS cs es Li Disposing of Used Toner Cartridges NEVER INCINERATE USED CARTRIDGES SCATTERED TONER POWDER IS EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE Caution To protect the environment Canon has started a special program to help you dispose of your empty toner cartridges After you install a toner cartridge keep the original packing material and the shipping label After a cartridge has been used up fill out this label and call UPS for pickup UPS will pick up the empty toner cartridge at Canon s expense and return it to a recycling center For details about this program contact an authorized Canon dealer in your area Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 23 Periodic Cleani
51. LOUIS 0011 TRANSMIT 12 31 14 34 ADAM BOOK CPA 5010 RELAY RX 732 2233 SUBADDRESS 3333 You can set the fax to print sending and receiving transactions separately by setting the ACTIVITY REPORT item in the Report Settings menu 16 9 Chapter 14 Printing Reports and Lists 14 9 C Pe ihe fe Q 3 a 5 t sks i A and Lists IF MARKED WITH AN ASTERISK THE DOCUMENT HAS ALREADY BEEN PRINTED OUT Samples are shown below Activity Management Report TX RX separate 12 31 1999 15 03 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 7 001 TAC RCAC AC CAC CAC CRC CAC ACC HC AC HC eC Ce ee eC ee ee oe oe oe oe 2 2k ook eek ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT REPORT TX kkk 2A AC AC AC AC CAC CC AC AC ACC HC HC HCC CC Ae ee ee ee ie ee oe eC ok ook ST TIME CONNECTION TEL ID SENDER NAME NO MODE PGS RESULT 12 31 11 18 ADAM BOOK CPA 0004 TRANSMIT ECM 1 732 2233 12 31 13 08 R LOUIS 0011 TRANSMIT ECM 2 12 31 14 05 SEYMOUR GREEN 0013 B CAST ECM 1 1 914 438 3619 TAC ACC AC AC AC CC CC AC AC CC HC AC HC HC ee ee ee ee Ee oe He oe ok ook eek ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT REPORT RX kkk ELETE AC CAC CC AC AC AC AC AC AC HC Ce eC ee ee ee oe oe oe ee 2K ok ok ST TIME CONNECTION TEL ID RX NAME NO MODE RESULT 12 31 12 49 BELZER INC S ROBERTS 5005 AUTO RX 1 213 978 3314 12 31 14 33 5007 CONFID RX TRANSACTION ee I SENDING MODE TRANSACTION VIA ERROR CORRECTION MODE ECM NUMBER OF PAGES TRANSMITTED BEFORE A
52. Lift the document feeder tray the document output tray and the upper output tray Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 17 2 Open the printer cover to remove the old cartridge and discard it Do not attempt to disassemble the cartridge or refill the cartridge DO NOT INCINERATE THE CARTRIDGE SCATTERED TONER POWDER IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE Caution To dispose of the cartridge To protect the environment Canon has started a special program to help you dispose of your empty toner cartridges After you install a toner cartridge keep the original packing material Inside the box is a shipping label Fill out this label and call UPS for pickup UPS will pick up the empty toner cartridge at Canon s expense and return it to a recycling center For details about this program contact your authorized Canon dealer 3 Remove anew toner cartridge from its protective bag P Save the protective bag You may need it to transport the cartridge later Note 15 18 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 4 Rock the new cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge 5 Place the cartridge on a flat clean surface 6 Snap the tab to detach it from the cartridge s Questions lA COTTET 3 O wt O N oqa G Sf TS cs a Li 7 As you steady the cartridge with one hand remove the seal by gently pulling the plastic tab with your
53. NAME Press the search buttons to display the item you want to change CHANGE DATA 1 FILE NAME CHANGE DATA 5 ERASE AFTER TX Press Set To change the settings follow the same procedures you used to set up the polling box setup file 711 17 When you are finished press Stop to return to standby 11 22 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 11 Canceling a Polling Box Follow this procedure to cancel a polling box P You cannot cancel a polling box when the polling box is holding a el document for polling sending Note 1 Open the POLLING BOX menu 11 15 11 16 POLLING BOX oe Or FILE A y C J J 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below POLLING BOX 3 DELETE FILE Set 3 Press Set DELETE FILE SET BOX OO OO BE 4 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number of the gt C box that you want to delete Then press Set OKO DELETE FILE PASSWORD OJO If you have not set the operation password you can skip the next step Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four digit operation password protecting the polling box setup file Then 099 press Set JJV Je 2 Ol pe 5 E Q gt 28 5 2 ir 3 A After you press Set the polling box is deleted DELETE FICE FILE DELETED Chapter 11 Setting Up and Using Polling 11 23 OPER__ SYMBOLS Stop 6 Press Stop to return to standby Q 11 24 Setting Up and Using Polling
54. One touch Speed Dialing panels to start printing a report Whenever you need to print a report press the Program button SCANNING MODE Set the scanner buttons Resolution Contrast Document Type for special settings like sending a photograph for example Then you can adjust all the settings just by pressing the Program button STAMP If you have installed the optional stamp feature this option is available If you select STAMP you can turn the stamp feature on or off without opening all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels to press the Stamp button 8 OFFHOOK ALARM Turn the off hook alarm off or on which alerts you if the optional handset is not in the handset cradle ON Offhook alarm sounds if optional handset or extension telephone is left off the hook OFF No offhook alarm 9 VOLUME CONTROL Adjust the volume of the fax unit 1 KEYPAD VOLUME 1 0 to 3 2 ALARM VOLUME 1 0to3 10 TEL LINE TYPE Set the telephone line type 43 10 TOUCH TONE The telephone line is set for touch tone dialing ROTARY PULSE The telephone line is set for rotary pulse dialing If you need to dial into an information service that requires tone dialing use the Tone button on the operation panel 12 3 16 6 Summary of Important Settings Chapter 16 Report Settings Data Registration Set CL Chapter 16 R Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION
55. PASSWORD 5 OF RX COPIES 2 CHANGE DATA SET BOX PASSWORD 3 DELETE FILE SET BOX PASSWORD 2 RELAY TX GROUP 1 SETUP FILE Set up confidential mailbox 10 2 Set up a confidential mailbox Create a two digit confidential mailbox number Give the mailbox a name up to 24 characters long Assign a password to protect the mailbox from being changed or deleted Enter a 20 digit max ITU T subaddress for reception Enter a 20 digit max ITU T password for reception Sets the number of copies printed from every document Change all the mailbox settings done with the settings above Enter the number of the mailbox you want to change Enter the password protecting the mailbox settings You can now change any of the settings listed in the table above 1 SETUP FILE Delete a mailbox Enter the number of the mailbox you want to delete Enter the password protecting the mailbox you want to delete Set up relay box so your fax machine can relay document transmissions to other fax machines in your area 9 3 Set up the relay box SET RLY TX GROUP Set a two digit relay group number 00 99 1 GROUP DIAL NAME 2 PASSWORD 3 SUBADDRESS 4 RX PASSWORD 5 SELECT ORIG UNIT ON TEL OFF 6 PRINT RX DOC ON Give the relay group a name length 24 characters Assign a four digit password to protect the relay box settings Enter a 20 digit max ITU T subaddress Enter a 20 digit max ITU T passwor
56. PRE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CANON FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT A Location Supply a suitable table cabinet or desk See Appendix A for the unit s dimensions and weight B Order Information 1 Only a single telephone line touch tone or rotary is to be used 2 Order an RJ11 C modular wall jack USOC code which should be installed by the phone company If the RJ11 C wall jack is not present telephone fax operation is not possible 3 Order a normal business line from your telephone company s business representative The line should be a regular voice grade line or the equivalent Use one line per unit DDD Direct Distance Dial line if not IDDD International Direct Distance Dial line if you communi cate overseas Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards e g the 2500 Touch Tone or 500 Rotary Pulse Dial telephones A dedi cated extension off a PBX unit without Call Waiting can be used with your facsimile unit Key telephone systems are not recommended because they send non standard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes which may cause a fax error C Power Requirements The facsimile unit should be connected to a standard 120 volt AC three wire grounded outlet only Do not connect this unit to an outlet or power line shared with other appliances that cause electrical noise Air conditioners electric typewriters copiers and machines of this sort genera
57. Pe ihe fe Q 3 a 5 t sks i A 3 Press Set 12 31 1999 15 01 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 1001 FILE NAME R LOUIS Chapter 14 Printing Reports and Lists 14 19 Memory Clear Report If a power failure occurs the documents currently stored in the memory can be saved for up to approximately 12 hours If power is not restored to the fax within 12 hours the documents in the fax memory will be lost If this time limit has elapsed by the time power is restored to the fax unit as soon as power is restored a list of documents deleted from the memory as a result of the power failure is printed automatically 12 31 1999 11 52 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 7 001 HEC HC AC He He He He Hee ee He He He He eC Ie ee ee 2 oe ko ok xxx MEMORY CLEAR REPORT x FK K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K MEMORY FILES DELETED TX RX NO MODE CONNECTION TEL ID SET TIME ST TIME SENDER NAME 0011 TRANSMIT 002 HUNT INVESTMENTS 2 12 31 13 00 23 30 R LOUIS 5011 CONFID RX 1 12 31 14 46 14 20 Printing Reports and Lists Chapter 14 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 Chapter 15 This chapter shows you how to perform the routine tasks required to keep the fax unit operating at peak performance At the end of this chapter you are shown how to troubleshoot minor problems in response to error messages in reports or on the LCD display Ld Removing Document Feed Jams
58. Press Directory and search for the name to dial a number registered for subaddress password sending gt 4 35 Start Scan 4 Press Start Scan TRANSMITTING 0010 SCANNING DOC P 001 Subaddress Password Sending with the Operation Panel Buttons Note these limitations on entering the subaddress password with the Subaddress and Password buttons on the operation panel L If you frequently need to use a subaddress password to send a document to more than one location register the number subaddress and password for a One touch or Coded Speed Dialing button so you can use multiple broadcasting 6 22 _J You cannot use the Subaddress or Password buttons for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing button that is set for anything other than REGULAR TX 4 6 4 15 L The password setting is optional but required if the other party has set a password on the other fax unit Follow this procedure to send a document with a subaddress password entered with the Subaddress and Password buttons on the operation panel 6 28 Sending Documents Chapter 6 y 1 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can also select a sender s name with the TTI Selector 6 6 O 2 Dial the telephone number N MN Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the telephone 5 6 number or use the speed dialing buttons to dial G O To dial with One touch Speed dialing pre
59. Press Start Scan on your fax and hang up your handset The fax begins to send the document If the offhook alarm starts beeping make sure the handset is resting properly on the handset cradle Chapter 6 Re dialing When the Line is Busy If the other party s line is busy or if there is no answer the fax waits two minutes and then dials the same number again This feature is called automatic redialing What is Automatic Redialing After the initial dial attempt the fax will wait two minutes and try to dial again If the second attempt fails the fax will again wait for two minutes and make a final attempt to complete the call P Even if the fax machine is set to redial several times it will redial only m n once if there is no tone or there is a ring back tone during the first Note attempt Auto redial can be turned off and on The number of redialing attempts and the time interval between attempts can be set up with the auto redial feature gt 6 20 16 11 While the fax is waiting to redial the following messages are displayed alternately 12 31 1999 FRI 09 30 AUTO REDIAL 12 31 1999 FRI 09 30 TX RX NO 3888 If both redial attempts are unsuccessful the fax will cancel the transac tion display the following message and print an Error TX report to remind you that the transmission was not completed 12 31 1999 FRI 09 30 BUSY NO SIGNAL D S Q V Documents Chapter 6 Sending Documents 6 19 Sto
60. SELECT LOCATIONS 8 18 Using the Memory Features Determines whether to print a received document ON Documents will be printed when they are received in the memory box and you can set how they will be printed OFF Documents received in the memory box are not printed If you turn on PRINT RX DOC you can also set the print method AUTO A document will print automati cally as soon as it is received in the memory box MAN You will have to manually print documents received in the memory box 01 COPIES If you turn on PRINT RX DOC use this setting to specify the number of copies you want to print 01 99 Determines whether to transmit documents from the memory box and how they are to be transmitted NO Documents are not transmitted from the memory box YES Documents are transmitted from the memory box Allows you to select the destinations of the docu ments to be transmitted from the memory box Press the appropriate One touch button or press the Coded Dial button followed by the appropriate three digit code to enter numbers for dialing Chapter 8 Memory Box Setup Summary Cont d 2 TX DOCUMENT 1 RECEIVED DOCUMENT TX REPORT 2 5CAN DOCUMENT Chapter 8 Determines whether to 1 transmit documents received in the memory box from another fax or 2 transmit documents scanned into the memory box Sets the memory box to receive documents from other fax units and transmit them to other destina ti
61. TRAY LASER CLASS 3175 or LASER CLASS 3170 3170MS with optional cassette CASSETTE 1 CASSETTE 2 MP TRAY E sE asop sts FE ESO 5 Eu N Chapter 16 Summary of Important Settings 16 9 TX Send Settings Data Registration Set A y CL Set A y CL R Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Press the search buttons to display 3 TX SETTINGS DATA REGISTRATION 3 TX SETTINGS Press Set TX SETTINGS 1 ECM TX Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change Default settings are in bold 1 ECM TX ON OFF 2 MID PAUSE SET 16 10 Summary of Important Settings Turn ECM error correction mode transmission off and on This switch does not affect the button setups for One touch or Coded Speed dialing 4 6 4 15 All transmissions are conducted with ECM if the other party s fax supports ECM ECM is turned off Set the length of the pause entered between number when you press the Pause button 01 to 15SEC 4 3 02SEC Chapter 16 3 AUTO REDIAL ON OFF 4 BATCH TX ON OFF 5 QUICK ON LINE TX ON OFF 6 TIME OUT ON OFF Chapter 16 Select whether to perform automatic redial when the other line is busy or no answer 6 20 Customize the redial operation 1 REDIAL TIMES From 01 to 10 times O
62. The new password is XG displayed as it is entered Q a ae if not Q OIO To cancel the password setting press Clear then Set SYSTEM SETTINGS 2 RESTRICTIVE CODES Stop 5 Press Stop to return to standby O Chapter 13 Restricting Use of the Fax 13 5 Q a ae Ou ww O o 0 Q ce Restricting Fax Operation This section describes how to set up restrictions on operation of the fax We will first show you how to set up restrictions on sending documents printing fax reports and copying and using the telephone Then we will show you how to use the fax with these restrictions on Finally we will show you how to turn these restrictions off temporarily or make changes in the settings The table below is a brief summary of how restrictive codes and pass words are used SENDING Dept access RESTRICTION code DAC ON Without a password Dept access With user access code code DAC OFF No user access code Dept access code With a password Every time you send a docu ment you must enter a department code and password Every time you send a document you only have to enter a department code Every time you send a document you only have to enter a user access code You cannot send a document unless you turn sending restriction OFF Every time you make a copy or print a report you must enter a user access code PRINTING With user access code RESTRICTION Without
63. a document a small sized document such as a STMT size document may Note have remained in the ADF from a previous fax or copy job In such a case remove the small sized document from the ADF and then set your document Performing the Document Settings Canon s original Ultra High Quality UHQ imaging technology allows you to make copies that are very close to the quality of the original document For best results adjust the settings for special documents before copying Follow these guidelines to change a setting L The lighted indicator tells you the current setting 5 4 Using the Fax as a Copier Chapter 5 L Press the appropriate button repeatedly to light the setting you want L After the document is copied the settings return to the setting before copying lt cUltra Fine Super Fine Darker Fine Standard ST ext Standard Lighter Text Photo Ls E C Resolution Contrast Document Type Resolution When copying a document Ultra Fine is automati cally selected for you Contrast Adjusts the lightness darkness of the document pages scanned for copying Darker For documents with light text or colors Standard For standard printed or typewrit ten text Lighter For documents with dark text or colors Document Type Select for documents with text only or with text and photos on the same page Text For documents that contain text without photographs Text Photo For documents that contain text and p
64. all the way into the fax unit until it locks into place 2 37 L Cannot get faxes from information services Is your fax connected to a rotary dial telephone line Even if your fax is connected to a rotary dial line you can still get faxes from information services that require tone dialing Press Tone to receive faxes from information services that require touch tone telephone lines for transmission 12 3 Questions oo wt on oqa o gt 5S S ss o Te Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 47 Recording the User Reminder Sheets The user reminder sheets are essential for recording the passwords box numbers subaddresses and so on so you do not forget them We recommend that you make a copy of these sheets fill them out and use them for reference After you fill out these reminder sheets store them in a safe place to protect their confidentiality and so you can find them later for reference Password Reminder Description Password four digit System Settings Protects the user data System Settings from unauthorized access Sending Restrictions Restricts document sending to holders of the User Access Code Printing Restrictions Restricts report printing and document copying Memory Reception Protects your Memory Reception button setup from unautho rized access Transfer Protects your Transfer button setup from unauthorized access 15 48 Maintenance amp Frequently As
65. an outside line or some countries may require a pause for over seas fax transmission Pause time When registering long distance numbers you sometimes have to insert a pause either within or after the number The destination of the pause and pause time depend on the system Pauses entered within a number are 2 seconds long and a pause at the end of a number is 10 seconds A pause is inserted in a number or at the end of a number by pressing the Pause button The Pause button is factory preset to enter a 2 second pause within a number although this may differ according to your location Pauses entered after a number are always fixed at 10 seconds If you adjust the pause time this only changes the length of the pauses inserted within numbers and does not affect pauses entered at the end of numbers PBX Stands for private branch exchange A PBX controls the flow of telephone traffic through the institution itself including automatic call back and dialing and paging systems See switchboard G 9 G 10 PIN code PIN means Personal Identification Number Some Private Branch Exchange PBX systems require that a PIN code be entered when dialing a number to make a call or send a document by fax machine PIN codes prevent unau thorized personnel from making calls To protect privileged access to the telephone lines only authorized users are entrusted with the PIN codes for daily operations Depending on the requirements of the PBX syste
66. and Printing Documents 13 20 el Setting Up and Using PIN Codes siccscesesssscsuesarseaniacedngsisansuenttarsarudaasions 13 21 petine a TINC Ode sieri a E N 13 21 e Dialing with a PIN Code after the Number n ssssssesesesesseseseseeses 13 24 e Dialing with a PIN Code before the Number sssesssesesssesesesesees 13 25 e Setting PIN Code Access for Speed Dialing 0 eee 13 26 e Using Speed Dialing with PIN Code Access ceseeseeeeeeeees 13 27 Forced TIN C Ode ACES urre T E RE 13 28 Restricting Use of the Fax 13 1 Q a ae Ou ww O o 0 Q ce Setting and Using the System Settings Pass word The system settings password protects all the settings in the System Settings menu P If you fail to create and safeguard a system password then anyone can open the System Settings menu and change or disable the settings Note Setting the System Settings Password Follow this procedure to set the system settings password 1 Open the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu le Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press ESS Data Registration pea tio REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS ep D CCE Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS Set Press Set SYSTEM SETTINGS 1 PASSWORD 13 2 Restricting Use of the Fax Chapter 13 2 Set the system password Set Press Set
67. and remove the toner cartridge 15 9 Store the cartridge in its original protective bag to avoid exposure to light 15 12 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 3 Hold the green lever and flip the transfer guide up then slowly pull the paper out from below GREEN LEVER 26 TRANSFER A A GUIDE ALF e The spring for the transfer guide is strong Always guide the transfer mel guide slowly back to its original position by holding the green lever Note Never let it jump back by releasing the lever e When removing the jammed paper be careful not to touch the transfer charging roller If the roller becomes dirty the print quality will deteriorate e After removing the jammed paper make sure you insert the cassette all the way into the fax unit until it locks into place N Questions O 0 9A oqa o gt 5 ES ss s Li 6 Paper Cassette 2 area Before removing Paper Cassette 2 check inside the printer cover If you see the edge of the paper follow the procedure of removing the jammed paper in the imaging area 15 8 to 15 10 If you do not see the edge follow the procedure below Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 13 1 Remove Paper Cassette 2 2 Locate the jammed paper inside Paper Cassette 2 and gently pull it out e If the jammed paper is still within the paper feed area inside the fax J unit do not force it Always release th
68. and repeat the procedure to set the times for that day if not When you are finished selecting days and setting times press Stop to return to standby Setting Up and Using Polling 11 11 ge 5 E Q gt 28 5 2 ir 3 a Changing the Preset Polling Settings Follow this procedure to change the settings of the preset polling setup file 1 Open the PRESET POLLING menu gt 11 6 PRESET POLLING 1 SETUP FILE C JC 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below PRESET POLLING 2 CHANGE DATA Set C 3 Press Set CHANGE DATA SET BOX OO a 5 4 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the two digit a ao oe number of the preset polling box you want to change Then press OOO Set J2 CHANGE DATA 90H PASSWORD If you have not set the operation password you can skip the next step password and press Set eo CHANGE DATA ORS 1 FILE NAME OJO Ja Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four digit 11 12 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 11 C J 6 Use the search buttons to display the item you want to change and a press Set CHANGE DATA 1 FILE NAME CHANGE DATA 4 START TIME 7 To change a setting follow the same procedures you used to set them 11 7 L To change the password setting you will first have to enter the current password and press Set Then you can enter a new password and press Set St y 8 When you are finish
69. buttons until you see a number with no entry SENDER S NAME O5 Set 5 Press Set SENDER S NAME A OLS 6 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name of up to 24 characters 3 7 g SENDER S NAME A O 05 K SMITH x 3 s ihn pe N 5 p J 3 Lo 7 When you are finished entering the name press Set SENDER S NAME A DATA ENTRY OK SENDER S NAME 06 Repeat the procedure to enter another name or press Stop to return to standby Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 19 Changing or Erasing a Sender Name 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 of the procedure you used to register the sender name 3 18 4 2 Press the search buttons to display the name you want to edit or delete SENDER S NAME 10 J SMITH Set C 3 Press Set SENDER S NAME A 10 J SMITH 4 To change the sender name use the buttons on the numeric keypad 43 7 if not O Q 9 Q a To delete the sender name press Clear O S 5 When you are finished making changes press Set Stop gt 6 Press Stop to return to standby 3 20 Getting Started Chapter 3 Using the Energy Saver Mode For the LASER CLASS 3170 3175 Only You can set the fax machine to enter a low energy sleep mode after it remains idle for a specified length of time This ensures that the fax machine consumes less power when it is not being used If you install either the optional Dual line Upgrade Kit o
70. can save time by using Group Dialing Density control You can darken or lighten documents that you send or receive with buttons at the top of the operation panel Destination label Attachable label used to label speed dialing buttons on the facsimile machine Write the name of the other party on the label and then paste the label above the button where his or her fax number is registered Dialing methods Dialing numbers at the press of one or a few buttons To use automatic dialing you must register the fax numbers in the memory of the machine e Regular dialing One touch Speed Dialing Coded Speed Dialing Group Dialing Directory Dialing Direct sending Use direct sending if the memory is full but you still want to send a document Direct sending scans and sends one page at a time The document is not scanned into the memory so it takes a little more time to get your original document back Document The single sheet or stack of papers containing the data you want to send through or receive from a fax machine G 3 Document density The document density settings alter the lightness or darkness of the documents sent or received See density control Document guides Guide the document into the fax for scanning copying or sending Document memory list The memory list shows what documents are currently stored in the fax memory Each memory list shows e Transaction number for each document e How each document wa
71. cannot poll and receive your document Does the other party s fax support ITU T subaddress password sending If the other party s fax does not support ITU T subaddress password you have to make a polling box 00 for the other party and scan the document without subaddress password 11 15 If the other party s fax is a Canon fax and can set a polling ID ask them to set the polling ID for 255 decimal or 1111 1111 binary 15 44 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 Documents Are Not Being Received Correctly L Cannot receive documents automatically Is the Manual RX indicator on your operation panel on If this indicator is on press the button below Manual RX to turn it off 7 2 1 Cannot receive manually Is there a document set in the automatic document feeder ADF You cannot receive with a document set in the automatic docu ment feeder ADF Remove the document and try again 15 2 Did you press Start Scan before you hung up the handset When you hear a high pitched tone press Start Scan before you hang up the handset Review the procedure for manual receiving with the optional handset kit installed on the fax 7 7 1 Are the documents you receive of poor quality Is your toner cartridge running low on toner Remove your toner cartridge and rotate it 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the remaining toner and try again If this does not solve the problem you should change the toner cartridge 1
72. ccisssssssscaseavasceunrsecuesevascossoxaanaysvevennzaus 15 2 kd Removing Printer Feed JaMS s ssrsissiseinsereiisninenrerissisrseruinsssirererinssreenens 15 4 e Locatia a Paper Jini senie ENS 15 5 W Storne Recording Papel sedrasi a E ener ere ere 15 13 Recommended Fapt esensina iaon ea 15 15 e Dionne ePaper Sapply sieca 15 16 L Changing the Toner Cartridge esessssessssssssessesesesesresesessereresseseseseess 15 17 al Storing Toner Cartridges asssociati inei niaaa 15 22 Handine a CS cass str oan aus rasneetancepeaaiseteracueiesusanearenmehyeaesesacees 15 22 OT C1 E a T N A sence 15 23 Disposing of Used Toner Cartridges sssissessssiassisecnsrssnrensinvesn 15 23 HB Penodie CENE sarreron meee A E te 15 24 eC lcanine me Tax Uni aeiae enaA E ne one re 15 24 e Cleaning the Transfer Guide Area sssessessiseeeeereresesrsrererrererseeees 15 25 e Cleaning the Scanning Area esesessssesesseseressssesesescsresesessesesesseseses 15 27 L Refilling the Stamp Ink Compartment Option s ssssssssessseesesesseses 15 33 _ Error Code Table listed by number sssssssesessesssesessssseseseseseseseseses 15 35 L List of LCD Display Messages Alphabetic List eeeeeeeeees 15 38 L Questions and Answers sicciy sux dcncwesossenannonnsonidcenvasbacdeentccessormwarevsnedes 15 42 e Documents Are Not Being Sent Correctly ssesessesereseeerrererseees 15 42 e Documents Are Not Being Received Correctly 00 cece 15 45 e Documents Are Not Being
73. comput ers or large printers that can generate strong electromag netic fields Large equipment can generate electronic noise that can interfere with the operation of the fax Chapter 2 _J Choose a location that is clean and free from dust and moisture _J Do not use or store the fax outdoors L Place the fax unit near a telephone line You must have an RJ11 C wall jack installed If you need assistance contact your authorized Canon dealer or service representative or your local telephone company Z Joan A To avoid damage to the fax unit from overheating do not block the exhaust vent Install the fax unit approximately 4 in 10 cm away from walls or other equipment Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 5 Space Around the Fax To ensure proper ventilation and easy operation set up the fax in an area that meets the minimum requirements for clearance as illustrated below TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE FAX UNIT FROM OVERHEATING DO NOT BLOCK THE EXHAUST VENT INSTALL THE FAX UNIT Caution APPROXIMATELY 4 IN 10CM AWAY FROM WALLS OR OTHER EQUIPMENT PAPER CASSETTE 2 al Standard with the LASER CLASS 20 508 mm 3175 optional for the LASER CLASS 28 1 713 mm 3170 3170MS 32 6 828 mm Oo o O o oo Oo nm Peene oo ango o A O0000 OOOOO OOO ore CF OOO 19 8 501 mm 22 5 571 mm 2 6 Setting Up
74. document for deletion you must know its transaction num ber You may want to print a memory list for reference 8 5 Note Q aed 5 N Deleting a Document with the Delete File Button Memory Features Delete File 1 Press Delete File DELETE DOCUMENT TX RX NO 0057 If you want to know the destination telephone number and time of the document press the cursor buttons lt gt before pressing Set 2 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels 3 Press the search buttons to display the transaction number of the document you want to delete Then press Set C0 DELETE DOCUMENT PASSWORD If you have not set the operation password for the document stored in memory you can skip the next step _ 4 Enter the four digit password and press Set OK TO DELETE 3 O YES NO Q Chapter 8 Using the Memory Features 8 9 5 Press to delete the selected document or press to cancel the deletion After you press the document is erased TX RX NO 0004 ERASING END S 6 Press Stop to return to standby i Deleting a Document with the Memory Reference Button M aS 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press LS Memory Reference Reference MEMORY REFERENCE C 1 DOC MEMORY LIST A v C 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below MEMORY REFERENCE 4 DELETE DOCUMENT DELETE DOCUMENT TX RX NO 0001 Set C 3 Press S
75. documents re ceived on the main fax unit transferred to another fax unit For example you could have the main fax unit in the office transfer all documents to your fax at home You can set the day and time for this feature to turn on and off Please remember however that documents received in a confi dential mailbox or a memory box cannot be transferred See transfer password Transfer password Protects the transfer settings from unauthorized access You must enter the transfer password a four digit code 0000 9999 in order to view or change the transfer settings Transmission time A fax transmission consists of three stages the pre message handshake the message transmission and the post message handshake The trans mission time described in this user s guide is not the total time required for the entire transmission It is only the time for the message transmission The transmission time described in this user s guide is the fastest time achieved when faxes communicate in the same mode TTI Stands for transmit terminal identification Also called sender information The TTI is the name of the person or organization and the facsimile number of the fax that sends a document In addition to a unit name that you register for the fax you can create up to 19 sender names that can be selected and used in place of the unit name when you send a facsimile transmission TTI Selector With this feature you can select the name to be prin
76. e A R G 6 2 e Preparing the DOCUmiET teneis 6 2 e Setting the Document on the Fax saessssseesessseeeesreresrsrersrsrerrsrsresrersees 6 3 e Adjusting the Scanning Settings sseseeeeeeeeeesisrererrsreresrersrrrrsrsersess 6 4 Ll Selectine acender Name tegen veasets cases iar ne N NO eereeens 6 6 A Using Regular Didin g ancorar aA E 6 7 ld Canceling Sending a Document esseeseeeesesesesrerresrrrrerrsrerrrrrrerrrererreeess 6 8 L Dialing Long Distance with Regular Dialing 0 ieee 6 10 L Overview of Sending Methods oe esseseeseseeesseeeeeceseeessseeeeesseeeees 6 12 e MEMORY SCI IAS renoier nea a AN AA AS 6 12 e Direct oend inp oreina a N 6 15 Manual bendine srcsect taste enlte sh ciesdntesstestewatosiesvrontent O 6 17 I Re dialing When the Line is Busy 0 tc eeseseeeeeneeseseeeeeeeeeeneeneeeeaes 6 19 e What is Automatic Redialing oo eeseseeseeneeseseeeeeeeesesceeeessees 6 19 Seething UP Reg ra ire srrieseki aiia N RS 6 20 L Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One Location eee 6 22 I Sending Documents at a Preset Time nsssniscsinniisisiisieiiiiiii 6 24 L Sending a Document with a Subaddress Password s ceeeeeees 6 27 e Subaddress Password Sending with Speed Dialing 6 27 e Subaddress Password Sending with the Operation Panel BUNONS arr a A EA 6 28 D D Q V Documents Chapter 6 Sending Documents 6 1 Setting a Document for Sending This section describes how to prep
77. end of the two telephone lines to the wall telephone jacks Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 55 How the Two Telephone Lines Operate The fax unit uses the two telephone lines in different ways L Line 1 connected to the telephone jack on the right side of the fax unit marked L can be used for all communications provided by the fax unit L Line 2 connected to the telephone jack on the rear of the fax unit marked L2 cannot be used for the following features See Page MANUAL SENDING Sending documents manually 6 17 MANUAL RECEIVING Receiving documents manually 7 7 TALK Voice telephone communication 12 2 MAN AUTO SWITCH Sets the ring time before the fax 16 14 switches automatically to the document receive mode while in the manual receive mode REMOTE RX Changing the remote receive ID 7 9 16 14 Disabled Feature Description L You can select either telephone line for priority reception and you can also select which line is to be used for priority sending when both lines are open L When Line 1 is busy receiving a document transmission even if Line 2 is open you cannot send or receive another document transmission manually J Even if another party calls you on Line 2 you will not be able to receive the telephone call for voice communication 2 56 Setting Up Chapter 2 Registering the Telephone Numbers for the Lines The telephone numbers that you register with the procedure below will appear in the disp
78. enter a number for the time 01 to 99 in seconds if not Press the search buttons to increase or decrease the number setting Press Set Press Stop to return to standby Press Manual RX to put the fax in the manual receive mode whenever you want to take advantage of the MAN AUTO SWITCH feature 16 14 7 6 Receiving Documents Chapter 7 Receiving Documents Manually with the Optional Handset When you use manual receiving this means you can monitor all incom ing calls yourself by picking up the handset every time the fax rings If you pick up the handset and determine the call is from another person start your conversation If you hear a slow beep tone this means the call is a fax transmission To receive the document just press Start Scan and then hang up the handset LA The receiving speed is 14400 bps or less when receiving manually Note Receiving a Document Manually at the Fax Follow this procedure to receive a document manually at the fax Ai e Before you can use this feature you must install the optional handset _ kit or a regular telephone gt 2 38 Make sure the document is not set Note on the ADF eIf you have installed the optional Dual line Upgrade Kit when the fax unit receives a document on Line 2 it will switch to automatic receiving regardless of whether the Manual RX lamp is on or off 742 56 Manual RX 1 Press Manual RX to set the fax in the manual receive mode The C Manual RX i
79. forces your fax to check the identity of the originator before it receives the document for relay to other units ON When your fax receives a document for relay it will check the identity of the originator before it receives the document In order for this feature to perform correctly the telephone number of the originator unit must be registered correctly for speed dialing on your fax unit TEL Press the One touch Speed Dialing button or press the Coded Dial button followed by the three digit code where the number for the originator fax is registered and press Set OFF Your fax will receive a document for relay without checking the identity of the originator When your fax is the relay unit this setting determines if your fax unit prints a copy of every document that it relays OFF Your fax does not print a copy of every document it relays to other fax units ON Your fax prints a copy of every document it relays to other fax units OF RXCOPIES 01 COPIES If you turn on PRINT RX DOC use this setting to specify the number of copies you want to print 01 99 This item allows you to select the fax units to receive the docu ment your unit relays The number of fax units to receive the document must be registered for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing You cannot enter a number with regular dialing TEL Close the One touch Speed Dialing panels and press the speed dialing buttons where the numbers of the fax units to rece
80. gt ASR PU See gt OS LV J Le SOY See rw L Use a dry cloth to wipe clean the underside of the ADF cover L Use a dry cloth to wipe up paper dust around the rollers If you have installed the optional stamp kit be careful not to touch the stamp ink compartment when cleaning the scanning area 10 Lower the ADF cover until the plastic loop is even with the stub on the fax machine 15 32 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 11 Place the end of the plastic loop over the end of the stub so it stays in place Questions 12 Close the ADF cover and press down on it slightly until you hear it lock in place and lower the document feeder tray 3 Oo ad On ed o gt of w Q 5 ss o Ta 13 Connect the power cord of the fax unit at the power source Refilling the Stamp Ink Compartment option Follow this procedure to refill the stamp ink compartment if you are using the optional stamp feature L Please contact your local authorized Canon dealer when you run out of ink 1 Disconnect the power cord of the fax unit from its power source 2 Follow steps 6 to 8 on pages 15 30 and 15 31 to open the ADF cover up to the full open position Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 33 3 Locate the stamp pad then apply only one drop of ink to the stamp ink compartment I To avoid a malfunction do not add too much ink J Use only Shachihata X Stamper
81. is not printed when you receive a fax However you can set the fax to print a report every time you receive a document or if an error occurs during reception 16 8 Restricting use RESTRICTIVE No password or access codes are set on the fax to restrict DACs user access CODES sending documents printing or using the handset to codes make a telephone call All these functions can be re stricted 13 6 16 28 Restricting use RX RESTRICTION The fax is set to receive all incoming documents You can Stopping junk mail restrict receiving to only numbers registered on your fax for speed dialing 13 16 16 29 Speed TX START SPEED The starting speed for all transactions is set for 33600 bps RX START SPEED Slower settings are available 716 30 Stamp TX STAMP If you have the optional stamp feature on your fax machine you can turn the stamp feature on with this switch The default setting is off 712 8 16 12 Tel Fax switching MAN AUTO You can set a time interval for the fax to wait until it SWITCH automatically enters the document receive mode when the fax is set for manual receiving 16 14 Telephone line TEL LINE TYPE Your fax is set to operate on a touch tone telephone line 3 10 16 6 Unit Name Unit DATE amp TIME Your registered identification and fax number are printed Telephone Number UNIT TELEPHONE at the top and outside of the image border of every UNIT NAME document you send This feature is required by Telephone C
82. is received in a confidential mailbox Print a reception activity report every time you receive a document in a memory box 8 25 14 16 A report prints every time a document is received in a memory box No report prints when a document is received in a memory box 16 8 Summary of Important Settings Chapter 16 5 ACTIVITY REPORT Print an activity management report 14 9 1 AUTO PRINT Print an activity report after every 40 transactions ON An activity report prints after the 40th transaction is completed OFF No activity report prints after the 40th transaction is completed 2 DAILY REPORT TIME OFF A time is not set to print a transaction report every day ON Allows you to set a time for an activity to be printed every day Set the report time for the daily report Use 24 hour settings 3 TX RX SEPARATE Print an activity report with receptions and transmissions listed separately OFF Transmissions and receptions are listed together in chronological order ON Transmissions and receptions are arranged in chronological order in separate lists 6 PRT REPORT WHERE Select a paper supply source for the activity report OFF Report prints from the first available paper supply source ON The number and type of cassettes available depends on the paper cassettes currently installed Paper Cassette 2 is optional for the LASER CLASS 3170 3170MS and standard for the LASER CLASS 3175 LASER CLASS 3170 CASSETTE 1 MP
83. line is available documents are not grouped and are sent immediately If the line is busy documents go into memory are not grouped and are sent when the line becomes available Documents go into memory are not grouped and are sent when the line becomes available Chapter 16 Appendix A Specifications General Sheet size Max width 11 in 279 mm Min width 5 8 in 148 mm Automatic Document Feeder 50 letter or A4 size pages ADF Capacity 20 legal B4 or 11 x 17 in size pages Effective scanning image size Width letter legal 10 in 254 mm Recording paper size Width letter legal 8 5 in 216 mm A4 8 3 in 210 mm Paper capacity MP multi purpose tray approximately 100 sheets letter legal A4 80 g m or 21 Ibs Paper Cassette 1 approximately 500 sheets letter legal A4 80 g m or 21 Ibs Paper Cassette 2 approximately 500 sheets letter legal A4 executive B5 Standard with the LASER CLASS 3175 and optional with the LASER CLASS 3170 3170MS Compatibility G3 Ca 2 a 2 y Q 0 Q a Modem speed 33 6 31 2 28 8 26 4 24 21 6 19 2 16 8 14 4 12 9 6 7 2 4 8 2 4 Kbps Appendix A Specifications A 1 Memory LCD Liquid Crystal Display Data compression system Transmission time Scanning line density Toner cartridge A 2 Specifications LASER CLASS 3170 3170MS 3 MB 192 pages approx Upgrade Option plus 4 MB additional 256
84. may slide out of the fax unit Be sure to remove Paper Cassette 2 if installed before moving the fax and lift them separately Chapter 2 Unpacking Have You Got Everything As you unpack the fax save the carton and packing material in case you want to move or ship the fax unit in the future Ask someone to help you remove all items from the box LIFTING THE FAX UNIT REQUIRES TWO PEOPLE TO REMOVE THE FAX UNIT FROM THE CARTON BOX FOLLOW THE Caution GENERAL GUIDELINES AND ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 2 10 1 Remove the adhesive tapes on the top of the carton box 2 Take out the document feeder tray the accessory tray with the document output tray documentation the upper output tray power cord and telephone line and the FX6 Toner Cartridge in its protective bag DOCUMENT OUTPUT TRAY DOCUMENTATION DESTINATION LABELS DOCUMENT TRAY LABELS FEEDER TRAY A ENERE CD ROM LASER CLASS 3170MS only POWER CORD Bx UPPER OUTPUT TRAY ACCESSORY TRAY e ee cardboard FX6 TONER CARTRIDGE Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 11 3 Remove the four stoppers on the side of the box by squeezing the center grip cd 4 Lift and remove the upper carton Remove the four styrene foam blocks positioned on top of the fax unit Then lift the fax unit by gripping the handles on the right and left sides 2 10 2 12 Setting Up Chapter 2 5 Take out Paper Cassette 2 from its carton box A
85. not store paper on the floor where humidity is higher L If the humidity of the surrounding area is higher than normal store the paper in a specially designed storage box L To prevent excessive paper curl do not stack paper too high L Do not expose the stored paper supply to direct sunlight I If paper is moved to a location of very different temperature store the paper in the new location for at least one day before you use it 15 16 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 Changing the Toner Cartridge Change Cartridge When the toner runs low in the toner cartridge the Change Cartridge indicator on the operation panel will light and you will see this message REPLACE CARTRIDGE The fax may be set to continue printing or to store the remainder of a document being received into the memory 16 18 Note You may be able to extend the service life of the toner cartridge by removing it and rotating it 5 or 6 times to re distribute the toner inside the cartridge After you re set the cartridge in the fax unit if the mes sages goes off you can continue printing but make sure you have a new cartridge on hand to replace the old one when it finally runs out of toner If the message does not go off then you will have to follow the proce dure below to replace the old cartridge N Questions O 0 9A oqa o gt 5 ES ss s Li Follow this procedure to replace the toner cartridge 1
86. number and the date and time that prints on documents you send setting alarms and scanning density and so on Do these settings as soon as you set up your fax After they are set you should not need to change them very often 16 4 2 REPORT SETTINGS Use these settings to set the fax to print a report every time you send or receive a document and set up printing a summary report for all your sending and receiving transactions Use these features to keep track of your fax transactions 16 7 3 TX Send SETTINGS Use these settings to customize how the fax sends documents With these settings you can turn ECM on and off set mid pause time set up re dialing and other features 16 10 4 RX Receive SETTINGS Use these settings to customize how the fax receives documents These settings are important because they determine how the fax operates when it receives a document 16 13 oa co cD 2 Ew 5 FAX S PRINTER SET Use these settings to set how the fax unit prints documents you receive These features include selecting a cassette or the MP tray for paper supply and reducing the size of the page 16 16 Go fe i G E E N 6 FILE SETTINGS Use these settings to set up major features like confidential mailboxes and polling 16 20 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS Use these settings to set up security and tracking features with pass words and department passwords and codes You can also set important defaults such as th
87. numeric keypad to Set C 6 Press Set enter another time and press Set You can register up to 5 sending times if not ve To continue registering another group press Data Registration Registration L if not yA To end registration and return to standby press Stop s 4 28 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 Using Speed Dialing Follow the procedures in this section to use speed dialing The three speed dialing methods are One touch Speed Dialing Coded Speed Dialing and Group Dialing If you forget where a number is registered you can find it and dial it with directory dialing 74 35 Using One touch Speed Dialing Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a docu ment at the press of a One touch Speed Dialing button j To use this feature you must first register a telephone number for One touch Speed Dialing 4 6 1 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can also select a sender s name with the TTI Selector 6 6 DOCUMENT READY v co S a FF TEND 2 Press the One touch Speed Dialing button where the telephone DoS 2 number you want to dial is registered S A 20 gt If you do not see the number of the button you want open the first or second One touch Speed Dialing panel to see more but tons After 5 seconds the fax starts to send the document TEGS 123 4567 01 CANON USA TR
88. on the side of the paper cassettes and the paper size guides hook at the back of the cassettes PAPER LIMIT MARKS 6 Press the paper stack down to make sure it has a clearance of approximately 0 04 in 1 mm from the hook of the paper size rear guide 2 36 Setting Up Chapter 2 7 Reinsert the cassette into the fax unit Align the cassette with the rails on the fax unit then lift slightly to insert the cassette Slide it all the way into the fax unit Ai Make sure you insert the cassette all the way into the fax unit until it m locks into place Note L The paper volume status bars on the paper cassettes indicate the level of the current paper supply When you see the paper volume status bar drop make sure you have a supply of paper on hand to fill the cassettes When you see the SUPPLY REC PAPER message on the LCD display re fill the cassettes COPIA Sz z 652 SS PAPER VOLUME STATUS BAR Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 37 Connecting the Handset option F A telephone handset is available as an option for the fax machine ai This handset is for use with Canon LASER CLASS 3170 Series only Note SS SS SSE SSS 1 Attach the handset cradle holder to the back of the cradle with the screws provided 2 Fit the handset cradle holder over the holes on the fax unit 3 Screw the handset cradle holder on the fax unit 2 38 Setting Up Chapter 2 4 Connect the end of the han
89. over a long distance to another fax called the relay unit After the relay unit receives your document it automatically sends the document to several other fax units in the local area In this way you can send a document to several fax units in the same locality with only one long distance transmission 4 ES ne CUE In a relay network your fax unit can function as both an originator and a relay unit When your fax unit is the originator it sends a document to a relay unit from which the document is relayed to several destination in the same locality When your fax unit is the relay unit it receives a docu ment from another party and relays it to one or several other faxes in your own locality 9 2 Using a Relay Network Chapter 9 Setting Up and Using a Standard Relay Unit Chapter 9 In this section we will show you how to set up and manage a relay network with the standard relay features provided on the fax Before you set up your fax to relay documents from the originator fax unit confirm the following points E E m E Make sure your unit telephone number is correctly registered 3 13 14 5 Make sure the telephone number of the originator fax unit is regis tered on your fax for a speed dialing button 14 2 After your fax receives the document from the originators it will relay the document to one or several destination units Make sure the telephone numbers of all the destination units are registered o
90. pages approx total 448 pages approx plus 4 MB x 2 additional 512 pages approx total 704 pages approx LASER CLASS 3175 7 MB 448 pages approx Upgrade Option plus 4 MB additional 256 pages approx total 704 pages approx 20 x 2 MH MR MMR JBIG G3 Mode V 34 JBIG Approx 3 sec pg ECM MMR Approx 6 sec pg MR Standard mode Approx 12 sec pg MH Standard mode Approx 15 sec pg G3 Mode Standard 8 dots mm x 3 85 lines mm Fine 8 dots mm x 7 7 lines mm Super Fine 8 dots mm x 15 4 lines mm Ultra Fine 16 dots mm x 15 4 lines mm interpolated Canon FX6 Toner Cartridge Appendix A Appendix A Operation Fax printing speed Scanning method Recording printing method Print resolution Applicable lines Dial Features Approx 17 pp min letter Solid state electronic scanning by contact image sensor Laser beam electronic circuit 600 dpi x 600 dpi Subscribers telephone circuit PSTN One touch Speed Dialing Registra tion for 72 numbers Coded Speed Dialing Registration for 128 numbers Group Dialing On hook dialing Manual dialing with 10 button keypad Automatic re dialing Manual re dialing Program dialing Dial search Specifications A 3 Ca 2 a 2 y Q 0 Q a Networking Features Transmitting Sequential broadcast Batch transmission Confidential transmission Relay broad
91. password protected 13 2 1 PASSWORD Enter a four digit password to protect the System Settings 2 RESTRICTIVE CODES Set restrictions for sending and printing with department access codes and user access codes 13 6 1 TX SETTINGS Restrict sending with department and user access codes OFF Turn off restrictions on sending This turns the feature off without canceling the department access codes and passwords ON DAC SETUP Set a DAC department access code ON Turn on department access codes ENTER DAC 01 Press the search buttons to select a number 01 to 19 then enter a four digit department access code DAC PASSWORD Enter a four digit password for the department access pass word OFF Turn off restrictions by depart ment access codes and pass words but turn on restrictions by user access code USER ACCESS CODE A four digit number you set to restrict sending 2 FAX S PRINTER SET Restricts document printing and copying with a four digit access code OFF ON USER ACCESS CODE A four digit number you set to restrict printing and copying 16 28 Summary of Important Settings Chapter 16 3 TEL SETTING Allows you to restrict use of the telephone for voice communication OFF ON 3 MEMORY LOCK RX Turn forced memory receiving on and off 713 17 OFF ON 1 MEM LOCK PASSWORD Enter a four digit password 2 REPORT Set reports to print or not print when the forced memory receiving feature is on OU
92. points you should keep in mind when you use Coded Speed Dialing E N To start scanning immediately press Start Scan Otherwise the fax will wait 5 seconds before it starts scanning This timeout feature can be turned off 16 11 The fax will not dial the Coded Speed Dialing number until you set the document on the fax for scanning If you press the buttons before you load the document the fax will prompt you SET DOCUMENT If you press Coded Dial and a three digit code where no numbers are registered the fax tells you NO TEL x013 If you want to cancel the transmission after you press the buttons for Coded Speed Dialing press Stop When you come to a step in any procedure where you have to dial a number you can press the buttons for Coded Speed Dialing to dial When you register a number for One touch Speed Dialing Coded Speed Dialing and Group Dialing you can as an option set the time you want Note your document to go out up to 5 different times in a day If you are using a speed dial button that was set by someone else and you would like your document to go out at the preset time verify if the preset time feature is being used for that button 4 9 4 18 4 27 16 34 4 32 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 Using Group Dialing Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a document to several destinations with a One touch or Coded Speed dialing number registered for group dialin
93. press All desti nations are canceled Chapter 6 Sending Documents 6 23 D S Q V Documents Sending Documents at a Preset Time Follow this procedure to set a time for sending This feature is called delayed sending or timer sending Use timer sending to store a document in the memory and then have it sent at a later time when telephone rates are lower F You can set up to 70 documents for delayed sending 1 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can also select a sender s name with the TTI Selector 6 6 2 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press iit Delayed Transmission M S LSS DELAYED TX SET TIME 17 30 Delayed Transmission C D s 3 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time cH UKE MNO L Enter the time in the 24 hour format e g 1 00 p m as 13 00 pas_ Tuy wy L Enter all the numbers including zeros DOTS OJOJOO DELAYED TX SET TIME 23 05 6 24 Sending Documents Chapter 6 Sel 4 Press Set DELAYED TX SELECT LOCATIONS Dial the other party s fax number Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number 6 7 5 6 if not D Close the One touch Speed Dialing panels and dial the other OPER SYMBOLS party s fax number by pressing a One touch Speed Dialing button 0 4 29 if not Press Coded Dial and a three digit code to dial the number
94. printed in the RESULT column of the ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT REPORT along with any error codes Two types of ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT REPORT are available standard 14 9 16 9 or TX RX separate 714 10 16 9 PGS Represents the total number of pages that were success fully transmitted RESULT OK means all pages were transmitted either during the first attempt or after the first or second redial attempt The default which is two redial attempts can be changed 6 20 16 11 NG means that either some or no pages were transmit ted after two redial attempts The default which is two redial attempts can be changed 6 20 16 11 14 8 Printing Reports and Lists Chapter 14 Printing the Activity Management Report Follow this procedure to print a list of the previous 40 transactions on your fax 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press At Report le EE REPORT 1 ACTIVITY REPORT Report Set C 2 Press Set After you press Set the fax prints an Activity Management Report in the standard format with all transactions listed chronologically Activity Management Report 12 31 1999 14 36 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 1001 Soe eee eee eee ee ee Kokk ACTIVITY REPORT kkk EEEE 2 C2 a aC eo ST TIME CONNECTION TEL ID SENDER NAME MODE RESULT 12 31 12 28 ADAM BOOK CPA S ROBERTS 0007 TRANSMIT ECM 732 2233 12 31 12 49 BELZER INC 5005 AUTO RX 1 213 978 3314 12 31 13 08 1 213 978 3314 R
95. quickly If you notice anything unusual smoke strange odors noises around the fax turn the fax off immediately and unplug it Call for service Chapter 2 Before you transport the fax remove the cartridge To protect the cartridge from bright light cover it with its original protective bag or a cloth Keep liquids cleaners and other solvents away from the fax unit Keep metal pins paper clips staples and other objects away from the fax If something falls into the fax unit remove the plug from the power outlet and call for service Do not set the fax unit other equipment or furniture on the power cord Never knot the power cord or wrap it around another object To avoid paper jams never unplug the power cord open the printer cover or remove a paper cassette during printing Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 9 Moving the Fax Unit The fax unit is heavy Be sure to follow these general guidelines when lifting the fax to move it or to install Paper Cassette 2 etc m E 2 10 Setting Up Moving the fax unit requires two people When you lift the fax hold it by the handles on the right and left sides Never try to lift the fax by gripping paper cassettes by the front and back sides Grip firmly the handles by the parts close to the back of the fax unit as shown in the figure below because the fax unit is heavier at the back When you lift the fax be sure not to tilt it forward because the paper cassette
96. receive and transfer The telephone number of the originator fax must be registered for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing on your fax Sets the time to move the fax into and out of the transfer mode If you do not set the timer you can still switch the fax into the transfer mode manually Set a time to move the fax automatically into the transfer mode Sets the fax to move into the transfer mode every day You can set up to 5 starting times for every day of the week 1 SUN to 7 SAT Sets the fax to move into the transfer mode only on selected days of the week You can set up to 5 starting times for the selected days Sets the time for the fax to leave the transfer mode and return to the normal mode Sets the fax to move out of the transfer mode every day You can set up to 5 end times for every day of the week 1 SUN to 7 SAT Sets the fax to move out of the transfer mode on selected days of the week You can set up to 5 end times for the selected days The following settings are valid You can set EVERY DAY for the start time and then use SELECT DAYS to set end times You can also set SELECT DAYS for start times and then use the EVERY DAY setting for the end time However you cannot set both EVERY DAY and SELECT DAYS for the start time or end time 7 16 Receiving Documents Chapter 7 Transfer Setup Summary Cont d 6 PRINT RX DOC Sets the fax to print a copy of the transferred document at the transfer unit OFF Received a
97. relay unit support ITU T subaddress password transac tions If the relay unit does not support ITU T subaddress password transactions you cannot perform relay sending Has the relay unit set up a relay group correctly The relay group must be set up correctly on the relay unit and the relay unit must tell you the subaddress and password If the relay unit has set an ITU T password then you must send the document with the correct password as well as the correct subaddress 9 10 Questions oO wt Ow oqa o gt 5 ES cs s Li Does the ITU T subaddress password match those of the relay unit Make sure you set the correct subaddress password 49 10 Is the memory of the relay unit full Check with the relay unit and make sure there is enough memory to receive your document Ask the relay unit to clear their memory then try again 1 Cannot perform confidential sending Does the other fax support ITU T subaddress password transac tions If the other fax does not support ITU T subaddress password transactions you cannot perform confidential sending Has the other party set up a confidential mailbox The other party must set up a confidential mailbox on the other fax and tell you the subaddress and password If the other party has set an ITU T password then you must send the document with the correct password as well as the correct subaddress 10 10 Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 43
98. selecting type 16 6 switching 3 10 temperature fax unit location 2 4 time registering 3 14 setting 16 4 timer set for polling 11 5 setting for Coded Speed Dialing 4 18 setting for Group Dialing 4 27 setting for One touch Speed Dialing 4 9 setting for sending 6 24 tone dial setting 3 10 toner cartridge handling 15 22 installing new 2 23 protecting 2 9 removing seal 2 24 replacing 15 17 storing 15 23 transaction history displaying 8 3 Index transaction number assigned to every transaction 6 13 defined 2 3 LCD display 6 13 receiving 7 3 transaction history 8 3 TRANSFER setting 16 26 transferring document reception canceling 7 20 changing settings 7 18 setting up 7 14 summary table of settings 7 15 turning off 7 18 turning on 7 17 turning on off 7 17 transmission report See TX REPORT 14 12 16 8 transmission speed setting for Coded Speed Dialing 4 22 setting for One touch Speed Dialing 4 13 troubleshooting questions and answers 15 42 TX SETTINGS described 16 3 see send settings 16 10 TX START SPEED setting 16 30 U Ultra Fine setting 6 5 unit name registering 3 15 unit telephone number registering 3 14 unpacking box contents 2 11 2 13 upper output tray attaching 2 26 User Data List printing 14 5 user data settings summary 16 3 USER SETTINGS DATE amp TIME 16 4 DENSITY CONTROL 16 5 described 16 3 listed 16 4 OFFHOOK ALARM 16 6 PROGR
99. setting receive mode 7 2 start speed 16 30 transferring documents 7 13 recording paper loading paper 2 31 storing 15 15 redial AUTO REDIAL 16 11 redialing automatic 6 19 canceling 6 20 I 6 line busy 6 19 setting up 6 20 setup summary 6 21 registering correcting 3 17 date and time 3 14 making corrections 3 17 sender information 3 13 sender names 3 18 unit name 3 15 unit telephone number 3 14 regular dialing long distance 6 10 using 6 7 regular transmission setting for Coded Speed Dialing 4 20 setting for One touch Speed Dialing 4 11 Relay Broadcast Report sample 14 16 RELAY TX GROUP setting 16 21 relaying documents changing relay settings 9 7 deleting relay group 9 9 described 9 2 sending to relay unit 9 10 sending with speed dialing 9 12 setting your fax as relay unit 9 4 summary of settings 9 5 using Relay Broadcast button 9 12 remote receiving changing ID 7 9 with extension phone 7 8 REPLACE CARTRIDGE displayed at power on 2 42 REPORT SETTINGS activity report 16 9 confidential RX report 16 8 described 16 3 listed 16 7 memory box report 16 8 print report where 16 9 RX report 16 8 TX report 16 8 Index reports Activity Management Report sample 14 9 Activity Report RX sample 14 15 Activity Report TX sample 14 12 Activity Report TX with image sample 14 13 Activity Report TX RX separate sample 14 10 Activity Reports
100. standby and start again TEL 123 4567 Chapter 12 3 When the other party answers your call you can talk into the handset if not If you did not pick up handset in step 1 pick up the handset as soon as you hear the other party answer The other party will not be able to hear you until you pick up the handset if not p If the other party does not answer or if the line is busy just hang or N up the handset or press Hook to disconnect KN Tone Dialing on a Pulse Line Many telephone information services for banks airline reservations hotel reservations etc require tone dialing for their services If your fax is connected to a rotary pulse line follow this procedure to set the fax temporarily for tone dialing Hook 1 Press Hook The In Use lamp blinks green and you will hear the dial tone if not N Just pick up the handset if you have installed the optional handset kit 2 38 P The level of the dial tone can be adjusted 2 18 Note 2 Dial the telephone number Q s Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the telephone number of the information service BBS Chapter 12 Other Special Features 12 3 Features amp Q 3 Q a ihn i s O 3 When the recorded message of the information service answers press Tone Tone After you press Tone you will see a T in the display TELs 123 45671 Ai If your fax is connected to a touch tone l
101. that the paper stack is not evenly aligned Do not set the paper size guides so loose that there is room between the guides and the paper Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 31 1 Pull out the paper cassettes from the fax unit 2 Check if the selectors inside the paper cassettes are set for the size of the paper you are loading If the setting is correct go on to step 3 if not Set the paper cassettes to fit the sizes of the paper you are loading To change the paper size for Paper Cassette 1 Adjust the paper size side guides in the following way STOPPER SIZE SIDE GUIDES WHEN YOU SET TO A4 SIZE WHEN YOU SET TO LETTER OR LEGAL SIZE L To select A4 size push the tabs jutting out from the edge of the cassette inwards and slide the stopper downwards to lock the guides in position I To select letter and legal size slide the stopper up and push the size side guides outwards 2 32 Setting Up Chapter 2 Lift the stopper in the center of the paper size rear guide slightly and slide it to the mark indicating the desired paper size WHEN YOU SET TO LETTER SIZE To change the paper size for Paper Cassette 2 To adjust the paper size side guides release them by pinching the stopper on the left guide and slide them inwards or outwards according to the paper size you are loading Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 33 Push up the stopper of the paper size rear guide and slide it to the mark indicating the desired paper si
102. the fax detects that the output tray is full the fax will automatically store the unprinted pages of the document in the memory and display these messages RECEIVED IN MEMORY RECEPTION OK 12 31 1999 FRI 12 30 TX RX NO 5033 1 Check the LCD display and the indicators on the left of the display Rec Paper Add paper to the paper cassettes if the Rec Paper indicator is on and if you see this message 42 31 SUPPLY REC PAPER Change Cartridge Replace the toner cartridge if the Change Cartridge indicator is on and if you see this message 15 17 REPLACE CARTRIDGE Pick up the printed paper on the output trays if you see this message OUTPUT TRAY FULL 2 As soon as you close the re filled paper cassette close the printer cover over the newly installed toner cartridge or pick up the printed pages on the tray the pages stored in the memory are printed 8 2 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 L As each page is printed it is deleted from the memory L Ifthe memory becomes full you will not be able to receive the remaining pages Contact the other party and request to send the document again L The LASER CLASS 3170 3170MS can store up to approxi mately 192 letter size pages in the memory The LASER CLASS 3175 can store up to approximately 448 letter size pages in the memory With the optional memory kit the LASER CLASS 3170 Series can receive up to approximately 704 pages in the memory For details
103. the system setting to OFF on your fax 16 31 Chapter 15 CODE PROBLEM SOLUTION 0080 The other party s fax does not support Call the other party and confirm whether or receiving a document with a subaddress not their fax supports subaddress receiving Try sending again without a subaddress 0081 The other party s fax does not support Call the other party and confirm whether or receiving a document with an ITU T pass not their fax supports ITU T password word receiving Try sending again without a password accepting a polling request with a subaddress not their fax can accept a polling request with a subaddress Try sending again without a subaddress 0082 The other party s fax does not support Call the other party and confirm whether or document because a subaddress and or subaddress and or password that you are password does not match using are correct 0083 You cannot poll the other party to receive a Call the other party and confirm that the polling request with an ITU T password Ask the other party to try again without an ITU T password 0084 The other party cannot receive a document Call the other party and confirm whether or with an ITU T password not the other party s fax supports receiving a Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions subaddress and or password does not match not you are using the correct subaddress and or password 0102 You cannot receive documents be
104. to enter A Text 1 Number Getting Started 3 15 xo 3 sks ihn G ee 7e 5 p shs 3 Note D gt W O D I v D 7 SO Sa OPER__ SYMBOLS G Above each button on the numeric keypad there is a group of letters These are the letters you can enter with the button below Each button contains the upper and lower case letters for its group of letters For example ABCabc Press the button of the letter you want to enter If the letter you want is not displayed first keep pressing the button until the letter you want appears If you go past the letter you want just keep pressing the button until you see it again To enter a space Press Space to enter a space To enter a number Press to enter the number entry mode 1 Press the appropriate button on the numeric keypad to enter a number To enter a symbol These standard symbols are available for entry w 4 1 0 amp lt gt Press until you see the symbol you want 3 16 Getting Started Chapter 3 Clear o j D I v p n Z G See OPER__ SYMBOLS g D Chapter 3 To delete If you make a mistake and want to delete the entire entry so you can start again press Clear To make a correction Press the left or right cursor button to move the cursor under the letter or number you want to change Pres
105. to receive a document from a fax unit that does not support ITU T subaddress password transactions press Start Scan if not If you want to receive a document from a fax unit that supports ITU T transactions press Set Then press the Subaddress button SUBADDRESS You must press Subaddress within 5 seconds of pressing Set If you wait el longer than the timeout interval before pressing Subaddress the fax will Note start dialing the number The timeout interval can be turned off 16 11 N An ITU T subaddress is a number up to 20 digits long which can include spaces and the symbols and O _ 5 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU T 5 E subaddress Then press Set ey TEL 123 4567 B 01 CANON INC Password 6 Ifyou must also enter an ITU T password press the Password button Otherwise go on to the next step PASSWORD You must press Password within 5 seconds of Set If you wait longer than J the timeout interval before pressing Password the fax will start dialing Note the number The timeout interval can be turned off 16 11 11 4 Setting Upand Using Polling Chapter 11 An ITU T password is a number up to 20 digits long which can include spaces and the symbols and 6 9 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU T pass e word Then press Set o TEL 123 4567 BA 01 CANON INC 06 Start S poa 7 Press Start Scan to start polling the other fax
106. to set the polling ID to 255 or 1111 1111 binary when the other party s fax machine is a Canon fax 11 2 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 11 Polling Other Fax Machines to Receive a Document Follow this procedure to poll another fax to receive the document that it is holding This procedure starts polling the other fax immediately You can also set the fax to poll at a preset time 11 5 K 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Polling POLLING Polling 1 POLLING TX C JC 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below POLLING 2 POLLING RX Set C 3 Press Set TTI Selector C You can select a sender s name with the TTI Selector 6 6 4 Close all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels and dial the other party s number See See ee ee e ee ee ee eee D 3 __ Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number If you use regular dialing make sure you press Set after you dial the 4 5 6 number 6 7 7 9 if not 0 G Press a One touch Speed Dialing button to dial the number 4 29 xe 5 E Q gt g 5 2 ir 3 a if not Press Coded Dial and a three digit code to dial the number 4 31 if not Dial the number with directory dialing 4 35 Chapter 11 Setting Up and Using Polling 11 3 If you make a mistake during dialing press Stop to return to standby and start again If you want
107. touch speed dial button or the Coded Dial button followed by a three digit code to dial a large group of numbers automatically You register each group of facsimile numbers for a One touch or Coded Speed Dialing button so make sure a button is available before trying to register Group Dialing Once a group is defined you can add or delete numbers to from the group Group number List of all facsimiles to receive a relayed document These are two digit codes between 00 99 The group number is registered on the facsimile with the relay feature l In Use Memory lamp Blinks green when the telephone line is in use Lights green when there are documents stored in memory J Jack The telephone line receptacles on your wall and on the side of your fax unit used to connect your fax machine to the telephone line and handset or extension phone L Long distance dialing When dialing or registering long distance numbers you sometimes have to insert a pause either within or after the telephone number The destination and length of the pause differ depending on the system Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or your local telephone company for further information if you experience problems with long distance dialing Glossary Glossary M Manual receiving Use this setting if you have installed the optional handset kit and there is only one line connected to your office which you use for both phone and fax communication and yo
108. transmission LA The Fax will begin scanning automatically if the Time Out function is set lt to on 6 23 16 11 Note Chapter 10 Using Confidential Mailboxes 10 13 Using amp a G i Ss e 7 Q x 2 G 10 14 Using Confidential Mailboxes Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 11 Setting Up and Using Polling This chapter shows you how to set up and use polling sending and receiving Polling is useful when one or both parties cannot be in the office at the same time Mgt Vi toa be i ogee ere ee oe one ern re erty eee ere A 11 2 Delore You Use Polling Receiving si ncxsirsstsaensnorancanayaraovessseadtuaenetssooves 11 2 L Polling Other Fax Machines to Receive a Document cece 11 3 e Polling to Receive at a Preset Time lt cpacsossesesscsoteosguscsatanssoconsenosoncaneats 11 5 e Changing the Preset Polling Settings seeeeessessrsrseereererersrerse 11 12 e cano i Set NI eeren ceoeemna te tuetonoee pp eceetesagtbonts 11 13 Bi Seting Wi owige halomelciavehiay See ee Tmo eent ee erent ee eter eee 11 15 e Before You Can Be Polled to Send cc sessscsysaespocercomsssnrosecspanenecens 11 15 ee Upa Poling BON seit ances ren ore eee sone 11 15 e Scanning a Document into the Memory for Polling Sending 11 20 e Changing the Polling Box Setup s seesessssesessssesesssseresessssesesessesesess 11 21 eane a Poln DOXA 11 23 Setting Up and Using Polling 11 1 ge 5 sf Q gt 28 5
109. user access code You cannot print unless you turn printing restriction OFF TELEPHONE ON You cannot dial unless you RESTRICTION turn telephone restriction OFF Setting Operation Restrictions You can create up to 19 department access codes DACs and passwords to restrict sending operations on the fax Follow this procedure to restrict access to all of these features _I Sending documents _1 Copying documents and printing fax reports L Using the telephone for voice communication 13 6 Restricting Use of the Fax Chapter 13 CL Set Set Set Chapter 13 1 Open the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu with your system settings password 13 4 SYSTEM SETTINGS 1 PASSWORD Press the search buttons until you see the display below SYSTEM SETTINGS 2 RESTRICTIVE CODES Turn on the transmission restriction feature Press Set Press Set RESTRICTIVE CODES 1 TX SETTINGS TX SETTINGS OFF Press the search buttons until you see the display below Press Set TX SETTINGS DAC SETUP ON OFF Restricting Use of the Fax 13 7 Q a ae Ou ww O o 0 Q ce Set 13 8 Restricting Use of the Fax Enter the department access codes Press the search buttons to display ON then press Set DAC SETUP ON ENTER DAC 01 If the first number is already in use press the search buttons until you see an empty line if not If you do not want to set a department access code DAC and
110. want to use only the user access code for transactions use the search keys to display OFF then press Set and go on to step 6 to set the user access code If you set only the user access code you have to enter only the user access code when you send a docu ment Press Set Enter the department access code DAC Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four digit code for the department access code Press Set DAC PASSWORD Chapter 13 Data Registration Set Chapter 13 Enter the department access code password or the user access code Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four digit code for the department access code password or the user access code DAC PASSWORD 2222 OT USER ACCESS CODE 1234 Press Set ENTER DAC O02 if not If you do not want to enter a password so you can use only the department access code for transactions just press Set and go on to the next step If you set only the department access code you have to enter only the department access code when you send a document You can now repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter other department access codes and passwords ENTER DAC 10 When you are finished press Data Registration to return to the previous level of the menu RESTRICTIVE CODES 2 FAX S PRINTER SET Turn on the restrictions for printing Press Set FAX S PRINTER SET OFF Restricting Use of the Fax 13 9 Q a Ou ww O o
111. y C3 Use the search buttons to display all the items in the menu gt So PE F C With the item displayed that you want to set press Set Then mE follow the instructions in the table below to set up the relay group ns zZ St When you are finished press Stop 5 gt Relay Group Setup Summary The default settings shown in bold remain in effect unless you change them 1 GROUP DIAL NAME Name 24 characters Enter a name for the relay group The name can be up to 24 characters long Then press Set 2 PASSWORD 0000 9999 A four digit password protects the relay box settings you are about to set up After you set a password you will have to enter it every time you want to view or change these settings Enter a four digit password and press Set 3 SUBADDRESS 20 digits spaces This is the ITU T subaddress Enter a number up to 20 digits long it can include spaces and the symbols and Chapter 9 Using a Relay Network 9 5 Relay Group Setup Summary Cont d 4 RX PASSWORD 5 SELECT ORIG UNIT 6 PRINT RX DOC 7 SELECT LOCATIONS 20 digits spaces When your fax is the relay unit this ITU T password must match the ITU T password of the document sent from the originator in order for your fax to receive the document Otherwise your fax will not receive the document Enter a number up to 20 digits long it can include spaces and the symbols and When your fax is the relay unit this feature
112. you for a PIN code every time you dial Setting a PIN Code 1 Open the TX SETTINGS menu Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels and press ES Data Registration aan REG ISTRATION C 1 DATA REGISTRATION Set Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Chapter 13 Restricting Use of the Fax 13 21 Set CL Set Set 13 22 Restricting Use of the Fax Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 3 TX SETTINGS Press Set 1 ECM TX TX SETTINGS Press the search buttons until you see the display below TX SETTINGS 7 PIN CODE If the TX STAMP option has been installed this item will appear as 8 PIN CODE Press Set PIN CODE OFF Press the search buttons until ON appears PIN CODE ON Press Set NECESS PIN CODE OFF Chapter 13 Set Set Set Chapter 13 If your PBX requires PIN code entry depending on destination press Set to leave NECESS PIN CODE set to OFF if not If your PBX always requires PIN code entry press the search buttons until ON appears NECESS PIN CODE ON Press Set PIN CODE BEF AFT BEFORE TEL NO To select BEFORE TEL NO press Set if not To select AFTER TEL NO press the search buttons until AFTER TEL NO appears and press Set Press Stop Restricting Use of the Fax 13 23 Q a ae Ou ww O o 0 Q ce Dialing with a PIN Code after the Number When NECESS PIN CODE
113. you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 6 FILE SETTINGS C Press Set FILE SETTINGS 1 CONFID MAILBOX C Press Set CONFID MAILBOX 1 SETUP FILE 10 2 Using Confidential Mailboxes Chapter 10 2 Give the mailbox a number Set Press Set SETUP FILE SET BOX 00 for the confidential mailbox number Then press Set re SETUP FILE IOO 1 FILE NAME 0 C Press Set 9 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a two digit code FILE NAME A 3 Give the mailbox a name to identify it in printed reports for the mailbox The name can be up to 24 characters long and may include numbers symbols and spaces Then press Set SETUP FILE OFO 2 PASSWORD 4 Give the mailbox a password to protect the mailbox content and settings from unauthorized access Press Set C9 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a personal name Using Ta w Q Cx 0 v 2 yqa m SS S PASSWORD L This password protects the confidential mailbox settings from unauthorized access The next time you want to open this menu to view the settings or make any changes you will have to enter this password to open the menu L You will have to enter this password to print documents you receive in your mailbox Do not forget your password Chapter 10 Using Confidential Mailboxes 10 3 3 Page password Then press Set GY iG SETUP FILE ors 3 SUBADDRESS 5 Give the mailbox an ITU T subaddress S
114. 0 Q ce Set Set Set 13 10 Restricting Use of the Fax 10 Press the search buttons to display ON FAX S PRINTER SET Press Set Enter a user access code to protect the copying and printing features Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four digit user access code This user access code is used only to restrict access to copying and printing USER ACCESS CODE 2894 RESTRICTIVE CODES 3 TEL SETTING Press Set Turn off access to the telephone Press Set TEL SETTING OFF Press the search buttons to display ON TEL SETTING ON Press Set This disables the telephone handset and the Hook button on the operation panel Chapter 13 This concludes the restrictive settings for sending printing and using the telephone Stop 11 Press Stop to return to standby s Operating the Fax with Restrictions ON Q a ae Ou ww O o 0 Q ce This section describes how to operate the fax with the operation restric tion features set up and turned on Sending a Document with Restrictions ON Follow this procedure to send a document after department access codes DAC and passwords have been set up 1 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can also select a sender s name with the TTI Selector 6 6 2 Dial the other party s fax number D 2 3 Use regular dialing to dial a number 6 7 GHI
115. 1 Setting Up and Using Polling 11 9 Set C Press Set and use the numeric keypad to enter another time in 24 hour format P You can register up to 5 times for your fax to poll other faxes every day Note Hop sai When you are finished setting times press Stop to return to L standby To set preset polling for selected days SEL FILE 4 START TIME Set CJ Press Set START TIME EVERYDAY CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display below START TIME SELECT DAYS Set C Press Set SELECT DAYS 1 SUN 5 D Press the search buttons to display the name of the first day you Set want to set up then press Set MON 1 Set Press Set MON 11 10 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 11 Set Note Data Registration Chapter 11 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time Enter the time in the 24 hour format e g 1 00 p m as 13 00 L Ifyou make a mistake press Clear to erase the number and try again MON 02 00 Press Set If you want to set more than one time for your fax unit to poll the other faxes on the selected day press the search buttons to display another empty setting MON 2 Press Set and use the numeric keypad to enter another time in 24 hour format You can register up to 5 times for your fax to poll other faxes on the selected day If you want to select another day press Data Registration to return to the previous level so you can select another day
116. 14 Receiving Documents from Registered Senders Only 008 13 16 Sine Memory OC rerne E E A 13 17 Setting a Time and Password for Memory Lock ssseessseeecseeees 13 17 Turning the Memory Lock ON ssssessesssesisrssesrsrersrsreressrsreseees 13 20 Turning the Memory Lock OFF and Printing Documents 13 20 setting Up and Using PIN Codes nicioni tiani in 13 21 Setn ail UN Code inrensa en T R 13 21 Dialing with a PIN Code after the Number seseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 13 24 Dialing with a PIN Code before the Number sseeeeeeeeeeeee 13 25 Setting PIN Code Access for Speed Dialing oe 13 26 Using Speed Dialing with PIN Code Access ceeseeeeeees 13 27 Forced PINCOdEACCE S hrai n 13 28 Chapter 14 Printing Reports and Lists oessoesoeseoseosseesesssessesssessossesseessoeseessessesseesss 14 1 Printing the Speed Dialing Lists 00 tes seseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeees 14 2 Printing the User Data L166 sscesscsedseacsee Gatsstucsssotaclegdandoieduconauesdetasi tere 14 5 Printing the List of Sender Names cscsssceseececesseeseteseesseeneaenees 14 6 INC POLES aicetrcteenidscasaalenaic ante A 14 8 Printing the Activity Management Report eeeseeeeeereeeees 14 9 Setting and Using Activity Reports cece cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 11 PVT TOY TAST EnEn celts se ssa sins san susan ir E TE Gna iyitiea ETS 14 17 Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 0 cssssssssseesseesees 15 1 Removing Documen
117. 14 9 Coded Speed Dial List 1 sample 14 3 Coded Speed Dial List 2 sample 14 4 Confidential Mailbox List sample 14 17 Confidential Receive Report sample 14 15 Department Access Code Report sample 14 11 Error Report RX sample 14 14 Error Report TX sample 14 11 Group Dial List sample 14 4 Memory Box Report sample 14 16 Memory Clear Report sample 14 20 Multi transaction Report sample 14 14 One touch Speed Dial List 1 sample 14 3 One touch Speed Dialing List 2 sample 14 4 paper supply source 16 9 Received Memory Box List sample 14 19 Relay Broadcast Report sample 14 16 Sender Name List sample 14 7 sender names 14 6 speed dialing lists 14 2 User Data List 14 5 User s Data List sample 14 5 Resolution setting for copying 5 5 setting for sending 6 5 RESTRICTIVE CODES setting 16 28 RX footer illustrated 3 13 setting 16 15 RX PASSWORD setting 16 30 RX SETTINGS described 16 3 Index ECM RX 16 14 listed 16 13 MAN AUTO SWITCH 16 14 MEMORY RX 16 15 REMOTE RX 16 14 RX PAGE FOOTER 16 15 RX START SPEED setting 16 30 S safety electrical storms 2 8 handling power cord 2 7 power cord 2 7 space around fax unit 2 6 search name number from directory 4 35 search buttons defined 2 3 security closed network 13 16 copying 13 12 operating fax with restrictions on 13 11 printing reports 13 13 restricting fax operation 13 6 sending document with restriction 13 11 setting restrictions
118. 15 35 List of LCD Display Messages Alphabetic List eee 15 38 Questions and ANSWETS ccccccccccccccccscccesseeeseeeseeeeseueesseeesssesesssesseseees 15 42 Documents Are Not Being Sent Correctly cece eeeeeeeeeees 15 42 Documents Are Not Being Received Correctly 0 0 cece 15 45 Documents Are Not Being Copied cc cece eee eeecseseeseeeeeees 15 46 Having Other Problems saccus aea ER aceon 15 46 Recording the User Reminder Sheets sseeeeeeeeeeeeseeerreeesrerreee 15 48 Chapter 16 Summary of Important Settings eeseoeseeseoseosseesesssosseessessoeseeseossesseeses 16 1 Opening the Data Registration Menu sssssesseeereisrsrssrerreresrreresess 16 2 summary of User Data SCs eorrrorat reni a E 16 3 User eEUNE Saigos E N Scaeeaavaseness 16 4 Repor SCLIN SE E niouateabse siete dares areanmoanicnn aide 16 7 TA Oend SEEING oa a ims tives e Oa 16 10 RX Receive Seting S roroi E EE 16 13 Fax s Printer DCU p a teariaeteuatin 16 16 Hle SRNE Seron E NA A 16 20 DY SECM CNO Saon eaa E a E E A A 16 27 Dual LNE po OTS 5 hate sa sel eda E AO 16 32 Relationship between BATCH TX QUICK ON LINE TX and Her DOF INES 55 ie5ssitea decade E NEAR 16 34 Appendix A Specifications sesser etin e aar A 1 STV EEE a a P T E EE Biases E E eatssaeet atest A 1 ODDO AON reies E a E E ES A 3 Pial Teatres serei E cs toaea he quotes eau ee aaelestiew A 3 Networking Features sirince nnan ee a A 4 Copier Peame a a a iene al oaecuncaeianten
119. 16 10 The PIN code feature is disabled unless you turn it on and set up the fax for dialing through a PBX with PIN codes 13 21 16 12 When the toner supply runs low the fax saves the remainder of the document into the memory You can set the fax to continue printing even after the toner runs low during printing 16 18 Printing Footer on RX PAGE FOOTER The fax will not print a footer on every document printed documents received unless you turn this feature on 716 15 Chapter 12 Other Special Features 12 13 Features amp Q Q a ihn 3 s O Program button PROGRAM KEY If you press Program before you start a transmission you can tell the fax to print an activity report for the transmis sion This button can be programmed for other functions 12 5 16 6 Quick on line TX QUICK ON LINE TX When you are scanning documents the fax will start dialing and sending before all pages are scanned You can turn this feature off 716 11 Receiving password RX PASSWORD No receiving password is set until you set one If the other party regularly sends you documents with only an ITU T password with no subaddress set the RX PASSWORD 16 30 Redialing AUTO REDIAL If the other party s line is busy the fax is set to perform two re dialing attempts at two minute intervals You can increase the number of re dial attempts and the length of the interval between attempts 6 19 16 11 Reduction of RX
120. 2 CASSETTE SW B 4 RX REDUCTION OFF ON Chapter 16 Select whether to use the MP tray The MP tray cannot be used The MP tray can be used as a paper supply for fax copy report and printer functions SET MP TRAY SIZE Select the paper size you are loading on the MP tray The sizes can be set to A4 letter or legal Select the number of copies from 01 to 99 of received documents you want printed Default is 01 copy Select how you want over size documents to be divided when the paper in the paper cassette is too small Selects how legal size documents are divided This switch is effective only when the paper cassettes are set to legal size and out of legal size paper ON Divide legal size documents into two pages OFF Receive legal size documents in memory Selects how letter size documents are received on larger paper This switch is effective only when the letter size paper runs out ON Prints the letter size document on the larger paper with white space OFF Prints the letter size document in the memory Receive images at a reduced size Turns off image reduction Turns on image reduction 1 RX REDUCTION AUTO SELECTION The fax unit automatically reduces the image to the size of the selected paper FIXED REDUCTION You set the reduction rate 75 90 95 97 Summary of Important Settings 16 17 Go fe i G E E N e G Pe ihn fe Q z iz Ca 5 t sbs
121. 2TIMES Even if the fax machine is set to redial several times it will redial only once if there is no tone or there is a ring back tone during the first attempt 2 REDIAL INTERVAL From 02 to 99 minutes O2MIN After the first attempt at dialing fails re dialing is not attempted If there is more than one document waiting in the memory to be sent to the same destination after the timer goes off to send the first document then all documents are sent together in the same transmission With this feature the fax unit makes one phone call instead of faxing each docu ment with a separate phone call This feature saves time and money 16 34 Turn quick memory sending off and on When ON is selected the fax unit starts sending the document while it is still being scanned 6 13 Set the interval between dialing entering phone numbers when sending to more than one destination 6 22 Fax scans the document in 5 or 10 seconds after you enter the phone number Press Start Scan to begin transmission Otherwise the fax unit returns to standby Summary of Important Settings 16 11 Go 0 i G E E gt e Pe ihe fe Q z iz Ca 5 t sbs p 3 7 TX STAMP Turn stamping off or on and how documents are to be stamped 12 8 ON STAMP ACTION DIRECT amp MEMORY TX Stamps only documents sent direct and from memory DIRECT TX Stamps documents sent with direct sending onl
122. 4 start speed 16 30 with ITU T password 6 27 with ITU T subaddress 6 27 sequential broadcasting sending to more than one location 6 22 setting up assembling fax unit 2 23 attaching trays 2 26 connecting extension phone 2 40 connecting handset option 2 38 connecting telephone line 2 39 error messages at power on 2 42 installing toner cartridge 2 23 loading MP tray 2 43 loading paper 2 31 loading Paper Cassettes 1 and 2 2 31 power on 2 41 removing shipping material 2 19 shipping material removing 2 19 speed dialing Coded Speed Dialing 4 5 4 31 Group Dialing 4 5 4 33 ITU T subaddress password 6 27 lists 14 2 methods 4 5 One touch Speed Dialing 4 5 4 29 sending confidential documents 10 10 sending relaying documents 9 12 using 4 29 4 31 4 33 4 35 with PIN code 13 27 stamp option described 12 8 re filling ink pad 15 33 setting 16 12 setting up 12 8 Super Fine setting 6 5 SUPPLY REC PAPER displayed at power on 2 42 system password setting 13 2 16 28 SYSTEM SETTINGS DATE SETUP 16 30 described 16 3 Index DISPLAY LANGUAGE 16 30 ENERGY SAVER 16 31 listed 16 27 MEMORY LOCK RX 16 29 PASSWORD system password 16 28 PHONE NO CHECK 16 31 RESTRICTIVE CODES 16 28 RX PASSWORD 16 30 RX RESTRICTION 16 29 RX START SPEED 16 30 TX START SPEED 16 30 system setting password canceling 13 4 changing 13 4 T telephone line connecting 2 39 jack required 2 5
123. 4 31 if not Press Directory and search for the name to dial the number 4 35 If you make a mistake during dialing press Stop to return to standby and start again TEL 1 123 4567 09 CALIFORNIA MRKTS You can press more than one speed dialing button to send the document to more than one location after the timer goes off If you want to enter the numbers with regular dialing for a sequential broadcast make sure you press Set after every number DELAYED TX SENDER S NAME SENDER S NAME CANON DIV 20 Chapter 6 Sending Documents 6 25 D S Q O Documents 5 Ifyou want to skip selecting a sender name go to step 6 if not TTI Selector If you want to select a sender name press the TTI Selector button until you see the sender name you want to use D c You can also use the search buttons to scroll up or down the TTI list SENDER S NAME 19 CANON FAX DIV Set C 6 Press Set The fax scans the document and stores it in the memory DELAYED TX 2339 SCANNING DOC P 001 L The fax will hold the document in the memory until the timer for the document goes off Then it will send the document to the destinations you specified L To cancel a document set for timer sending use the Delete File button gt 8 9 6 26 Sending Documents Chapter 6 Sending a Document with a Subaddress Password You can send documents with ITU T standard subaddresses and pass words In order for a transaction to s
124. 5 6 Pull the transfer guide back to its full extent then wipe the silver metal strip with cloth Then gently guide the transfer guide back to its original position TRANSFER CHARGING LL S ROLLER P e The spring for the transfer guide is strong Always guide the transfer a guide slowly back to its original position by holding the green lever Note Never let it jump back by releasing the lever e To avoid deterioration in print quality never touch the transfer charging roller when you clean the metal strip 7 Replace the toner cartridge in the fax unit 8 Close the printer cover lower the upper output tray the document output tray and the document feeder tray and connect the power cord of the fax unit to the power source Cleaning the Scanning Area Periodically check the scanning glass the white scanning strip and rollers If the underside of the ADF cover or the scanning glass is dirty the documents you send will look dirty 1 Disconnect the power cord of the fax unit from its power source Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 27 Questions Oo wt O N oqa co gt 5E 2s ss o L 2 Gently open the upper unit of the ADF cover as shown in the illustration below THAT THE LOWER UNIT IS LIFTED AS SHOWN IN THE Caution ILLUSTRATION ON THE RIGHT THE LOWER UNIT MAY FALL HEAVILY WHEN YOU UNLOCK THE ADF COVER ON STEP 3 A BE SURE NOT TO OPEN THE ADF COVER FULLY TO THE EXTENT
125. 5 17 Questions J Oo wt O A oqa co gt 5E 2s ss o L Is the other fax functioning properly The sending fax usually determines image quality Try copying a document on your own fax If the copy is clean then the other fax has a problem Call the other party and ask them to clean the scanning glass on the other fax L Cannot receive a confidential document in your confidential mailbox Does the other party s fax support subaddress password transac tions If the other party s fax does not support subaddress password transactions you cannot receive confidential documents Make sure the other party knows the correct subaddress password for your confidential mailbox L Cannot poll another fax and receive its document Are you polling without a subaddress password If the other party s fax is a Canon fax and can set a polling ID ask them to set the polling ID for 255 decimal or 1111 1111 binary Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 45 Are you polling with a subaddress or password Contact the other party and confirm that their fax supports receiving a polling request with a subaddress or password If the other party s fax supports subaddress password polling confirm that you are using the correct subaddress and password If the other party s fax does not support subaddress password polling call the other party without subaddress password 11 3 Documents Are Not Being Cop
126. 5 party and confirm that the other fax has been seconds turned on If the other fax is busy try sending your document at a later time When you send ducuments long distance press Pause after dialing 6 10 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 35 CODE PROBLEM SOLUTION 0021 0022 0025 0033 0034 0035 0036 0037 0059 15 36 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions You cannot be polling receiving The settings for the One touch or Coded Speed dialing buttons you are using to dial the other party have been deleted During registration of the number for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing you registered the number for confidential or relay sending but you omitted the subaddress After setting up relay sending or confidential sending the settings for One touch or Coded Speed dialing may have been changed You have attempted to send a confidential document to a fax unit that does not support the use of ITU T subaddresses You sent a confidential document to another fax unit but it was rejected You have attempted to relay a document to a fax unit that does not support the use of ITU T subaddresses You have attempted to relay a document to a fax unit but it was rejected The memory in your fax is full and cannot store a document for sending or receiving The numter you had dialed did not match with the registe
127. 5K SK SI SIC SIC SIERRA RC CC EC EK KK KK 3K aK aK ak CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID TX TYPE 732 2233 ADAM BOOKS CPA REGULAR TX 761 1298 JOHN BARRISTER REGULAR TX 1 516 911 4411 NATALIE SMITH REGULAR TX 1 914 438 3619 SEYMOUR GREEN REGULAR TX Coded Speed Dial List 1 12 31 1999 10 47 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 7 001 kokk CODED SPEED DIAL LIST 1 kokk DEEE EEE EE EEE EE EEE EEEE EE EEE E Kk oe ak a CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID TX TYPE x000 555 1234 BILL REGULAR TX x002 16172223322 HUNT INVESTMENTS REGULAR TX 003 1 312 538 4005 LAKESIDE INC REGULAR TX x001 14043333499 PEACHTRFE INC REGULAR TX Chapter 14 Printing Reports and Lists 14 3 One Touch Speed Dial List 2 12 31 1999 09 41 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 1001 K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K kkk 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL LIST 2 kok k KK K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID TX START TIME TX SPEED TX TYPE ECM CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID TX START TIME TX SPEED TX TYPE ECM CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID TX START TIME TX SPEED TX TYPE SUBADDRESS ECM 889 344 222 AK ENTERPRISES 1 10 00 2 12 00 33600bps 0 REGULAR TX ON 3 14 00 4 16 00 5 18 00 513 931 7660 ENVIRONS CORP 1 23 00 2 08 00 33600bps 0 REGULAR TX ON 291 4564 ACTUAL ASSOC 1 18 00 2 9600bps 0 CONFID TX 00000000 ON Coded Speed Di
128. 6 6 2 Dial the telephone numbers by entering the numbers one right after the other Following are the three methods you can use to enter the numbers for Sequential Broadcasting Use the One touch Speed Dialing buttons to dial up to 72 destina tions TEL 123 4567 01 CANON INC tions Coded Dial Use the Coded Speed Dialing buttons to dial up to 128 destina 0 0 0 P 8 P 9090 TEL 123 4567 x002 CANON INC CA 6 22 Sending Documents Chapter 6 C Use regular dialing with the numeric keypad to dial up to 10 destinations but make sure that you press Set after each number you enter with regular dialing You can also press the Redial button to redial the last number dialed with the numeric keypad You must dial the second number within 5 seconds of dialing the first number All subsequent numbers must be dialed within 10 seconds If you wait longer than the timeout interval before dialing the next number the fax will start scanning the document The timeout interval can be turned off 16 11 Start S n 3 After you have entered all of the numbers press Start Scan Regardless of the order you used when dialing the fax will send the document to the locations you entered in this order One touch Speed Dialing numbers Coded Speed Dialing numbers then regular dial numbers To cancel sequential broadcasting Stop To cancel a sequential broadcast press Stop D After CANCEL DURING TX RX is displayed
129. 74 35 3 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels ey Press TTI Selector until the desired name appears in the display if not A vy CJC Press TTI Selector Then press the search button until the desired name appears in the display 6 6 Sending Documents Chapter 6 Set 4 Press Set 5 Continue the procedure for the feature you want to use Using Regular Dialing When you come to a step that requires dialing a number you can dial the number with the buttons on the numeric keypad just like dialing a telephone number This is called regular dialing To make dialing easier register frequently used numbers for speed dialing 4 1 1 Set the document on the fax 6 3 2 Dial the telephone number Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the telephone number Just after you press a button if you see that you have entered the wrong number just press Delete to delete the rightmost digit Then enter the correct number Start Scan 3 Press Start Scan The fax starts scanning the first page into the memory Chapter 6 Sending Documents 6 7 D D Q V Documents Canceling Sending a Document Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress To Cancel Sending on a Single Line Sop 1 Press Stop i If you are using direct sending an alarm sounds and the transmis sion is canceled immediately if not If you are using memory sending a message is displaye
130. 8 8Kbps modem speeds or lower depending on telephone line conditions Options For details about purchasing these options contact your local authorized Canon dealer Simultaneous sending receiving Dual line Upgrade Kit II on dual telephone line connection After installation of the optional Dual line Upgrade Kit II you can connect two telephone lines to the fax unit Either line can be used independently or simul taneously for separate transactions For details contact your local authorized Canon dealer Fax Memory 4MB memory module is available to expand the fax memory capacity of the LASER CLASS 3170 Series For details see Appendix A 2 Chapter 1 Welcome 1 5 Printer Board I This option enables your LASER CLASS 3170 3175 to operate as a printer Printer Board I is a standard feature for LASER CLASS 3170MS Document Distribution System This option enables your LASER CLASS 3170 Series to operate as a shared fax and network scanner in your network environment However please note that this option and the Dual line Upgrade Kit II cannot be installed on the same fax unit Printer Options The Canon Envelope Feeder the Duplex Unit the Canon Adobe PostScript 3 Module I and the Ethernet Board EB 52 FX are available as printer options for the LASER CLASS 3170MS and for the LASER CLASS 3170 3175 with Printer Board I installed Also 4MB 8MB and 16 MB RAM DIMM modules are available to expand the printer mem
131. AM KEY 16 6 SENDER S NAME 16 5 TEL LINE TYPE 16 6 TX TERMINAL ID 16 5 UNIT NAME 16 5 UNIT TELEPHONE 16 5 VOLUME CONTROL 16 6 User s Data List sample 14 5 I 10 Index This publication uses 50 recycled paper Canon CANON INC 30 2 Shimomaruko 3 chome Ohta ku Tokyo 146 8501 Japan CANON U S A INC One Canon Plaza Lake Success NY 11042 U S A CANON CANADA INC 6390 Dixie Road Mississauga Ontario L5T 1P7 Canada CANON EUROPA N V Bovenkerkerweg 59 61 P O Box 2262 1180 EG Amstelveen The Netherlands CANON FRANCE S A 17 quai du President Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex France CANON U K LTD Woodhatch Reigate Surrey RH2 8BF United Kingdom CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH P O Box 100364 Europark Fichtenhain A10 47807 Krefeld Germany CANON LATIN AMERICA INC 6505 Blue Lagoon Drive Suite 325 Miami Florida 33126 U S A CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 1 Thomas Holt Drive North Ryde Sydney N S W 2113 Australia CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD 79 Anson Road 09 01 06 Singapore 079906 CANON HONG KONG CO LTD 9 F The Hong Kong Club Building 3A Chater Road Central Hong Kong HT1 2169 000 V 1 1 032001NF0 4 CANON INC 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN
132. ANSMIT 0025 SCANNING DOC P 001 You will see a series of brief alternating messages that tell you the fax is dialing calling then transmitting the document The number being dialed name of the other party and the transaction number of the document are also displayed Chapter 4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 29 Here are some important points you should keep in mind when you use One touch Speed Dialing E Q To start scanning immediately press Start Scan Otherwise the fax will wait 5 seconds before it starts scanning This timeout feature can be turned off 16 11 To locate and press the correct button you may have to open the One touch Speed Dialing panels The fax will not dial the number registered for the One touch Speed Dialing button until you set the document on the fax for sending If you press the button before you load the document the fax will prompt you SET DOCUMENT If you press a One touch Speed Dialing button where no number has been registered the fax tells you NO TEL 12 If you want to cancel the transmission after you press a One touch Speed Dialing button press Stop 6 8 When you come to a step in any procedure where you have to dial a number you can press a One touch Speed Dialing button to dial When you register a number for One touch Speed Dialing Coded Speed Dialing and Group Dialing you can as an option set the time you want Note your document to go out up to 5 dif
133. Before You Set Up Document Transfer sseseeseeeeeeeerserereererersesees 7 13 Setting Up the Fax for Document Transfer s s s 7 14 Turning the Transfer Mode ON and OFF ceeeeeseeeeereseeseneeeees 7 17 Turning Transfer Mode OWN isssssssssgsqssneuestontoasasaastocasaradtqanstonaese 7 17 Tommie Transfer Mode OFF isis tans caencn sg iterations 7 18 Changing the Transfer Settings 0 cseseseseseeeeeteeeeseteeeeseneeeeees 7 18 Canceling the Transfer Settings sccssecsseesecsserseeeseeeseeseeeeees 7 20 Chapter8 Using the Memory Features co cscccccics cccssccsesssesecsesasanssescdsdecsscacsesseaccseccsensees 8 1 When the Fax Displays RECEIVED IN MEMORY oseese 8 2 Displaying the Transaction History ccseseeeeseseeceseneeseeeeeeeeneeeeees 8 3 Printinge a Memory LASt vvctanisicsuacisss orraa ia AO 8 5 Printing a Document in the Memory sssssessesssisresrseerererrsreresrsrsresrses 8 6 Sending a Document in Memory to a Different Destination 8 7 Erasing a Document from the Memory sesssseeeeeeeseseererrersreresrseesses 8 9 Deleting a Document with the Delete File Button 0 0 ee 8 9 Deleting a Document with the Memory Reference Button 8 10 Setting Up and Using a Memory BOX eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 11 Before You Create Memory BOXES cccceceseeseeeesseeeseeseeeseeaeens 8 12 When You Create a Memory Box seeeseeeeseseeeeseeeeesseeeasneeeens 8 12 ACCESS SELLING a8 assistant canoe a a aa
134. CLASS 3175 19 8 in w x 20 in d x 23 3 in h 501 mm w x 508 mm d x 588 mm h without handset 22 5 in w x 20 in d x 23 3 in h 571 mm w x 508 mm d x 588 mm h with handset You can load executive or B5 size paper in Paper Cassette 2 only when you use it for the printer function When you use it as a paper supply for fax you can load letter legal or A4 size paper only Based on CCITT ITU T No 1 Chart Standard Mode JBIG is anew ITU T standard image data compression method JBIG s compression method allows data to be compressed more efficiently than MMR a conventional compression method JBIG is especially effective when transmitting halftone image documents Because the smaller data size requires less transmission time JBIG saves you time and money Approximately 3 seconds per page fax transmission time based on CCITT ITU T No 1 Chart JBIG Standard Mode at 33 6Kbps modem speed kkk k Specifications are subject to change without notice A 6 Specifications Appendix A Appendix B Documents You Can Scan Follow these guidelines if you need exact information about the dimen sions of documents you can scan Document Media to Avoid Avoid trying to scan wrinkled or creased paper carbon or carbon back paper curled paper coated paper torn paper onion skin or other very thin paper Specifications for Paper Documents You Can Scan Quality Use plain bond typewriter quality without curl folds or r
135. Copied sssessessesessersesssrersrrseserserersees 15 46 Tlaving Other Problems ene ae ere ee annoy anne ne eee iini 15 46 L Recording the User Reminder Sheets 0 0 0 0 cccesseseseseeeeeteeeeeeneeeeees 15 48 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 1 Questions J Oo wd O A oqa o gt of 5 cs o Li Removing Document Feed Jams To prevent frequent jams during document scanning always check the pages before you feed them into the fax 6 2 If a document is curled or wrinkled make a copy of the original and scan the copy If a paper jam occurs during scanning the Error lamp blinks red and a message will appear in the display CHECK DOCUMENT Stop 1 Press Stop b 2 Gently lift the ADF cover 15 2 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 3 Pull the document straight out to remove it Zs D Questions O 0 9A oqa o gt 5 ES ss s Li P Always open the ADF cover before you attempt to remove a jammed s document Note 4 Close the ADF cover and press down on it gently until you hear it lock in place Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 3 Removing Printer Feed Jams Observe these guidelines when you are inspecting the fax for printer feed jams L Ifthe paper jam occurred as a result of a power failure restore power to the fax unit by re connecting it to the power source before you follow t
136. DP Document Type 1 2 3 4 5 Adjusts quality for documents with only text or with both photos i CL UL CL C C and text oan It il l 7 1 CL 7 eae One Touch Speed Dialing Buttons ____ Dial b istered under One touch Speed Diali mer ers registered under One touch Speed Dialing uC 2C 3C uC 5C E E E ee E I l One Touch Speed Dialing Panels The first panel displays buttons 1 25 Open the first panel to access buttons 26 50 Open the second panel to access buttons 51 72 Open the third panel to access the registration buttons ee ee ee Registers multi step setting normally done by pressing buttons on the operation panel so you can do them at the press of single button Transaction Displays information about previous sending and receiving transactions Delete File Deletes documents waiting in memory for sending Pause Enters pauses between digits or after the entire phone number when dialing or registering facsimile numbers Start Scan Numeric Keypad Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter phone numbers when dialing These buttons also enter text numbers and symbols when registering names and numbers Tone Connects to information services that accept tone dialing only even if you are using a rotary pulse 3 2 Getting Started Chapter 3 Energy Saver Switches the fax out of the energy saver mode PRT Message Switches the LCD display between the fax message
137. DSET KIT L7 LJ G3 FAX OPTION MEMORY VII 4 MB _I Verification Stamp Unit 1 _J Dual line Upgrade Kit II For the LASER CLASS 3170 3170MS L Paper Cassette 2 PF 52 letter legal A4 executive B5 size 500 sheet capacity For the LASER CLASS 3170 3175 _J_ Printer Board I For the LASER CLASS 3170MS or the LASER CLASS 3170 3175 with Printer Board I installed These are printer options For details refer to the Printer User s Guide RAM DIMM Module 4 MB RAM DIMM Module 8 MB RAM DIMM Module 16 MB Ethernet Board EB 52 FX Adobe PostScript 3 Module I Envelope Feeder EF 52 Duplex Unit DU 52 Document Distribution System O L C L L L L L Supply _I Canon FX6 Toner Cartridge 2 16 Setting Up Chapter 2 Parts of the Fax Take a few moments to look over the fax and become familiar with its parts The illustrations below are those of the LASER CLASS 3170 with the following options installed handset kit Dual line Upgrade Kit Printer Board and Paper Cassette 2 Front View DOCUMENT FEEDER TRAY Holds documents for scanning DOCUMENT EXTENSION TRAY Open to support long documents during scanning DOCUMENT GUIDES Adjust to the width of the document DOCUMENT OUTPUT TRAY Holds sent or copied documents ADF COVER Provides access to remove paper jams and to clean the scanning area UPPER OUTPUT TRAY Holds printed documents after they are ejected from the fax LCD DISPLAY
138. E This is the UNIT NAME or a sender name you select with the TTI Selector button when you scan the document for sending DESTINATION If you dialed with a speed dialing button the other party s name appears here PAGE NUMBER The page number of the document 12 31 1999 3 12 Getting Started 11 18 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC WORLD ESTATE INC West 44th Street New York NY U S A Global oal Elate Consultants in the Hea of Wew York December 28 1999 Dear Member By now you have all had a chance to become familiar with your new Canon fax units and are ready to set up a reliable economical communications network that offers many exciting features We can save money by scanning documents in the memory and then setting the delayed timer to send all the documents at the same time later at night to take advantage of late night rates Many of us are separated by long distances and reside in different time zones We can set up the polling feature to pol ALC Hes e UO CLI OM Cac OLNE NOCH We ale N0 LI office For sensitive material about clients and confidential bids we can set up and use the confidential mailbox features We will also be able to keep down costs by limiting use of the fax e to operators who know the correct department codes and passwords Relay sending is another money saver We can designate one relay fax in your area send one transmission from the home office on Ua c UJ c c UU U z a
139. E SETUP format setting 16 30 defaults defined 2 3 listed 12 12 delayed sending setting 6 24 setting timer 6 24 density scanning density 16 5 print density 16 18 Department Access Code setting 13 6 using 13 11 Department Access Code Report sample 14 11 dialing Coded Speed Dialing 4 15 4 31 directory dialing 4 35 entering pauses 4 2 Group Dialing 4 24 4 33 long distance 6 10 One touch Speed Dialing 4 6 4 29 PIN codes 13 24 regular dialing 6 7 speed dialing 4 5 4 29 speed dialing methods 4 5 tone dialing on pulse line 12 3 direct sending described 6 15 procedure 6 15 directory dialing using 4 35 2 DISPLAY LANGUAGE setting 16 30 document check before loading for sending 6 2 B 1 copying 5 2 defined 2 3 deleting with Delete File button 8 9 deleting with Memory Reference button 8 10 erasing from memory 8 9 jam 15 2 receiving large size 16 17 removing document feed jams 15 2 scanning for polling sending 11 20 SELECT CASSETTE 16 17 setting for copying 5 3 setting for sending 6 3 Document Distribution System options 1 6 document feeder tray attaching 2 27 load limit 5 4 6 4 setting document for copying 5 3 setting document for sending 6 3 document output tray attaching 2 26 Document Type setting for copying 5 5 setting for sending 6 5 Dual line automatic switching 7 2 7 7 viewing simultaneous transactions 6 14 7 3 Dual line Upgrade Kit II opt
140. ED You have pressed the Stop button to cancel the current transaction The fax unit should return to standby in a few moments SUBADDRESS TX REJECTD You attempted to send a document with an ITU T subaddress but the other party s fax unit does not support receiving a document with an ITU T subaddress SUPPLY REC PAPER Your fax unit has run out of paper Re fill the paper cassettes 72 31 USER ACCESS CODE You have to enter user access code to send copy or print reports USER ACCESS LOCK Sending or printing has been restricted Set the TX SETTINGS or FAX S PRINTER SET of the restrictive codes to OFF 13 14 Questions Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 41 Questions and Answers Documents Are Not Being Sent Correctly 1 Cannot send after dialing Is the document set in the automatic document feeder ADF correctly Remove the document and set it correctly 6 3 15 2 Is the number dialing correctly Check the number registered for the speed dialing button and make sure it is correct You may want to print a list of all regis tered speed dialing buttons 14 2 If you do not have time to check and correct the registration immediately use regular dialing 6 7 Is the transmission speed too fast for the telephone lines in your area The telephone lines in your area may be in poor condition Select a lower transmission speed 34 13 4 22 16 30 Is the oth
141. EL C123 4567 01 CANON Start Scan 3 Press Start Scan ENTER PIN CODE gt D oO is m T A gt a A m Zz O je VSC C Enter the PIN code using the buttons on the numeric keypad A maximum of 20 digits can be entered for the PIN code ENTER PIN CODE aan heen eae OPER__ SYMBOLS The PIN code is not displayed as it is entered 5 Press Set to start transmission Chapter 13 Restricting Use of the Fax 13 27 Q a Ou ww O o 0 Q ce Forced PIN Code Access Follow this procedure to dial when Forced PIN Code Access NECESS PIN CODE has been turned ON With Forced PIN Code Access ON you must enter a PIN Code every time you dial The PIN Code must be entered either before or after the number depending on how PIN Code Access has been set up 13 23 1 Set the document on the facsimile DOCUMENT READY 2 Dial the telephone number with the numeric keypad or the speed dialing buttons TELS 123 4567 01 CANON Start Scan D 9 D00 2 3 Press Start Scan ENTER PIN CODE gt D O iw m m A gt amp A m Zz O Enter the PIN code with the buttons on the numeric keypad A maximum of 20 digits can be entered for the PIN code ENTER PIN CODE A The PIN code is not displayed as it is entered o Cc lt x lt R 5 Press Set The fax starts to send the document 13 28 Restricting U
142. INT RX DOC Turn on printing of documents received in the memory box OFF Documents received in the memory box are not printed ON Documents received in the memory box are printed 1 PRINT METHOD Set the print method AUTO Print documents automatically as they are received MAN Print documents manually 2 OF RX COPIES Set the number of document copies to print 7 TRANSMIT Transmit documents from the memory box NO A document cannot be transmitted from the memory box YES A document can be transmitted from the memory box 1 SELECT LOCATIONS Select fax telephone numbers to which to send documents TEL from the memory box Use One touch or Coded Speed Dialing buttons to register the destinations 2 TX DOCUMENT Transmit documents received in the memory box or scanned into the memory box 1 RECEIVED DOCUMENT Transmit or do not transmit documents received in the memory box p TRANSMIT Documents received in the memory box are to be transmit gt G 2 ted Ci TX REPORT Send a TX report to the originator for every document d 7 received and transmitted from the memory box 5 EW TRANSMIT A transmission report is sent o NOT TRANSMIT A transmission report is not sent NOT TRANSMIT Documents received in the memory box are not to be transmitted 2 SCAN DOCUMENT Transmit or do not transmit documents scanned into the memory box TRANSMIT Scanned documents can be transmitted NOT TRANSMIT Scanned documents cannot be transmitted 3 TX START TIME
143. IST Prints the standard list List 1 of all One touch Speed Dialing buttons and numbers registered in the fax 2 CODED DIAL LIST Prints the standard list List 1 of all Coded Speed Dialing buttons and numbers registered in the fax 3 1 TOUCH DETAIL Prints the detailed list List 2 of all One touch Speed Dialing buttons and numbers registered in the fax in a stacked format 4 CODED DETAIL Prints the detailed list List 2 of all Coded Speed Dialing buttons and numbers registered in the fax in a stacked format 5 GROUP DIAL LIST Prints the list of buttons and numbers registered for Group Dialing 14 2 Printing Reports and Lists Chapter 14 Set 3 Press Set The Group Dial list starts printing SORTED OUTPUT 1 NO 1 NO The One touch or Coded Speed Dial list is printed in order of the Speed Dial numeric list from the lowest A number to the highest number E 2 YES The Connection ID name column is sorted and the 2 One touch or Coded Speed Dial list is printed in alpha eo betical order E 6 A v t C JC 4 Press the search buttons to display YES or NO Press Set a BD After you press Set the report starts printing PRINTING REPORT Samples of each type of list are shown below One Touch Speed Dial List 1 12 31 1999 10 32 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 7 001 9K 9K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K SK SK SK SIC SIC SIC SIC SRC SRC RAC EEE oC KK KK KK ak aK ak kkk 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL LIST 1 kkk EK 9K 9K 3K 3K 3K 3K
144. JKL MNO if not O Press a One touch Speed Dialing button to dial the number gt 4 29 D LOJO if not 0 Press Coded Dial and a three digit code to dial the number 4 31 if not Dial the number with directory dialing 4 35 Start Scan 3 Press Start Scan If you see this message you have to enter the department access code Go on to step 4 ENTER DAC Chapter 13 Restricting Use of the Fax 13 11 if not If you see this message you have to enter the user access code Go on to step 5 USER ACCESS CODE 4 Enter the DAC department access code LJ Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four digit O oo KD Np DAC department access code then press Set D00 Q Doo DAC PASSWORD JOO If you enter the wrong department access code the fax beeps and waits for you to enter the correct code 5 Enter the DAC password or user access code DAC password or user access code then press Set O O L Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four digit OJO 9 If you enter the wrong password the fax beeps and waits for you 0 to enter the correct password After you enter the department access code and password or user access code correctly the fax sends the document Making a Copy with Restrictions ON Follow this procedure to make a copy with the printing restriction set up and turned on 1 Set the document on the fax DOCUMENT READY 2
145. K kk ok ok CONFID MBOX 01 CONFID MBOX NAME LOUIS TX RX NO 5007 CONNECTION TEL 1 213 978 3314 SUBADDRESS 1111 CONNECTION ID BELZER INC ST TIME 12 31 13 33 USAGE T 00 18 PGS 1 RESULT OK 10 8 Using Confidential Mailboxes Chapter 10 L The report lists the subaddress where the documents have been received L Printing this Confidential Receive Report every time you receive a confidential document can be turned off and on 16 8 After the report prints a message alternates with the standby display date and time until you print the report received in the mailbox RECEIVED IN MAILBOX Follow this procedure to print a document received in a confidential mailbox I 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press HN Confidential Mailbox conceal CONFID TX RX C9 1 CONFIDENTIAL TX D am 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below CONFID TX RX 2 CONFIDENTIAL RX Using Zo w Q Cx 0 v 2 yqa m SS S 3 Press Set SUBADDRESS O C9 4 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the subaddress O0 Set for the mailbox Then press Set pe CONFIDENTIAL RX Ll PASSWORD O Chapter 10 Using Confidential Mailboxes 10 9 Set 3 3 C3 5 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four digit D E password to open the mailbox Then press Set OPER__ SYMBOLS LA To protect your password it is not displayed when you ente
146. LASER CLASS 3170MS or the LASER CLASS 3170 3175 with the Printer Board I installed follow the guide lines below Otherwise the paper size matching error occurs and the message CHECK PAPER SIZE appears on the display L Even when you use the MP tray for the fax function it is necessary to set the same paper size on the printer menus as on the fax menus For details about setting the paper size of the MP tray on the printer menus refer to Printing from the Multi Purpose Tray in the Printer User s Guide L If you use the MP tray for the printer function and load paper of sizes other than letter legal or A4 it is necessary to set USE MP TRAY to OFF on the FAX S PRINTER SET menu 2 49 The sizes and kinds of print media you can set on the MP tray differ when you use it as an input tray for the printer function For details on the print media specifications for the printer function refer to the Print Media Specifications section in Appendix 4 of the Printer User s Guide When not in use the tray can fold up into the fax unit Loading the MP Tray Chapter 2 Before you load the paper follow these general guidelines L For high quality printings we recommend using Canon standard 17 24 Ib 64 90g m weight paper L Use of print media not meeting the paper s requirements may cause severe paper jams or result in excessive mechanical wear of the fax L Do not use the following paper in the MP tray
147. LEASE WAIT The unit has warmed up and is ready to use when you see the date and time display 12 31 1999 FRI 12 20 When the date is displayed on the LCD the fax is in the standby mode and ready for normal operation If the Error lamp starts blinking red wait for one of the following messages to appear Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 41 2 42 Setting Up INSTALL CARTRIDGE REPLACE CARTRIDGE You have not yet installed the toner cartridge Install the FX6 toner cartridge 2 23 The toner cartridge has run out of toner Replace the toner cartridge CHECK PRINTER COVER The printer cover is not closed com SUPPLY REC PAPER pletely If it does not close easily do not force it Remove the toner car tridge and insert it again Make sure it is sitting level inside the fax machine then close the printer cover again At least one of the paper cassettes is empty or not seated correctly inside the fax machine Remove each cassette Make sure the stacks of paper are below the tabs and insert the paper cassettes in again Push the paper cassettes all the way in until they lock in place Chapter 2 Using the MP Tray LA Note The MP multi purpose tray can hold letter legal or A4 size paper The capacity is approximately 100 sheets of cut sheet paper 80 g m or 21 Ibs To use the MP tray as one of the input trays you need to set USE MP TRAY to ON in the FAX S PRINTER SET menu 2 48 To use the MP tray with the
148. ME pe c o E Q Fr tez 2 a A 7 o gt Press Set NAME A Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name for the number up to 16 characters long 3 7 NAME A CANON CANADA Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 17 Set Data Registration Set Set Press Set NAME A DATA ENTRY OK CODED SPD DIAL 3 OPTIONAL SETTING This completes the minimum settings for registering a three digit Coded Speed Dialing code To stop here and register another code Press Data Registration Repeat the procedure from step 2 To end the procedure and return to standby Press Stop To perform the optional setting Press Set to continue OPTIONAL SETTING OFF Press the search buttons until you see the display below OPTIONAL SETTING ON Press Set OPTIONAL SETTING 1 SET TIME 6 Set the time for the transmission L If you set the timer for the Coded Speed Dialing code every document you send with this code will be sent at the same time every day L You can set up to 5 different times in a 24 hour period for sending L You can use this feature together with BATCH TX If BATCH TX is ON the documents will be grouped and sent together at the preset time The fax unit will make only one phone call saving you time and money 16 34 4 18 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 Set C Press Set SET TIME 1 Set C Press Set again SET TIME Use the buttons on t
149. N ERROR ERROR CODES SEE TABLE IN CHAPTER 15 STOP WAS PRESSED DURING TRANSACTION Note the following additional features you can set up with the ACTIV ITY REPORT item in the REPORT SETTINGS menu E m Ly The fax is set to print an Activity Management Report automatically after 40 transactions You can turn this feature off 716 9 You can set the fax to print an Activity Management Report at the same time every day 16 9 If you set up department access codes when this feature is turned on transactions are listed by department in the Department Access Code Report shown below 14 10 Printing Reports and Lists Chapter 14 Department Access Code Report 12 31 1999 15 14 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 1001 2A 2A A AC AC RCAC AC AC Ce CC ee oe ee ee oo ok kkk ACTIVITY REPORT kkk PEETER AC AC Ce eC oe oe oe ee ee oo Ko ok DEPT ACCESS CODE 1222 ST TIME CONNECTION TEL ID SENDER NAME MODE RESULT 12 31 15 11 ADAM BOOK CPA S ROBERTS 0015 TRANSMIT ECM OK 00 15 732 2233 DEPT ACCESS CODE 3111 ST TIME CONNECTION TEL ID SENDER NAME MODE RESULT 12 31 15 12 SEYMOUR GREEN R LOUIS 0016 TRANSMIT ECM 1 OK 00 16 1 914 438 3619 Setting and Using Activity Reports For details about setting up these activity reports to print or turning them off refer to the Report Settings summary at the end of this User s Guide 16 7 Error Report TX The fax is set to print a report if an error occurs during sendin
150. NGS menu with your system settings password 13 4 SYSTEM SETTINGS 1 PASSWORD C J J 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below SYSTEM SETTINGS 2 RESTRICTIVE CODES Set 3 Press Set RESTRICTIVE CODES 1 TX SETTINGS C J J 4 Press the search buttons to display the feature you want to turn off RESTRICTIVE CODES 1 TX SETTINGS RESTRICTIVE CODES 3 TEL SETTING z To turn off restricted sending CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display below RESTRICTIVE CODES 1 TX SETTINGS Set C Press Set TX SETTINGS ON 13 14 Restricting Use of the Fax Chapter 13 CJC Press the search buttons to display OFF then press Set o Set E ze i To turn off restricted printing F CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display below 3 RESTRICTIVE CODES 2 FAX S PRINTER SET Set C Press Set FAX S PRINTER SET ON 5 4 Press the search buttons to display OFF then press Set Set i To turn off restricted use of the telephone CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display below RESTRICTIVE CODES 3 TEL SETTING Set C Press Set TEL SETTING ON 5 ci Press the search buttons to display OFF then press Set Set 5 Press Stop to return to standby To turn the settings on again just repeat this procedure from step 1 and select ON Chapter 13 Restricting Use of the Fax 13 15 Receiving Documents from Registered Senders Only Follow this procedure to turn restric
151. Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Press the search buttons to display 2 REPORT SETTINGS DATA REGISTRATION 2 REPORT SETTINGS Press Set REPORT SETTINGS 1 TX REPORT Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change Summary of Important Settings 16 7 Go fe i G E E N e G Pe ihn fe Q z iz Ca 5 t sbs sks 3 7 Default settings are in bold 1 TX REPORT PRINT ERROR ONLY OUTPUT YES REPORT WITH TX IMAGE ON OFF OUTPUT NO 2 RX REPORT OUTPUT NO PRINT ERROR ONLY OUTPUT YES 3 CONFID RX REPORT OUTPUT YES OUTPUT NO 4 MEMORY BOX REPORT OUTPUT YES OUTPUT NO Print a transmission report 714 11 Print a report only if an error occurs A report prints for every transmission Only available for PRINT ERROR ONLY or OUTPUT YES A prompt asks you to confirm whether to print the first page of the document to remind you of what it contains No prompt appears and no first page is printed Print no report even if an error occurs Print a reception activity report 714 14 No report prints for document receptions A report prints for reception errors only A report prints for every reception Print a reception activity report every time you receive a document in a confidential mailbox 10 8 14 15 A report prints every time a document is received in a confidential mailbox No report prints when a document
152. Q gt 28 5 2 ir 3 a if not Stop Press Stop to return to standby 2 Chapter 11 Setting Up and Using Polling 11 19 Scanning a Document into the Memory for Polling Sending Follow this procedure to scan a document into the polling box The document will remain in the polling box to be polled by other fax units OPER__ SYMBOLS TTI Selector A y CL Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can select a sender s name with the TTI Selector 6 6 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Polling POLLING 1 POLLING TX Press Set SUBADDRESS If the other party s fax supports ITU T subaddresses and pass words use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the subaddress for the polling box Then press Set if not If the other party s fax does not support ITU T subaddresses and passwords just press Set If you want to skip selecting a sender name go on to the next step if not If you want to select a sender name press TTI Selector until you see the sender name you want to use You can also use the search buttons to scroll up and down the TTI list SENDER S NAME 19 CANON FAX DIV 11 20 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 11 Set 6 Press Set The fax starts scanning the document into the polling box POLLING TX 6048 SCANNING DOC P 003 When another party polls your fax to recei
153. R TEL 03p123 4567P 4 2 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 Keep in mind these important points about pauses E E A pause entered within a number p is 2 seconds long You can add consecutive pauses pp with the Pause button Each additional pause adds 2 seconds to the pause time You can change the length of a pause entered within a number below A pause at the end of a number P is 10 seconds long You may have to insert one or more pauses at the end of a number to dial an overseas number You cannot insert a pause when you dial using the numeric keypad after pressing Hook or after picking up the handset Adjusting the Length of a Pause Data Registration Chapter 4 Follow this procedure to adjust the length of a pause entered within a number This procedure is effective only for adjusting the length pauses entered within telephone numbers The 10 second pause entered at the end of a number cannot be adjusted 1 Open the TX SETTINGS menu Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION 2 Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 3 we i e o Q Fr tez 2 a A 7 o gt CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 3 TX SETTINGS Set 3 Press Set TX SETTINGS 1 ECM TX A v CJC Press the search buttons u
154. REDUCTION All documents are automatically reduced to fit on a sheet document image of paper You can also set the reduction rate to a fixed rate You can select one of the fixed rates to increase the amount of reduction or you can turn reduction off 16 17 Report Activity ACTIVITY REPORT An Activity Management Report prints after every 40 Management Report transactions Transactions are listed in chronological order You can turn this feature off or set the fax to print an Activity Management Report at the same time every day You can also change the format of the report by listing sending and receiving transactions separately 716 9 Report Confidential CONFID RX A report prints every time you receive a document in a receiving REPORT confidential mailbox You can turn this feature off 16 8 Report Error TX REPORT If an error occurs while you are sending a document an REPORT WITH TX Error TX report prints automatically 716 8 IMAGE Report Memory box MEMORY BOX A report prints every time you receive a document in a receiving REPORT memory box This feature can be turned off 716 8 Report Paper PRT REPORT The default setting is off no paper cassette selected You supply for printed WHERE can select a paper supply from Paper Cassette 1 or 2 or reports the MP tray Paper Cassette 2 is optional for the LASER CLASS 3170 3170MS 16 9 12 14 Other Special Features Chapter 12 Report Receiving RX REPORT A report
155. RT REPORT 6 RX MEM BOX LIST To set up the scanning mode Press search buttons until you see the display below PROGRAM KEY SCANNING MODE Press Set SELECT SCANNING MODE amp Q 3 Q a ihn 3 s O Other Special Features 12 7 Features Use the Resolution Contrast or Document Type buttons to set these features for scanning or copying the document 6 4 Set C Press Set SELECT SCANNING MODE DATA ENTRY OK Stop 6 Press Stop to return to standby O Setting Up and Using the Optional Stamp Feature If the optional stamp feature is provided on your fax machine you can set the fax to stamp the front lower left corner of every page you scan for sending Setting Up the Stamp Feature K 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels 2 Open the TX SETTINGS menu Data Registration Press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Set Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS A y CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION oX SETTINGS 12 8 Other Special Features Chapter 12 Set C Press Set TX SETTINGS 1 ECM TX 5 3 Press the search buttons until you see the display below TX SETTINGS 7 TX STAMP P This item will not appear on the menu unless your fax machine has been provided with the stamp option 4 Press Set C J J 5 Press the search buttons to display ON or OFF then press Set
156. See also bps Sequential broadcast Allows you to send one scanned document to up to 210 destinations by using One touch Speed Dialing Coded Speed Dialing and regular dialing You just dial several numters to send the document If you do this frequently you should register the numbers for Group Dialing Smoothing Even if the image you receive from the other party s fax is of poor quality your fax unit will smooth the image to produce a better quality image Stamp The optional stamp feature marks documents that have been scanned for transmission with a yellow circle stamped on the lower left side of the document G 13 G 14 Standard Use this setting to send normal typewritten or printed documents containing only text and no drawings photographs or illustrations Standby On and ready to use All operations start from the standby mode where the date and time are displayed Super Fine This button increases the clarity of documents you send The lamp shows you the current setting It is four times the Standard resolution Switchboard Also called a PBX private branch exchange internal switching system You have to dial an outside line number along with the regular facsimile telephone number The outside line number must also be registered Depending on the system you may also have to insert a pause after the outside line number The pause button is factory preset to enter a 2 second pause However you can change th
157. Set a time for transmission of documents from the memory box EVERYDAY Set the time using the 24 hour system Up to 5 times can be sent SELECT DAYS Select a day Up to 5 times can be set for each day Chapter 16 Summary of Important Settings 16 23 8 POLLING TX For the memory box turn polling sending on and off NO Memory box cannot be used as a polling box YES Memory box can be used as a polling box 1 ERASE AFTER TX Set how the document in the memory box is to be handled after being polled and sent ON Document is erased after polling sending OFF Document remains in the memory box after polling sending 2 TX DOCUMENT Transmit documents received in the memory box or scanned into the memory box for polling 1 RECEIVED DOCUMENT Set documents received in the memory box for sending after polling TRANSMIT Documents received in the memory box from other faxes can be transmitted NOT TRANSMIT Documents received in the memory box from other faxes cannot be transmitted 2 SCAN DOCUMENT Set documents scanned into the memory box for sending after polling TRANSMIT Documents scanned into the memory box can be transmit ted NOT TRANSMIT Documents scanned into the memory box cannot be transmitted 2 CHANGE DATA Change settings for the memory box or add settings you did not do when you created the memory box SET BOX Enter the number of the box you want to change PASSWORD Enter the password protecting the memory box settings You can n
158. TPUT NO Reports are not printed when the forced memory receiving feature is on OUTPUT YES Reports are printed when the forced memory receiving feature is on 3 TIME SETUP Set a time to turn on forced memory receiving OFF ON 1 START TIME Turn on memory receiving at a specified time EVERYDAY Set up to 5 times for every day SELECT DAYS Set up to 5 times for each selected day of the week 2 END TIME Turn off memory receiving at specified time EVERY DAY Set up to 5 times for every day SELECT DAYS Set up to 5 times for each selected day of the week 4 RX RESTRICTION Turn off junk mail 713 16 OFF Anyone can dial your fax and send a document ON Another party can dial your fax and send a document only if their number is registered on your fax for a One touch or Coded Speed Dialing button Chapter 16 Summary of Important Settings 16 29 Go fe i G E E gt e G Pe ihn fe Q z iz Ca 5 t sbs p 3 5 DATE SETUP Set the format for the DATE amp TIME settings menu and how the date is displayed in the LCD in the standby MM DD YYYY mode DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD 6 DISPLAY LANGUAGE Select a language for prompts messages menus and printed reports The number of languages available may be different depending on where you purchased your fax machine ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH 7 TX START SPEED Set the transmission speed for all documents you send Available settings
159. To set the year to 2000 or later enter 00 01 02 etc L Just enter the new number over the old number _J You can also use the cursor buttons to move the cursor without changing a number entry L To restore the previous entry press Clear DATE amp TIME 01 02 00 08 45 Press Set DATE amp TIME DATA ENTRY OK USER SETTINGS 2 UNIT TELEPHONE Enter the unit telephone number The unit telephone number is the telephone number for your own fax Press Set UNIT TELEPHONE TEL Chapter 3 Set Set Chapter 3 Use these buttons on the numeric keypad to enter your own fax number Data entry buttons 0 9 Enters a number Space Enters a space spaces are optional Delete Deletes the rightmost digit of the number you are entering so you can enter a new digit Clear Clears the entire entry if you want to start again Enters a plus sign You can register a number of up to 20 digits UNIT TELEPHONE TEL 123 4567 Press Set UNIT TELEPHONE DATA ENTRY OK Enter the unit name USER SETTINGS 3 UNIT NAME Press Set UNIT NAME A Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name of up to 24 characters You can enter letters in upper or lower case and enter numbers In the upper right corner of the display you will see the letter A This means you are in the text entry mode Press the asterisk button on the numeric keypad to switch the entry mode Display Press keypad buttons
160. Y REPORT LOWER OUTPUT TRAY Example 2 For the LASER CLASS 3170MS or for the LASER CLASS 3170 3175 with the Printer Board I installed FAX UPPER OUTPUT TRAY COPY UPPER OUTPUT TRAY REPORT UPPER OUTPUT TRAY PRINTER LOWER OUTPUT TRAY eIf you have installed the Printer Board I to the LASER CLASS 3170 or the LASER CLASS 3175 it is recommended to designate one tray for Note the fax function and the other tray for the printer function e Use the supplied tray labels to indicate the type of output designated for delivery to the upper and lower output trays 2 27 2 52 Setting Up Chapter 2 Press Set 5 Press Stop to return to standby eIf the full paper sensor detects that the tray is full when the output tray settings are input the fax stops printing If the fax is receiving documents they are stored in memory and the messages RECEIVED IN MEMORY and OUTPUT TRAY FULL appear alternately on the display eOnce you have picked up the printed paper from the output trays do not replace them onto the trays It may cause paper jam Using the Face up Tray To select face up delivery pull down the face up tray The fax machine will automatically switch to face up delivery The face up tray is particularly useful for heavier paper To open the face up tray take hold of its tab and pull down the tray Then grasp the end of the face up tray and push it with your thumb to unlock the extension tray and pull it out until it is fully
161. Y B CAST press Set and turn this feature off You do not have to delete the relay group to disable it temporarily L To change the operation password first you have to enter the old password it is not displayed as you enter it and then you have to enter the new password it is displayed as you enter it Stop 7 When you are finished making changes press Stop to return to k standby Deleting the Relay Group Follow this procedure to delete the relay group and all of its settings 1 Open the RELAY TX GROUP menu 9 4 Network RELAY TX GROUP 1 SETUP FILE gt amp Q es D D C JC 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below RELAY TX GROUP 3 DELETE FILE Set C93 Press Set DELETE FILE SET RLY TX GROUP 00 C3 3 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the relay group number then press Set 8 7 DELETE FILE IOIO PASSWORD z If you have not set the operation password you can skip the next step Chapter 9 Using a Relay Network 9 9 C 4 Enter the four digit operation password and press Set DOD 4 8 6 DELETE FILE OORO FILE DELETED o OPER__ SYMBOLS Stop gt 5 Press Stop to return to standby If the relay has been set for timer sending and the document is still in the memory you will not be able to delete the relay group until the document is sent In this case the fax will prompt CANNOT DELETE Wait until the do
162. about the optional memory kits contact your authorized Canon dealer O r ape D S m L A memory backup function is provided to save the contents of the memory for up to approximately 12 hours during a power failure Memory Features Based on CCITT ITU T No 1 Chart Standard Mode Displaying the Transaction History Follow this procedure to display results of transactions This feature is convenient when you want to check the status of a transaction without printing an activity management report Transaction 1 Press Transaction The most recent transmission is displayed first 14 08 0015 TX OK CANON CANADA I K 2 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Y Press the up and down arrows to view the list of transactions _J All transmissions are displayed first then the receptions are displayed Chapter 8 Using the Memory Features 8 3 _1 The transaction numbers for documents sent numbered 0001 to 4999 are displayed then the transaction numbers for documents received numbered 5001 to 9999 are displayed The transaction numbers are stored in descending order from the larger numbers to the smaller numbers L Note the following notations used to tell you about the status of the transaction Notation Meaning OK Document transaction has been completed NG Transaction failed HOLDNG Document is being held in the memory for delayed sending TRANSM Document is currently being sent
163. al List 2 12 31 1999 09 53 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 1001 Coe ee eee o eS A See k k k kokk CODED SPEED DIAL LIST 2 kokk K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID TX START TIME TX SPEED TX TYPE ECM CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID TX START TIME TX SPEED TX TYPE ECM CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID TX START TIME TX SPEED TX TYPE SUBADDRESS ECM Group Dial List 12 31 1999 10 07 FAX 833 4423 982 8877 AK ASSOCIATES 1 10 00 2 12 00 33600bps 0 REGULAR TX ON 3 14 00 4 16 00 5 18 00 712 0965 T amp S DESIGNS 1 23 30 2 08 00 33600bps 0 REGULAR TX ON 342 8734 ARK TRAVEL 1 18 00 2 9600bps 0 CONFID TX 11111111 ON WORLD ESTATE INC FK K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K 7 GROUP DIAL LIST kkk FK K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K CANON NY 05 CANON GROUP 001 225 7823 010 233 7766 01 876 2398 02 613 9076 14 4 Printing Reports and Lists CANON CA CANON TX CANON OH 7 001 Chapter 14 Printing the User Data List Follow this procedure to print a comprehensive list of the current user data and other settings 1 Set Set After you have installed the optional Dual line Upgrade Kit II the settings selections you register for Line 2 will appear in the User Data List 716 32 Chapter 14 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panel
164. al gr A ert om ener EE E werner nent rn aut rt werner ee 2 17 TCO VOW cess aes ta cesans E a eee ceeete 2 17 e RCaT VIEW cdediness stecsecqiosastendarennecalidavanauctedayseusestaeadegaousdeaadcanteandanandtele 2 18 e landse Opo te gai stealer a E A E E ata 2 18 LI Removing the Shipping Material s sscsisc cisstactdendvaceseacsiadadasbetaciouehlences 2 19 e Removing the Shipping Tapes csssecessecseeeseceseesseteseeseeeseaesees 2 19 e Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Fax Unit 2 19 e Removing the Packing Materials from Paper Cassette 1 2 21 e Removing the Protective Plastic Sheet 0 0 0 eeeseseseseeeeeeeeeesees 2 22 Assembling ENCE AC rrian n nl orate eee dase marcia beet 2 23 o Installing the Toner Cartridge vi s ioc esc cceeccscoescatisnons sagescaccatennsecxosese 2 23 e Attaching the Document Output Tray and he Upper Output May eee ere meee mete etere eee Terrie ee ener eenenrrr nr ar 2 26 e Attaching the Document Feeder Tray cccsesseseseeseteeseeeneesenees 2 27 e Installing Paper Cassette 2 For the LASER CLASS 3175 Only sesessssssesesesresesessesesessesesessess 2 28 e Loading Paper in Paper Cassettes 1 and 2 ee eeeeseeeeeeees 2 31 e Connecting the Handset Option cseeseeeeseeeeeeteeeeseeneeseneeeees 2 38 e Connecting the Telephone Line 0 00 0 eecsseeecesseeseeeseeeeeseaensenseees 2 39 e Connecting an Extension Phone 0 cc ecseseeeseeeeeneeeeseneeeeseneeaenees
165. an extension cord with the LASER CLASS 3170 Series make sure that the total of the ampere ratings on the products plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the extension cord ampere rating Also make sure that the total ampere rating of all products plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the current amperage of the circuit breaker Do not push objects of any kind into the slots or openings on the cabinet as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts which could result in a risk of fire or electric shock To avoid spillage in or around the LASER CLASS 3170 Series do not eat or drink around the fax If you spill liquid or if any substance falls into the unit immediately unplug the LASER CLASS 3170 Series and call your Authorized Canon Dealer immediately Unplug the LASER CLASS 3170 Series from the wall outlet before cleaning Except as explained elsewhere in this manual do not attempt to service the LASER CLASS 3170 Series yourself Opening and removing interior covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points or other risks Refer all servicing to your local Authorized Canon Service Dealer Preface 14 Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions I m m When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed If liquid has been spilled into the unit If the LASER CLASS 3170 Series has been exposed to rain or water
166. anon SUPER nea HIGH SPEED FACSIMILE LASER CLASS 3170 Series FACSIMILE USER S GUIDE ENGLISH LASER CLASS 3170 Series FACSIMILE USER S GUIDE Trademarks Canon and LASER CLASS are registered trademarks and RAPID Fusing System is a trademark of Canon Inc Copyright Copyright 2001 by Canon Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of Canon Inc fk As an ENERGY STAR Partner Canon has determined brv ty that the Canon LASER CLASS 3170 and 3175 meet the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency SUPER Super G3 is a phrase used to describe the new yo generation of fax machines that use ITU T V 34 ia E e standard 33 6Kbps modems Super G3 High Speed Za Fax machines allow transmission time of HIGH SPEED FACSIMILE i approximately 3 seconds per page which results in reduced telephone line charges Approximately 3 seconds per page fax transmission time based on CCITT ITU T No 1 Chart JBIG Standard Mode at 33 6Kbps modem speed The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN currently supports 28 8Kbps modem speeds or lower depending on telephone line conditions ii Preface Users in the U S A Preface
167. ant is displayed You can enter these symbols x FI 4 1 2 amp lt gt Getting Started 3 9 x 3 sks ihn G ee 7e 5 p shs 3 Buttons for registering information cont d Space Enters a space between letters or numbers You may enter spaces in telephone numbers they do not affect dialing Pressing Space also deletes the character at the cursor position Delete Deletes the number from the right digit Clear Clears the entire entry if you want to erase it and start again Stop After you are finished making settings or registering information press Stop to return to the standby mode Checking and Setting the Telephone Line If you are not sure what type of telephone line you have check with your local telephone company To operate the fax you must know if the fax is connected to a tone or rotary pulse line The fax can be set to operate with either type of telephone line The fax unit is set to operate through a tone line without making adjustments Use this procedure to switch the fax setup between tone and pulse dialing A 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Hy Data Registration ve REGISTRATION Registration 1 DATA REGISTRATION C 2 Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS 3 Press Set again USER SETTINGS 1 DATE amp TIME 3 10 Getting Started Chapter 3 Set C jC 4 Press the search buttons until you see the display below
168. anually with the Optional Handset 7 7 e Receiving a Document Manually at the Fax eseeeeeseeeeeeeees 7 7 e Receiving a Document Manually with an Extension Telephone 7 8 e Changing the Remote Receive ID wei eeseseseeeneeeeseeeeseneeeacaees 7 9 J Canceling Receiving a DOCUMENE eee eseeeeeeesetseeeeeeseeeeeetaeeaeees 7 11 Transferring Documenti asse A E E iA ke e Before You Set Up Document Transfer eee ee eeeeseeseeeeeneeees 7 13 e Setting Up the Fax for Document Transfer eeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeees 7 14 e Turning the Transfer Mode ON and OFF ossessi 7 17 e Changing the Transfer Settings 00 0 eescssseseeeeeteeeeseeeeeeseeesenees 7 18 e Canceling the Transfer Settings 0 0 0 teesseeeseseeeteeeeseneeeseceeesenees 7 20 Chapter 7 Receiving Documents 7 1 Receiving Documents Automatically After you take your fax out of the box and set it up it is set to receive documents automatically Use automatic receiving for a fax on a dedi cated telephone line that you do not need for telephone voice communication Setting the Automatic Receive Mode Manual RX Check the indicator above the Manual RX button When this indicator is C off the fax is in the automatic receive mode When a fax document is sent to you your fax unit receives the document automatically During receiving a series of brief messages report the progress of the reception by displaying the transaction number name and telephone of the caller an
169. any day s you select Set the fax machine that transfers the document to print a copy of the transferred document Received and transferred documents are not printed A copy of every document received and transferred is printed OF RX COPIES Set the number of document copies to print 2 CHANGE DATA PASSWORD 3 DELETE FILE PASSWORD 16 26 Summary of Important Settings Change the transfer settings Enter the four digit password protecting the transfer settings You can now change any of the settings listed in the table above 1 SETUP FILE Delete the transfer settings file Enter the four digit password of the transfer file you want to delete Chapter 16 System Settings Data Registration Set COL Chapter 16 R Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Press the search buttons to display 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS DATA REGISTRATION 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS Press Set SYSTEM SETTINGS 1 PASSWORD Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change Summary of Important Settings 16 27 Go e DA ba G E E N sbs Pe ihe fe Q z iz Ca 5 t sbs pm 3 7 Default settings are in bold PASSWORD Enter the system password protecting the System Settings You will not have to do this if the System Settings are not yet
170. are a document for sending and how to perform the initial settings before dialing Preparing the Document Follow these simple guidelines to check your document before you set the document on the fax for scanning Ly m For best results load only documents of recommended standard size and weight Refer to Appendix B gt B 1 The document guides on the document feeder tray can be adjusted to the width of non standard size paper For best results all sheets in the stack should be of the same width Although the document guides on the document feeder tray indicate 11 x 17 in size and such a document can be set on the document feeder tray the effective scanning width is up to B4 size 10 in To avoid document jams never feed thick documents or documents backed with carbon paper For documents that are larger or smaller than these recommended limits reduce them or enlarge them on a copy machine and then send the copy Refer to Appendix B gt B 2 To avoid document jams and possible damage to the fax avoid wrinkled or creased paper carbon paper curled paper coated paper and onion skin or other very thin paper The fax does not scan completely to the edges of the paper and anything beyond this recommended margin will not be scanned for sending For details refer to Appendix B B 2 To avoid paper jams or damaging the fax inspect the document carefully and make sure it is free of pins staples paper clips and o
171. attery service life use the fax within a temperature range of 50 F to 90 5 F 10 C to 32 5 C If the fax is used in an environment that is too hot or too cold this can shorten the service life of the backup battery L If the backup battery cannot preserve data even after you plug in the power source and the fax is left on for 1 day 24 hours call for service and have the backup battery replaced 8 28 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 9 Using a Relay Network This chapter shows you how to relay documents and how to have documents relayed for you You can set up your fax unit as a relay station to relay documents that you receive or you can send documents to another fax and have the documents relayed for you What is Relay Broadcasting usenet ien nin a enue E 9 2 _I Setting Up and Using a Standard Relay Unit 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeees 9 3 Settine Your Faxas a Relay Unit oresoon 9 4 e Changing the Relay Broadcast Settings 0 0 0 ceeeesseeeteeeeteeeeeeeees 9 7 Deleting the Relay Group misceri iena latent E 9 9 I Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for Relay Broadcasting 9 10 e Sending a Document to a Relay Unit with Speed Dialing 9 12 e Sending with the Relay Broadcast Button ceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 12 Using a Relay Network 9 1 Network gt amp Q es D D What is Relay Broadcasting In a relay broadcast the originator fax unit sends a document
172. ax units and stored into the memory box are sent NOT TRANSMIT When the memory box is polled documents received from other fax units and stored into the memory box are not sent Determines whether to transmit the documents scanned into the memory box when the memory box is polled TRANSMIT When the memory box is polled documents scanned into the memory box are sent NOT TRANSMIT When the memory box is polled documents scanned into the memory box are not sent Using the Memory Features 8 21 O r aed D m Memory Features Changing the Memory Box Settings Follow this procedure to change the memory box settings 1 Open the MEMORY BOX menu 8 14 MEMORY BOX 1 SETUP FILE 5 C 2 Press the search buttons to display until you see the display below MEMORY BOX 2 CHANGE DATA Set C 3 Press Set CHANGE DATA SET BOX 00 D 4 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number of the 5 D box you want to change and press Set 7 8 9 CHANGE DATA Oa PASSWORD If you have not set the operation password you can skip the next step O 2 5 Enter the four digit password protecting the memory box settings GS 5 o and press Set DOO 9O06 A vy C JC 6 Press the search buttons to display the setting you want to change CHANGE DATA 1 FILE NAME CHANGE DATA 8 POLLING TX 8 22 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 Set 7 With the setting you want to change on the display pres
173. ax will not receive the document Determines whether or not the document is received in the memory box and how it is received NO Documents are not received in the memory box YES Documents are received in the memory box and you can do some additional settings to determine how they are received If selected you can turn on checking the originator printing the document and printing method Determines whether your fax checks to make sure the originator of the transmission is registered on your fax To be registered on your fax the originator s telephone number must be registered for a One touch or Coded Speed Dialing button on your fax unit OFF Your fax receives an incoming document even if the originator is not registered on your fax ON Your fax will receive the document only if the originator is registered for a One Touch or Coded Speed Dialing button on your fax unit TEL After you turn SELECT ORIG UNIT on press the appropriate One touch Speed Dialing button or press the Coded Dial button followed by the appropriate three digit code to register the number of the originator and press Set In order to register the originator s telephone number the number must be registered for a One touch or Coded Speed Dialing button Using the Memory Features 8 17 Q K j 5 H Memory Features Memory Box Setup Summary Cont d 2 PRINT RX DOC 1 PRINT METHOD 2 4 OF RX COPIES 7 TRANSMIT 1
174. ay is _ closed the paper is first delivered to the lower output tray When the Note paper full sensor detects the tray is full the paper delivery switches automatically to the upper output tray The lower output tray can hold approximately 200 sheets and the upper output tray approximately 100 sheets 2 50 Setting Up Chapter 2 1 Open the FAX S PRINTER SET menu M Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press ES Data Registration Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION C Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS A y CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 5 FAX S PRINTER SET Set C93 Press Set FAX S PRINTER SET 1 USE MP TRAY 2 Open the SELECT OUTPT TRAY menu CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display below FAX S PRINTER SET 7 SELECT OUTPT TRAY Set Press Set SELECT OUTPT TRAY OFF CJC Press the search buttons to select ON SELECT OUTPT TRAY ON Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 51 Set Press Set SELECT OUTPT TRAY 1 FAX Set C3 Press Set FAX LOWER OUTPUT TRAY A y C J J 3 Press the search buttons to select either the lower or upper output tray when receiving documents by fax FAX UPPER OUTPUT TRAY Set C3 4 Press Set SELECT OUTPT TRAY 2 COPY Select a tray for each function in the same way Example 1 For the LASER CLASS 3170 3175 FAX UPPER OUTPUT TRAY COPY UPPER OUTPUT TRA
175. casting Password subaddress sending Polling transmission Delayed transmission Receiving Memory lock reception Polling reception Timer polling Confidential mailbox Relay broadcasting Transfer Received image reduction Collating Copier Features Scanning resolution 16 dots mm x 15 4 lines mm Memory Copy Interpolated Printing resolution 600 x 600 dpi Copy speed Multi copy speed Approx 17 cpm letter Multiple copy Up to 99 pages A 4 Specifications Appendix A Telephone Features Optional telephone handset Extension phone hookup Remote reception by extension phone Tone button Pause button Power Power source 120 V 60 Hz Battery backup 12 hours Power consumption LASER CLASS 3170 3175 Standby approx 20 W at 77 F 25 C Operation approx 285 W maximum approx 600 W Energy saver standby approx 15 W LASER CLASS 3170MS Standby approx 26 W at 77 F 25 C Operation approx 400 W maximum approx 600 W Operating Environment Temperature 50 F to 90 5 F 10 C to 32 5 C Humidity 20 80 RH Weight LASER CLASS 3170 Approx 57 lb 26 kg a LASER CLASS 3175 Approx 73 Ib 33 kg T O LASER CLASS 3170MS Approx 58 6 lb 26 6 kg F Q N Appendix A Specifications A 5 Dimensions LASER CLASS 3170 3170MS 19 8 in w x 20 in d x 18 5 in h 501 mm w x 508 mm d x 467 mm h without handset 22 5in w x 20 in d x 18 5 in h 571 mm w x 508 mm d x 467 mm h with handset LASER
176. cause a Call the other party and confirm whether or been cleared may start again start a new operation or leave the fax in standby 0995 Documents in the memory to be sent have The current transmission has been cleared You CODE SOLUTION 0322 0330 Contact your local authorized Canon dealer where you purchased your Canon product Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 37 List of LCD Display Messages Alphabetic List Here is a list of messages that are displayed on the screen when a problem occurs in the fax or the printer MESSAGE WHAT IT MEANS ALREADY IN USE The box number you entered is already in use For example you cannot use the same box number for a confidential mailbox and a polling box Try again with another box number AUTO REDIAL The other party s line was busy on the previous dialing attempt and your fax unit is dialing the number again To cancel redialing press Stop when direct dialing or press Delete File select transaction number then press Set when memory sending BUSY NO SIGNAL The other party did not answer even after redialing Wait for a few minutes and try again When you send documents long distance press Pause after dialing If you still cannot send the document the other party may have turned off their fax unit CHECK DOCUMENT A document page may be jammed or may not be fed correctly in the automatic document feeder ADF Remove the document and try again
177. cedure Confidential receiving To receive a confidential document you must first create a mailbox and register your confidential mailbox password You use the password to print out confidential documents that you receive in the memory Confi dential mailbox passwords are four digit decimal numbers between 0000 to 9999 When you receive a confidential document in your mailbox the fax prints a Confidential RX Report Confidential sending To use confidential sending there are two ways One is to first register the procedure with One touch Speed Dialing or Coded Speed Dialing After you register the procedure all you have to do is feed the document into the fax and press the buttons for the speed dialing The other is to press Confidential Mailbox button and dial Glossary Glossary D Default The fax is programmed in the factory with settings that we recommend These are known as factory default settings You can customize your fax by programming settings other than the factory default settings For details see Chapter 16 of this Facsimile User s Guide Delayed transmission With delayed transmission also called timer sending you can set a time for the document to be sent You do not have to be in the office when the document is sent at the specified time With delayed transmission you can send the same document to more than one destination at a preset time If you frequently send the same document to several destinations you
178. cssrisis e ieonsd nes ohecuap canta eicdaass 4 33 ed STA Directory VAIS soise ai e i 4 35 Chapter 4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 1 Read This before Entering Telephone Numbers Read this section before you register numbers for speed dialing espe cially if your site has special dialing requirements like dialing through a PBX Entering Pauses for Dialing If your fax is connected to a switchboard or PBX private branch ex change you may have to dial a number to connect to an outside line The outside number must also be registered with the fax number The switch ing system may also require that you insert a pause after the outside number For further assistance contact your local authorized Canon dealer sales or service representative or your local telephone company Follow this procedure to enter a pause during regular dialing or when registering a number for a speed dialing button se 8 1 When you come to a step that asks you to enter a number for O 2 3 dialing use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the 4 5 6 number Q 8 9 TELEPHONE NUMBER OIO O TEL 37030 Pause P 2 To enter a pause between two numbers press Pause After you Medd enter the next number the P changes to a small p TELEPHONE NUMBER TEL 03rs Pause za 3 To enter a pause at the end of a number press Pause then press Set The pause at the end of a number appears as an upper case p f TELEPHONE NUMBE
179. cument is sent before you attempt to delete the relay group Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for Relay Broadcasting Follow this procedure to send a document to a relay unit F In this procedure your fax is the originator Before you send a document to another fax for relay broadcasting confirm the following points on your fax L Make sure your own fax unit telephone number is correctly regis tered 3 13 14 5 _J Enter a subaddress 9 10 Using a Relay Network Chapter 9 Before you send a document to another fax for relay broadcasting contact the other party and confirm the following points about their fax L The relay unit must support ITU T subaddress password transac tions J If you want a relay transmission report sent back to your fax from the relay unit instruct the relay unit to turn this feature on when they set up the relay function on their fax L Make sure the relay unit has registered the telephone numbers of all destinations for the speed dialing buttons of the relay unit J Make sure you have the correct subaddress for the other party s fax L Confirm that the subaddress you have been given has been used to set up the other party s fax as a relay station Your fax cannot confirm whether or not the other party s fax has been set up properly as a relay unit Network L If an ITU T password is set on the other party s fax you must send the document with a password Otherwise the oth
180. d CANCEL DURING TX RX YES NO or 2 Press to cancel the transmission or press if you change your mind and do not want to cancel After you press to cancel the transmission an alarm sounds and a report prints unless this feature has been turned off 716 8 PRINTING REPORT 12 31 1999 11 48 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 1001 ok 2K ok ok K ok ok ok K ok ok ok ok K K ok ok ok K ok K OK ok K ok K Ok Kk k ERROR TX REPORT Kk ok ok 2K K ok K ok ok ok K ok ok ok ok K ok ok ok ok K ok K Ok ok K ok K Ok TX FUNCTION WAS NOT COMPLETED TX RX NO 0006 CONNECTION TEL 761 1298 CONNECTION ID JOHN BARRISTER ST TIME 12 31 11 48 USAGE T 00 00 PGS SENT 0 RESULT NG 6 8 Sending Documents Chapter 6 To Cancel Sending on a Dual Line If you have installed the Dual line Upgrade Kit and both lines are in use at the same time and you want to select a transmission which you want to cancel follow this procedure A v jC 1 Press the search buttons to view the displays for each transaction 12 31 1999 FRI 23 01 TX RX NO 5432 12 31 1999 FRI 23 01 TX RX NO 1234 If you are using direct sending you cannot change the line 2 Press Stop If you are using memory sending a message is displayed CANCEL DURING TX RX YES NO or 3 Press to cancel the transmission or press if you change your mind and do not want to cancel After you press to cancel the transmission an alarm sou
181. d Set your fax to check the incoming relay command to make sure the originator is registered Receives and obeys incoming relay commands for registered originators only Use the One touch or Coded Speed Dialing buttons to register originators Receives and obeys all incoming relay commands Turns printing on off for documents received for relay Prints a copy of every document relayed OF RX COPIES Set the number of document copies to print OFF 7 SELECT LOCATIONS TEL Chapter 16 No copy is printed Use the One touch or Coded Speed Dialing buttons to select the fax numbers to receive the document relayed from your fax machine Summary of Important Settings 16 21 Go fe i G E E N e G Pe ihn fe Q z iz Ca 5 t sbs sks 3 7 8 TX REPORT Send a TX report from your fax machine the relay unit to the originator of the transmission TRANSMIT Transmits a document relay report to the originator NOT TRANSMIT No report is transmitted 9 TX START TIME Set the fax machine to hold the document from the originator and then relay it at a specified time Use 24 hour setting Up to 5 time settings are possible 10 RELAY B CAST OFF Turn relay broadcasting off temporarily without canceling or changing all of the relay box settings ON In order for relay broadcasting to occur this setting must be on 2 CHANGE DATA Change or add the settings on the relay box SET RLY GROUP TX Ent
182. d for the polling box they must also know this password This password setting is optional L Your TX PASSWORD must match the ITU T password attached when the other party calls you Confirm that the TX PASSWORD on your fax matches the ITU T password attached when the other party calls you L If the other party s fax does not support ITU T subaddress pass word transactions you may be able to use the polling box 00 Setting Up a Polling Box Registration Chapter 11 Before you can use polling sending you must create a polling box with the File settings The polling box holds the document in the memory until the other party polls your fax to send the document 1 Open the FILE SETTINGS menu Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration Press Set REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Setting Up and Using Polling 11 15 pe 5 E Q gt 28 5 2 ir 3 A Set Set Set OPER__ SYMBOLS Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 6 FILE SETTINGS Press Set FILE SETTINGS 1 CONFID MAILBOX Open the POLLING BOX menu Press the search buttons until you see the display below FILE SETTINGS 5 POLLING BOX Press Set POLLING BOX 1 SETUP FILE Create a polling box and give it a number Press Set SETUP FILE SET BOX OO Use the buttons on the numeric keypad t
183. d the transmission mode eIf you install the handset and you don t want the fax to ring when the Soe other party sends to you turn the ringer volume switch to OFF Note eIf you have installed the optional Dual line Upgrade Kit when the fax unit receives a document on Line 2 it will switch to automatic receiving regardless of whether the Manual RX lamp is on or off 42 56 N Messages Displayed When Receiving a Document This is a summary of the messages you will see displayed while your fax is receiving a document While you are receiving a document informa tion about the document and other party is displayed Receiving a transmission 12 91 1999 FRI23331 RECEIVE 7 2 Receiving Documents Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Transaction number Every document is assigned a transaction number as soon as it is re ceived 12 31 1999 FRI 12 20 TX RX NO 5001 TRANSACTION NUMBER Documents received are assigned transaction numbers in ascending order starting with the number 5001 up to 9999 After 9999 is reached numbering starts from 5001 again Other party s fax number The other party s facsimile number is displayed only if it is registered on the other party s fax 12 31 1999 FRI 11 34 123 4567 Other party s name According to the type of machine the other party is using to send the document you may also see the other party s name displayed alternately with the telephone number 12 31 1999 FRI 11 34 CANON INC K SATO ECM
184. ded margin will not be scanned for copying See Appendix B and check your document gt B 2 To avoid paper jams or damaging the fax inspect the document carefully and make sure it is free of pins staples paper clips and other metal fasteners Make sure all the documents are dry They should not have wet ink glue or paste on their surfaces Before you feed a stack of documents into the fax make sure all the pages are the same size and thickness Do not attempt to feed documents of mixed sizes and thickness in the same stack 5 2 Using the Fax as a Copier Chapter 5 Setting a Document on the Fax You can set a stack of up to 50 letter or A4 size pages or 20 legal or 11 x 17 in or B4 size pages into the fax for copying However the effective scanning width is up to B4 size 10 in 1 Place the document face up on the document feeder tray of the fax unit 2 Ifthe document is too long for the document feeder tray e g legal size 11 x 17 in size pull out the document extension tray in 2 a N ral Li 0 a 5 t N Chapter 5 Using the Fax as a Copier 5 3 4 Make sure the document is below the load limit marks for A4 LTR and B4 LGL sizes 5 Insert the document fully into the fax until the leading edge of the document stops in the ADF The fax will display some messages MEMORY IN USE 36 DOCUMENT READY If the fax already displays DOCUMENT READY before you set
185. der tray Questions 3 Oo wt O A oqa co gt 5E 23 cs a Li Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 21 Storing Toner Cartridges Follow these simple guidelines when you handle and store toner car tridges Handling Cartridges L Do not remove the toner cartridge from its protective bag until you are ready to install it L Save the protective bag You may need it later to re pack the car tridge temporarily to protect it from exposure to light L Never expose a toner cartridge to direct sunlight and do not leave it exposed to normal room light about 1 000 lux for longer than 5 minutes J There are strong magnets inside a toner cartridge To avoid possible destruction of valuable data on disks or other media keep the toner cartridge away from computer screens hard disks floppy disks or any other kind of material sensitive to magnetic fields L Never touch or try to open the protective shutter that protects the light sensitive drum inside the toner cartridge If the drum is ex posed to light this can cause printing quality deterioration L Handle the toner cartridge with care Do not subject it to shock or vibrations L Always set toner cartridges down with the arrow on the cartridge facing up 15 22 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 Storing Cartridges l Store a toner cartridge in the original box and protective bag until you are ready to install it
186. dset connector cord to the extension phone jack marked with the handset icon G 5 Place the handset on the handset cradle Connecting the Telephone Line 1 Make sure you have an RJ11 C wall jack If you need assistance contact your dealer or telephone company 2 Connect one end of the supplied telephone line to the fax jack marked L Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 39 3 Connect the other end of the telephone line to your wall telephone jack If you have installed the optional Dual line Upgrade Kit you can connect another telephone line to the fax unit 2 54 Connecting an Extension Phone To connect an extension phone to the fax you have to use the extension phone jack Ai Only one jack is provided to be used with the optional handset or an J extension phone A separate jack is not provided for an extension phone Note OO Connect the extension phone cord to the extension phone jack marked with the handset icon 2 40 Setting Up Chapter 2 Turning on the Power 1 Connect the power cord to the power socket on the rear of the fax unit 2 Connect the other end of the power cord to the power source THE FAX MUST BE CONNECTED TO A PROPERLY GROUNDED THREE PRONG 120 V AC OUTLET Caution After you connect the power cord to the power source the fax LCD display will light There is no power switch on the fax unit It will take a few seconds for the unit to warm up P
187. e able to speed up transmission time by turning ECM off C93 Press Set CODED SPD DIAL xOTSS This completes all settings for telephone registration of Coded Speed Dialing codes ge i e o Q Fr tez HE4 J A 7 o gt If you want to set up other codes repeat from step 2 if not Stop Press Stop to return to standby O Chapter 4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 23 Setting Up Group Dialing Data Registration Ld Set cc Set Group Dialing allows you to register several telephone numbers for One touch Speed Dialing or for Coded Speed Dialing so you can dial a large group of numbers by pressing a One touch Speed Dialing button or by pressing Coded Dial followed by a three digit code Telephone numbers already registered for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing can be registered as members of the group Follow this procedure to register a group of telephone numbers for Group Dialing 1 Open the Group Dialing menu Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press the search buttons until you see the display below REGISTRATION 2 TEL REGISTRATION Press Set TEL REGISTRATION 1 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL Press the search buttons until you see the display below TEL REGISTRATION 3 GROUP DIAL Press Set GROUP DIAL O01 4 24 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 Chapter 4 Register the grou
188. e all documents in the memory is called memory lock You may want to turn the memory lock on when the fax is left unattended at night or over long holidays to prevent a large volume of printed documents from collecting on the paper output tray After you return to the office you can review the contents of the memory and then enter the memory lock password to print all the documents stored in the memory Setting a Time and Password for Memory Lock Data Registration Set CL Chapter 13 After the memory lock is turned on the fax will automatically enter and leave the memory lock mode at times you specify The documents received when the fax is in the memory lock mode are stored in the memory until you unlock the memory with a password and print them Follow the procedure below to define a memory lock password and set the times for the fax to enter and leave the memory lock mode 1 Open the MEMORY LOCK menu Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS Restricting Use of the Fax 13 17 Q a ae Ou ww O o 0 Q ce Set ons S lems TEES 13 18 Restricting Use of the Fax Press Set Be sure to enter your system settings password if you have one SYSTEM SETTINGS 1 PASSWORD Press
189. e button setups for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing 4 6 4 15 ON All receptions are conducted with ECM if the other party s fax supports ECM OFF ECM is turned off 2 MAN AUTO SWITCH Set the fax machine to switch to document receive mode after ringing for a specified length of time in the manual receive mode OFF The fax will keep ringing until someone answers the call manually with the optional handset or a connected extension telephone ON F T RING TIME Set the length of time to elapse before the fax machine switches to document receiving Default is 15SEC Setting range 01 to 99SEC 3 REMOTE RX Receive from a remote telephone with preset setting 7 9 ON Remote receiving is turned on REMOTE RXID You can dial a number code on the remote extension to start receiving a document Default is 25 Setting range 00 to 99 OFF Remote receiving is turned off 16 14 Summary of Important Settings Chapter 16 4 MEMORY RX ON OFF 5 RX PAGE FOOTER OFF ON Chapter 16 Select how incoming documents are to be received in the memory if the fax runs out of toner or paper or the output trays are full of printed pages 8 2 Remainder of the fax is stored in the memory and can be printed out as soon as you re fill the paper cassette change the toner cartridge clear the paper jam or pick up the printed pages from the output trays MEMORY RX ALARM The memory alarm alerts you when a document has been received in the
190. e format in which the date and time will be displayed selecting the display language and the sending and receiving start speeds 16 27 Chapter 16 Summary of Important Settings 16 3 8 DUAL LINE OPTIONS Use these settings to set up the operating environment of the additional telephone line This menu only appears after installing the optional Dual line Upgrade Kit for LASER CLASS 3170 Series These settings include registering the second telephone line number and line type the telephone line priority on Line 1 and Line 2 16 32 User Settings M K 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press E gt Data Registration a REG ISTRATION C 1 DATA REGISTRATION 2 Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Set 3 Press Set USER SETTINGS 1 DATE amp TIME C JC 4 Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change Default settings are in bold 1 DATE amp TIME Register the current date and time using the 24 hour system 43 13 This setting is required in the United States Note that the year setting is made in two digit numbers though in the standby mode the year is displayed in four digit numbers Also note that it is necessary to enter 00 01 02 etc to set the year to 2000 or later 16 4 Summary of Important Settings Chapter 16 2 UNIT TELEPHONE Register your fax number 3 14 This setting is required in the United States 3 UNIT NAME Register
191. e pause time to suit your PBX or telephone system Before adjusting the pause time check with your local authorized Canon dealer or your local telephone company about the correct pause time to use for your telephone system T Timed sending See delayed transmission Tone pulse setting This setting allows you to set the fax to touch tone T or pulse P dialing depending on the type of phone line you have installed Tone You can switch temporarily from pulse to tone dialing by pressing Tone before dialing Data services may require that you use tone dialing so if you have a conventional pulse dial telephone and need to use tone dial to access the data service press Tone to tone dial on your pulse telephone line Toner cartridge Your fax machine uses a patented FX6 cartridge which contains both the photosensitive drum and toner in one compact unit For details about disposing of used toner cartridges contact your local dealer or autho rized Canon representative Glossary Glossary Touch tone A touch tone or tone dial telephone is dialed by pressing buttons that sends tones of varying pitch to the telephone switching system Transaction number When a document is scanned into or received in the memory it is assigned a transaction number TX RX You can select documents in the memory for sending printing or deleting by specifying the transaction number Transfer A special feature you can set up on the fax to have all
192. e transfer guide inside the fax Note unit before removing the paper 715 9 e When removing the jammed paper be careful not to touch the transfer charging roller If the roller becomes dirty the print quality will deteriorate e After removing the jammed paper make sure you insert the cassette all the way into the fax unit until it locks into place 15 14 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 Storing Recording Paper Use only the recommended paper or paper of similar quality and store it carefully When installing the recording paper refer to page 2 31 Recommended Paper We recommend using Canon paper with this fax machine Quality Use plain bond typewriter quality without curls folds or rough edges Weight 17 24 Ib 64 90 g m Storage 64 F to 75 F 18 C to 24 C 40 60 relative humidity l Before buying large quantities of other paper test it with the fax to make sure it is reliable L Use only plain white paper Do not use perforated or colored paper L Paper that is either too smooth or rough may reduce print quality or cause printer jams Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 15 J Oo ot O A oqa o gt 5 TS cs o L Questions Storing the Paper Supply Improper paper storage can affect the quality of the printing Follow these guidelines when you store paper L Store unused paper in its wrapping to protect the paper against humidity L Do
193. eck their fax You can try to send the document manually For an overseas call add pauses to the registered number The other party is not using a G3 fax Check with the other party and have them send or receive the document using a G3 machine 0008 You cannot do polling sending Make sure the subaddress passwords match the settings on the other party s fax unit If the other party s fax is Canon fax and can set a polling ID request that they set the polling ID to 255 decimal or 1111 1111 binary 0009 The paper cassette on your fax is out of paper Re fill the paper cassette and make sure the stack is below the tabs 2 31 If the paper cassette still has paper in it then the Check all paper cassettes and make sure they paper cassette may not be installed correctly are installed correctly Recording paper jammed Remove the jammed paper 15 4 0011 If you are polling a fax to receive a document Contact the other party and request that the the other party has not set the document document be set correctly for polling on the correctly on the fax other fax 0012 The other fax has run out of paper and its Contact the other party and tell them to re fill memory is full their paper cassette 0018 The other fax does not answer even after Wait a few minutes and try again If you still several redialing attempts or the other fax cannot send the document contact the other was busy and unable to respond within 3
194. ed dialing 13 26 with speed dialing 13 27 polling before polling receiving 11 2 before polling to send 11 15 canceling polling box setup 11 23 canceling preset polling 11 13 changing polling box setup 11 21 changing preset settings 11 12 creating polling box 11 15 described 11 2 preset 11 5 scanning document for sending 11 20 sending 11 15 timer 11 5 to receive 11 3 to receive at set time 11 5 POLLING BOX setting 16 25 power backup battery 8 27 connection 2 7 2 41 failure and memory 8 27 required 2 7 turning on power 2 41 PRESET POLLING setting 16 25 printer options 1 6 Printer Board I option 1 6 printer cover closing 2 25 printing Activity Reports 14 9 document in memory 8 6 document in memory box 8 25 documents locked in memory 13 20 I 5 memory list 8 5 paper supply source for reports 16 9 removing jams 15 4 reports with restrictions on 13 13 sender names 14 6 TONER SUPPLY LOW 16 18 User Data List 14 5 Program button setting up 12 5 pulse dial setting 3 10 R receive report See RX REPORT 14 15 16 8 RECEIVED IN MEMORY message 8 2 Received Memory Box List sample 14 19 receiving all documents in memory 13 17 auto switch time 7 5 automatically 7 2 canceling 7 11 confidential documents 10 8 manually 7 7 memory receiving 16 15 MEMORY RX 16 15 messages 7 2 password 16 30 polling 11 3 remote 7 8 REMOTE RECEIVING 16 14 RX REDUCTION 16 17
195. ed making changes press Stop to return to L standby Canceling Preset Polling Follow this procedure to cancel preset polling 1 Open the PRESET POLLING menu gt 11 6 PRESET POLLING 1 SETUP FILE 5 D 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below ED PRESET POLLING F 3 DELETE FILE 50 G Do Set 5 C3 3 Press Set 5 DELETE FILE SET BOX 00 Chapter 11 Setting Up and Using Polling 11 13 D 5 4 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the preset two XG digit code of the polling box Then press Set G 9 DELETE FICE OES PASSWORD If you have not set the operation password you can skip the next step 5 5 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four digit Ps password protecting the preset polling setup file Then press Set gt gt 2 After you enter the password the file is deleted OLOLLO DELETE FILE FILE DELETED DELETE FICE SET BOX OO Stop 6 Press Stop to return to standby O 11 14 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 11 Setting Up Polling Sending This section shows you how to set up your fax to store and hold a document until it is polled by another fax to send it Before You Can Be Polled to Send Before you set up your polling box contact the parties who are going to poll your fax to receive documents and confirm the following points L The other parties must know your ITU T subaddress number L If you are also using an ITU T passwor
196. eed Dialing 4 21 we i e o Q Fr tez 2 a A 7 o gt 8 If you experience transmission errors during long distance sending change the long distance setting OPTIONAL SETTING 3 LONG DISTANCE Set C3 Press Set LONG DISTANCE DOMESTIC CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display you want LONG DISTANCE LONG DISTANCE 1 Select LONG DISTANCE 1 and try to send the document again If this setting does not solve the problem try settings 2 and 3 Set C3 Press Set OPTIONAL SETTING 4 TX SPEED 9 Change the transmission speed if it takes a long time for your document transmissions to begin Set Press Set TX SPEED 33600bps P If your document transmissions are slow in starting this may mean that amp the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition Select a lower Note speed You can select 33600 14400 9600 or 4800 bps 4 22 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 CJC Press the search buttons to display the speed you want to select PP Then press Set OPTIONAL SETTING 5 ECM 10 Turn ECM off or on Set Press Set ECM ON A y CJC Press the search buttons to display OFF or ON ECM error correction mode reduces the effect of system and line errors on documents that occur during sending or receiving with another fax Note that supports ECM Otherwise this setting is ignored If transmission speed appears to be extremely slow you may b
197. eive If the passwords do not match your fax will not receive the document TX _ ITU T omre SDS ZPA FAA ESS LASER CLASS 3170 Series RX ITU T PASSWORD The main settings apply to all three features below they being RECEIVE TRANSMIT and POLLING TX Using the Memory Features 8 13 Q K j 5 H Memory Features Feature Settings 6 RECEIVE Allows you to set up how documents are handled in the memory box when they are received You can set the memory box to check the ID telephone number of the originator and specify that the received document be held in the memory box and not printed 7 TRANSMIT Allows you to set up memory box transmission You can set the memory box to relay documents immediately or store them in the memory box You can set the timer for all documents set for sending from the memory box 8 POLLING TX Allows you to set up the memory box as a polling station to hold scanned or received documents in the memory box and wait for a polling request from another fax After the subaddress and passwords are matched the stored documents are sent to the polling fax Creating a Memory Box Registration Set Set Follow this procedure to create a memory box 1 Open the MEMORY BOX menu Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Press the
198. end of the tape where the tab was originally attached e Wash off any toner from your hands or clothing immediately with cold water 2 24 Setting Up Chapter 2 6 To avoid pinching your fingers between the toner cartridge and fax unit grip the cartridge as shown below KEEP THE DRUM SLOT FREE OF DUST AND OTHER FOREIGN OBJECTS DO NOT TOUCH THE PROTECTIVE SHUTTER ON THE BOTTOM OF CARTRIDGE __1 7 Load the cartridge in the direction indicated by the arrow Gently slide the cartridge into the printer area until it is down inside the fax unit and level L The fax unit will not operate if the printer cover is not closed completely CHECK PRINTER COVER If you see the message above and the Error lamp blinks red when the fax unit is plugged in 2 41 open the cover again and make sure the toner cartridge is level Then shut the printer cover again Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 25 Attaching the Document Output Tray and the Upper Out put Tray 1 Attach the upper output tray to the front of the fax unit Slide the end of the upper output tray down into the fax unit at an incline lifting the end nearest you UPPER OUTPUT TRAY e Do not use the fax without first attaching the upper output tray S correctly A paper jam may occur Note e When removing the upper output tray lift the end nearest you slightly and pull the tray forward 2 Attach the document output tray to the front o
199. ents are sent together in the same transmission one after the other bps Stands for bits per second G 1 Broadcasting Transmitting a document to more than one location C CCITT ITU T Formally known as CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone CCITT has been replaced by the International Telecommunications Unit Telecommunications Sector ITU T a commit tee created to set international standards for telecommunications Coded Speed Dialing Allows you to automatically dial a facsimile number by pressing only four buttons Coded Dial and a three digit code You can register up to 128 facsimile numbers for Coded Speed Dialing When you register the facsimile number you can also enter the receiving party s name set the speed for the transmission and other useful features Confidential mailbox Two digit numbers between 00 and 99 If the number is a single digit precede it with a zero The fax can have up to 50 confidential mailboxes for individual users Confidential mailbox password Confidential mailbox passwords are four digit decimal numbers between 0000 to 9999 To print a confidential document received in the memory you must enter your confidential mailbox password Remember your password You will need it to print confidential documents received in the memory Later if you want to change your password you must first enter the current password before you are allowed to complete the pro
200. enu is a list of options or features from which you select an item to set up or change A menu has a number and title which appear in the two line dis play The search buttons av change the LCD display Press to display the next item or choice in a menu or press to display the previous item or choice When you send or receive a document your fax au tomatically assigns the document a unique transac tion number A transaction number is a four digit decimal number that will help you keep track of documents you send and receive On the LCD display TX RX NO is the abbreviation used for transaction number Denotes receiving Denotes transmitting or sending Ai A note describes helpful hints restrictions or how to avoid difficulties Setting Up 2 3 CAUTIONS SHOW YOU HOW TO AVOID CONDITIONS OR INCORRECT OPERATIONS THAT COULD CAUSE DAMAGE TO Caution YOUR HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE OR CAUSE PERSONAL IN JURY 2 4 Setting Up This icon denotes feeding a document LJ Avoid direct sunlight If you have to place the fax near a window install heavy curtains or blinds to protect the fax from direct sunlight Choose a flat stable surface free of vibration Avoid a location subject to extreme temperature fluctua tion Use in a location within a temperature range of 50 F to 90 5 F 10 C to 32 5 C Do not set up the fax near a television radio or heavy equipment like copy machines air conditioners
201. er fax out of paper Call the other party and make sure their fax is supplied with paper Are the rollers dirty Clean the rollers 315 29 _1 Does memory fill up immediately when you try to send Are the document mode settings on The Fine Super Fine Ultra Fine or Text Photo settings can use large amounts of memory when scanning certain types of documents Use direct sending 6 15 1 Are documents streaked with lines after they print on the other fax Is the scanning glass on your fax clean Copy a document on your fax and see if the copy is streaked or dirty If the print is streaked clean the scanning glass 715 32 1 Are your documents printing at a reduced size on the other fax Are the document feed guides set properly when you scan docu ments for sending Make sure the document feed guides are snug against the side of the document you scan for sending 6 3 15 42 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 1 Are the documents you send too light Is the Lighter indicator on your operation panel on Press the Contrast button until Standard or Darker is selected 6 5 Is your document too light Press the Contrast button until Darker is selected then try send ing again 6 5 Is the scanning glass on your fax clean Copy a document on your fax and see if the copy is streaked or dirty If the copy is streaked or dirty clean the scanning glass 15 32 1 Cannot perform relay sending Does the
202. er fax will not receive your document gt amp Q es D D After the relay fax is set up to participate in a relay network it should receive and relay documents automatically By following the initial setup procedures in the previous section the relay fax unit can be set to confirm the identity of the originator before sending and to send a relay transmission report to the originator after your fax unit requests the other unit to relay a document When your fax unit is the originator of a relay transmission with this method it does not check to ensure that the fax to receive and relay the transmission is set up properly for relay transmission Even when the fax is not set up to relay your documents your fax unit reports such a transmission as a successful relay transmission Make sure the relay unit is set up correctly to relay documents that it receives from your fax unit Chapter 9 Using a Relay Network 9 11 Sending a Document to a Relay Unit with Speed Dialing You can register a telephone number for relay sending under a One touch or Coded Speed Dialing button Check these points before you send a document to another party for relay L Contact the other party and ask for the ITU T subaddress and password they are using for receiving documents to relay L The other party s fax unit does not have to be a Canon fax unit but make sure the other party s fax unit supports the use of ITU T subaddresses a
203. er the number of the relay box you want to change PASSWORD Enter the password protecting the relay box settings You can now change any of the settings listed in the table above 1 SETUP FILE 3 DELETE FILE Delete a relay box and all settings SET RLY TX GROUP Enter the number of the relay box you want to delete PASSWORD Enter the password of the relay box you want to delete 3 MEMORY BOX Set up a general memory box to handle ITU T subaddress and password transactions 8 11 1 SETUP FILE Create a general memory box and do all the general memory box settings SET BOX Give the general memory box a box number 1 FILE NAME Give the memory box a name up to 24 characters long 2 PASSWORD Assign a four digit password to protect the memory box settings 3 SUBADDRESS Enter a 20 digit max ITU T standard subaddress You must enter a subaddress in order to use the memory box features 4 TX PASSWORD Enter a 20 digit max ITU T password 5 RX PASSWORD Enter a 20 digit max ITU T password 16 22 Summary of Important Settings Chapter 16 6 RECEIVE NO Turn memory box receiving off YES Turn memory box receiving on 1 SELECT ORIG UNIT Turn on checking to make sure the originator is registered on your fax OFF Receive all documents regardless of origin ON Receive documents from registered sources only TEL Use the One touch or Coded Speed Dialing buttons to register fax numbers from which you want the memory box to receive documents 2 PR
204. es L Ifthe other document is holding the document under a subaddress your subaddress must match the other party s subaddress L If the other document is holding the document under both a subaddress and password then you must poll the fax with both a matching subaddress and password Polling to Receive at a Preset Time Follow this procedure to set the fax to poll another fax at a preset time Polling faxes at preset times allows you to conduct document transac tions later at night when the telephone rates are lower Before you set up polling at a preset time make sure you have per formed the following tasks L The numbers you want to register for dialing must be registered for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing buttons 4 6 4 15 L When you register the One touch or Coded Speed dialing button you must turn on OPTIONAL SETTINGS and set the TX TYPE for POLLING RX when the other party set subaddress password you have to register an ITU T subaddress and or password for the speed dialing button 74 12 4 21 O 5 sf Q gt 28 5 2 ir 3 a _J Ifyou have to poll a number that you use regularly you should register it once again for another speed dialing button so you can set the ITU T subaddress and or password to match the polling box of the other party s fax and register the second number for preset polling Chapter 11 Setting Up and Using Polling 11 5 LS Data Registration Set A y CL Set
205. esc AE 3 18 e Changing or Erasing a Sender Name seeseeeeeeeeereereerereerssrss 3 20 L Using the Energy Saver Mode For the LASER CLASS 3170 3175 Only oc ceeecseceseseeeeseeeeseeeeeenees 3 21 e Turning the Energy Saver Feature ON sesser 3 21 e Returning to the Full Power Mode o ec eeeseeeeseseeeeseneeeeeeeeeaenees 3 23 Getting Started 3 1 x 3 s ihn pe N 5 p J 3 Lo Operation Buttons One touch panels closed LCD Display Displays messages and prompts during operation Displays Change selections text numbers and names when registering Energy Cartridge Saver information T_T hee 3 Change Cartridge Lights when toner in the toner cartridge runs low Replace the toner cartridge l e Alarm Rec Paper eOnLine eJob Lights when the paper cassettes run out of paper Re fill the I Go Shift cassettes with paper ST I Menu Item Value EnterCancel 30 0 0 9 l Printer Operation Panel tJ m ___LLLL____ J ee eee Used for printer function O For details refer to the Printer User s Guide sa Fine O Super Fine O Darker O Direct TX Resolution O Fine O Standard O Text O Manual RX Sets the resolution for documents you send O Standard Lighter O Text Photo Contrast Adjusts the lightness darkness of documents you send or copy Resolution Contrast Docume Type a o Bp a ee
206. ess is a number of up to 20 digits long which can include spaces and the symbols and C9 7 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the subaddress XO and press Set Oy SETUP FILE DIO 4 TX PASSWORD z If you do not want to enter the ITU T password press the down search button to display the next item and go on to the next step if not Set If you want to enter an ITU T password press Set TX PASSWORD An ITU T password is a number of up to 20 digits long which can include spaces and the symbols and J Ifyou register a TX PASSWORD it must match the ITU T password nn attached when the other party calls you Note 11 18 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 11 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the password CHL kL TX PASSWORD 12345676 Press Set SETUP FILE 5 ERASE AFTER TX 8 Set the polling box to erase or keep the document after polling Set Press Set A CJC Press the search buttons to display the setting you want ERASE AFTER TX ON ERASE AFTER TX OFF ON The document in the memory box is erased after it is sent once in response to polling by another fax OFF The document in the memory box is not erased after it is polled Select this setting if you expect the document will be polled by more than one fax Set C With the selection you want displayed press Set 9 You can repeat this procedure to set up another polling box pe 5 sf
207. esseesseeseees 8 3 EP Pinan a Memory bile ere ne emer e tee Tee erent rt artery rey 8 5 L Printing a Document in the Memory 1 0 eee eeeteeeeseteeeeeeneeeeneeeeeees 8 6 J Sending a Document in Memory to a Different Destination 8 7 _ Erasing a Document from the Memory ssscssceseseeceeesseeseeesserseees 8 9 e Deleting a Document with the Delete File Button eee 8 9 e Deleting a Document with the Memory Reference Button 8 10 ld Setting Up and Using a Memory BOX savscsinnsevosrteacesctetioinessiveiaetuestiiet 8 11 Delore You Create Memory DOKCS ts sisncucetassssasssraicrencessandeneinsaenaess 8 12 e When You Create a Memory BOX sseccscecseesseeesesseeteceeseeneeaeoees 8 12 ec reanna a Memory DOK era N 8 14 e Changing the Memory Box Settings secacsaxstesectaesivetenereerstanseveees 8 22 Canceling a Memory BOX ga cses asyssatsotesceneeracrsvactevessantatacttsesomenssorseee 8 23 e Sending a Document Stored in the Memory Box nsss 8 24 e Printing a Document Received in a Memory BOX c eee 8 25 L What Happens to Memory after a Power Failure 0 0 eset 8 27 e How Your Registered Data Is Protected oe eeeeseeeeeees 8 27 e About the Backup Battery s ssssssessssssesessesesessesesensesesesessesesessesesess 8 27 Using the Memory Features 8 1 o ape D S m Memory Features When the Fax Displays RECEIVED IN MEMORY If paper or toner runs out while you are receiving a document or
208. esseossessessesssessesssessesse 10 1 Setting Up and Using the Standard Mailbox Features 0 10 2 Creatine a Mailbox museurna o e ae a aos 10 2 Changing Mailbox SCLIN eS i 2 ctceians sacs iaet teertesotestantoeetent 10 6 Canceling a Wail Dox ieren a 10 7 Receiving a Confidential Document oe eee ee eeeteeeeees 10 8 Sending a Confidential Document 0 0 ee eects eeeeeeeeeeeens 10 10 Sending a Confidential Document with Speed Dialing 10 10 Sending a Confidential Document with the Confidential Mailbox Button eeeseeeercneeeeseseeseneeeeaeaees 10 11 Chapter 11 Setting Up and Using Polling eosooseeeeoeseoseessossosseessoesesseossoesessesssessessses 11 1 What tool tie oirrese ae na arte pcs EEEE 11 2 Before You Use Polling Receiving cece eee eceeseesseeeeeeeeesseeeeees 11 2 Polling Other Fax Machines to Receive a Document sees 11 3 Rolling to Receive at a Preset TIME ssanecscodssntesetsaarsensdsivsavieneadsosess 11 5 Changing the Preset Polling Settings 0 0 eeeeeseeeeeeeeseeees 11 12 Canceling Preset POU iais secacdosbassauadeues sededsnsonntucasocapsauisacsnanteds 11 13 petting Up POlline Sending sosire a 11 15 Before You Can Be Polled to Send ou eects eeeeteeeeeees 11 15 Setane Upa Polling BOX scsi isiees cissotsiicasiciinn Sones uincoviene tees 11 15 Scanning a Document into the Memory for Polling Sending 11 20 Changing the Polling Box Setup eeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeaeeees 11 21 Canceli
209. essesseeceeesseeseceseassesseasseeeseeseses 2 53 Using the Optional Dual Linne 0 0 eee eeeseceseeseeesseeneeeceaesenseaenees 2 54 Connecting Two Telephone Lines cesssseseseeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 2 54 How the Two Telephone Lines Operate sssr 2 56 Registering the Telephone Numbers for the Lines 0 2 57 Chapters Geins Started ioc sashes sen esnea eaae nen aeo a eNe o aaia 3 1 Operation Buttons One touch panels closed s seeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeese 3 2 Operation Buttons One touch panels open sseseseesesreserseereseeeee 3 4 Using the Menus and Buttons 0 se seesessecseeeseeeseeceeessenseteneersesseass 3 5 General Guidelines for Registering Information 0c 3 5 Usine e Monis tnereenre were E fare enrnrt eee 3 5 To Open a Menu and Select an Item cece cece ceeeeeeeeeeees 3 6 To Return to the Previous Level eseeeseeeeeeeeeteeeeseneeeeees 3 6 To Return to Standby Immediately eee eeeeeeeeeees 3 6 Entering Names for Registration gsrcccaiisenn a 3 7 TO Correcta Mistakes rnea iaa aAA ENA 3 8 Ment Button Summary Va Ble nisni ceia 3 9 Checking and Setting the Telephone Line sssr 3 10 Registering Required Sender Information cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeees 3 12 What is Sender Information jecsaaect odes speassanecacushidonsonsatdeatestuctiees 3 12 Registering the Sender Information TX TERMINAL ID 3 13 Registering Sender Nain cioinn aa 3 18 Reeistering a Sender N ame sinora a ban
210. et Press Set O TD Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four digit OJO SUBADDRESS This item is the ITU T standard subaddress This setting is required All confidential documents must be sent to your fax with this subaddress in order to be stored in your mailbox If the subaddresses do not match the document will not be received O c Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter an ITU T E subaddress up to 20 digits long Then press Set S P 8 8 P ee SETUP FILE Qo 4 RX PASSWORD 06 LA The next setting is optional If you set a password however the confi dential documents sent to you must include this password 6 To enter an ITU T password press Set RX PASSWORD OOA Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter an ITU T pass a word up to 20 digits long Then press Set 5 O p 8 8 p e SETUP FILE IOO 5 OF RX COPIES Q 10 4 Using Confidential Mailboxes Chapter 10 7 Normally only one copy of the document received in a confidential mailbox is printed If you want to print more copies change this setting Otherwise go on to the next step Set C To specify more copies press Set OF RX COPIES O1COPIES A y CJC Press the search buttons to increase or decrease the number if not Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a two digit number For numbers 00 to 09 you must enter 2 digits including the zero Set C Press Set SETUP FILE SET BOX OO 8 You can
211. et 2 PASSWORD 0000 to 9999 This operation password protects your memory box settings After you set this password you will have to enter the password before you can view or change the settings for the memory box You will also have to enter this password to print a document received in the memory box 3 SUBADDRESS 0 9 spaces 20 digits The ITU T subaddress for the memory box This setting is not optional You must enter a subaddress here in order to use the memory box Enter a subaddress of up to 20 digits long In addition to numbers the subaddress may include and spaces 4 TX PASSWORD 0 9 spaces 20 digits The ITU T standard TX password for your memory box TX password is only for polling sending This password must match the ITU T password with which the other party calls you in order for the transaction to succeed If your TX password does not match the ITU T password on the other fax machine your document will not be received by the other party s fax 8 16 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 Memory Box Setup Summary Cont d 5 RX PASSWORD 6 RECEIVE 1 SELECT ORIG UNIT Chapter 8 0 9 spaces 20 digits The ITU T standard RX password for your memory box This password must match the ITU T password sent with a document to your fax in order for the transaction to succeed If your RX password does not match the TX password sent with the document from the other party s fax your f
212. et If you want to know the destination telephone number and time of the document press the cursor buttons lt 4 gt before pressing Set If the transaction is displayed with a mark the document is being held in the memory for re dialing and sending A vy C J J 4 Press the search buttons to display the transaction number of the document that you want to delete Then press Set DELETE DOCUMENT PASSWORD Set If you have not set the operation password for the document stored in memory you can skip the next step 8 10 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 C 5 Enter the four digit password and press Set OK TO DELETE YES NO 6 Press to delete the selected document or press to cancel the deletion After you press the document is erased TX RX NO 0004 ERASING END 7 Press Stop to return to standby Setting Up and Using a Memory Box Chapter 8 In this section we will show you how to set up a memory box and use it to send and receive documents A memory box is a location in the memory you can create to store scanned or received documents for printing or transmitting to other destinations The main advantage to using the memory box for sending and receiving is that you can handle all transmissions with ITU T passwords and subaddresses The ITU T subaddress and password serve the same purpose as the bank account number and a personal identification number on your bank card Just as you cannot co
213. etup You can turn the memory lock mode on and off with the Memory Reception button ON Turns on the timer setup You can still use the Memory Reception button to turn the memory lock mode on and off 1 START TIME Sets the time for the fax to enter the memory lock mode EVERYDAY Set the time in 24 hour format Up to 5 SELECT DAYS Starting times can be specified for every day or each selected day 2 END TIME Sets the time for the fax to leave the memory lock mode EVERYDAY Set the time in 24 hour format Up to 5 SELECT DAYS starting times can be specified for every day or each selected day Restricting Use of the Fax 13 19 Q a T D w 0 o 0 Q ce Turning the Memory Lock ON Follow this procedure to put the fax in the memory lock mode if the memory lock mode timer has not been set or if you want to put the fax in the memory lock mode before the timer turns the memory lock on Ai If the timer is set for the memory lock feature the fax will enter and leave the memory lock mode automatically 13 17 Note M aS 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press LS Memory Reception suet MEM LOCK PASSWORD L C3 Enter the memory lock password then press Set QOY OL 9 OPER__ SYMBOLS The fax is now in the memory lock receive mode All documents will be received in the memory until you unlock memory receiv ing and print them Turning the Memory Lock OFF and Printing Documents
214. extended EXTENSION TRAY Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 53 Using the Optional Dual Line The optional Dual line Upgrade Kit allows you to connect one more telephone line to the fax unit at the same time This section describes how to connect the telephone lines to the Dual line Upgrade Kit and set up the fax unit Connecting Two Telephone Lines The Dual line Upgrade Kit must be installed inside the fax unit by a qualified service technician For details contact a local authorized Canon dealer Note the following features regarding the installation of the Dual line Upgrade Kit L When either the Dual line Upgrade Kit or the PCL6 Printer Board is installed in the fax unit the energy saver feature cannot be used 3 21 L With the Dual line Upgrade Kit installed if you have installed the optional handset you will not be able to use it for voice telephone communication on Line 2 1 Make sure you have two RJ11 C wall jacks If you need assistance contact your dealer or telephone company 2 Locate the telephone line jacks on the right side L and the back side L2 of the fax unit The jack marked L is for Line 1 and the jack marked L2 is for Line 2 2 54 Setting Up Chapter 2 3 Connect one end of Line 1 to the L jack and connect one end of Line 2 to the L2 jack Telephone jack marked for Line 1 connection Ra Telephone jack marked L2 for Line 2 connection 4 Connect the other
215. f the fax unit just above the upper output tray DOCUMENT OUTPUT TRAY 2 26 Setting Up Chapter 2 Ai Make sure the knobs on each side of the tray fit into the holes on the side of the fax unit Back of the tray sits on top of the extended lip of the fax unit Note Attaching the Document Feeder Tray Slide one side in position first and then the other side L Attach the supplied tray labels as shown in the illustration below We also recommend attaching the tray labels onto the upper and lower output trays according to the settings you make on the SELECT OUTPT TRAY menu to classify the outputs 42 52 You can use the blank labels to meet your specific needs Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 27 Installing Paper Cassette 2 For the LASER CLASS 3175 Only Paper Cassette 2 is standard for the LASER CLASS 3175 and optional for the LASER CLASS 3170 3170MS 1 Remove the tape at the front of Paper Cassette 2 3 If tapes are attached to the paper cassette remove them Then remove the spacers under the paper guide clips by first pressing down on the bottom metal plate with one hand and then sliding the white spacers inwards with the other hand 2 28 Setting Up Chapter 2 4 Remove the tapes and packings at the rear of the paper cassette 5 Ifa spacer is attached remove it from the paper cassette while pressing the bottom plate 6 Replace the cassette into Paper Cassette 2 and place it in
216. ferent times in a day If you are using a speed dial button that was set by someone else and you would like your document to go out at the preset time verify if the preset time feature is being used for that button 4 9 4 18 4 27 16 34 4 30 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 Using Coded Speed Dialing Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a document at the press of the Coded Dial button followed by a three digit code Ai To use this feature you must first register a telephone number for Coded Speed Dialing 4 15 1 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can also select a sender s name with the TTI Selector 6 6 DOCUMENT READY Press Coded Dial once Coded Dial 2 TEL i 3 cb mo E 3 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the three digit 5 gt D 2 3 code of the telephone number you want to dial 000 127 Do 4 5 After 5 seconds the fax starts to send the document E S e O D TEL 123 4567 N OPER SYMBOLS x001 CANON ONTARIO Q TRANSMIT 0026 SCANNING DOC P 001 You will see a series of brief alternating messages that tell you the fax is dialing calling then transmitting the document The number being dialed name of the other party and the transaction number of the document are also displayed Chapter 4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 31 Here are some important
217. from the Note t LJ SET TIME 2 T Press Set SET TIME Set C Enter another time and press Set You can register up to 5 sending times S To continue registration for the current button press Data Registration Registration Then go to step 9 C OPTIONAL SETTING 2 1X TYPE if not ys To end registration and return to standby press Stop s 4 10 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 Set 9 Perform the transmission type settings Press Set Then press the search buttons to display the transmis sion type items TA TYPE REGULAR TX TX TYPE POLLING RX For details about using ITU T subaddresses and passwords see the description of setting up and using a memory box 8 12 The TX TYPE menu includes these items REGULAR TX Designates the transaction as a normal transmission with no special features You can cancel the currently set TX TYPE by selecting REGULAR TX CONFIDENTIAL TX Designates the transaction as a transmis sion to a confidential mailbox Press Set then enter the subaddress and password for the confidential mailbox 10 10 1 PASSWORD The ITU T password for the other party s confidential mailbox 2 SUBADDRESS The ITU T subaddress for the other party s confidential mailbox pe c o To Q Fr tez HE4 J A 7 o gt ORIG RELAY TX Designates the transaction as a relay transmission with your fax as the originator Press Set then enter the subaddress and pass
218. g D 2 01910 Chapter 4 To use this feature you must first register a group of telephone numbers for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing 4 24 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can also select a sender s name with the TTI Selector 6 6 DOCUMENT READY Press the One touch Speed Dialing button or press Coded Dial followed by the three digit code where the group of telephone numbers you want to dial is registered The fax starts to send the document TEL GROUP DIAL 01 CANON USA TRANSMIT 0025 SCANNING DOC P 001 You will see a series of brief alternating messages that tell you the fax is dialing calling then transmitting the document The number being dialed name of the other party and the transaction number of the document are also displayed Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 33 pe c o E Q Fr tez 2 a A 7 o gt Here are some important points you should keep in mind when you use Group Dialing L To start scanning immediately press Start Scan Otherwise the fax will wait 5 seconds before it starts scanning This timeout feature can be turned off 16 11 L The fax will not dial the numbers for the Group Dialing number until you set the document on the fax If you press the One touch Speed Dialing button or press Coded Dial followed by a three digit code before you load the document the fax
219. g This is the default setting for the Report Settings 716 8 12 31 1999 11 48 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 41001 KOK K ok ok K ok KKK K ok K ok K ok ok K K ok K K K K K K K kokk ERROR TX REPORT kkk ok ok ok K K kK ok kK ok ok K K K ok K K ok K K ok K K K K K K K TX FUNCTION WAS NOT COMPLETED TX RX NO 0006 CONNECTION TEL 761 1298 CONNECTION ID JOHN BARRISTER ST TIME 12 31 11 48 USAGE T 00 00 PGS SENT RESULT Chapter 14 Printing Reports and Lists 14 11 C Pe ihe fe Q 3 a 5 t zk rs A and Lists Transmission TX Report You can change the Report Settings to print a transmission report for every document you send 16 8 12 31 1999 13 34 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 7 001 ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok Ok ok OK Ok K Kk TX REPORT Kk k FK K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K TRANSMISSION OK TX RX NO 0012 CONNECTION TEL 761 1298 CONNECTION ID JOHN BARRISTER ST TIME 12 31 13 30 USAGE T 00 16 PGS SENT 1 RESULT OK 14 12 Printing Reports and Lists Chapter 14 Transmission TX Report with first page You can adjust the transmission report setting to print the first part of the document as part of the report to remind you of the content of the document 16 8 This is only effective when you send documents by Memory Sending 12 31 1999 12 28 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 71001 ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok K ok K K Ok K K K K K K K K 7 woke TX REPORT
220. g buttons you press only one or four buttons to send the same document to several locations we i e o Q Fr tez HE4 J A 7 o gt Chapter 4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 5 Setting Up One touch Speed Dialing Data Set Set 4 6 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing One touch Speed Dialing allows you to dial a number and send a document at the press of one button You can register up to 72 fax numbers one for every One touch Speed Dialing button on the operation panel In addition to the telephone number and name of the other party you can set the timer for the transmission as well as enter other impor tant settings Follow this procedure to register a telephone number for One touch Speed Dialing i Open the One touch Speed Dialing menu Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press the search buttons until you see the display below REGISTRATION 2 TEL REGISTRATION Press Set TEL REGISTRATION 1 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL Press Set 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL 01 Chapter 4 2 Specify the One touch Speed Dialing button that you want to register CJC Press the search buttons to scroll the display Press the down search button to scroll to the next number or press the up search button to scroll to the previous number if not Close the appropriate One touch Speed Dialing panel and press the One touch Speed Diali
221. ge sample 14 13 setting 16 8 Activity Reports printing 14 9 automatic redialing described 6 19 setting 6 20 B batch sending function 4 9 4 18 4 27 16 34 C cancelling receiving 7 11 receiving optional Dual line 7 12 sending 6 8 O sending optional Dual line 6 9 CHECK PRINTER COVER displayed at power on 2 42 cleaning fax unit 15 24 scanning area 15 27 Index Index closed network creating 13 16 Coded Speed Dial List sample 14 3 14 4 Coded Speed Dialing defined 4 5 entering a name 4 17 entering number 4 16 registering for Group Dialing 4 25 setting timer 4 18 setting transmission speed 4 22 setting up 4 15 turning ECM on off 4 23 using 4 31 confidential documents canceling mailbox 10 7 creating mailbox 10 2 described 10 1 receiving 10 8 sending 10 10 sending with speed dialing 10 10 confidential mailbox changing mailbox settings 10 6 setting 10 2 16 21 Confidential Mailbox List sample 14 17 Confidential Receive Report sample 14 15 setting 16 8 Contrast setting for copying 5 5 setting for sending 6 5 copying checking document 5 2 B 1 contrast 5 5 document 5 2 document settings 5 4 document type 5 5 procedure 5 6 resolution 5 5 setting document 5 3 with restrictions on 13 12 D data registration entering a name 3 7 menu 16 2 sender information 3 12 date format 16 30 registering 3 13 setting 16 4 date and time registering 3 13 DAT
222. h Speed Dialing button 4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 Data Registration Set Set Chapter 4 8 Set the time for the transmission To stop here and register another button Press Data Registration Repeat the procedure from step 2 To end the procedure and return to standby Press Stop To perform the optional settings 7 Open the OPTIONAL SETTING menu Press Set OPTIONAL SETTING OFF Press the search buttons until you see the display below OPTIONAL SETTING ON Press Set OPTIONAL SETTING 1 SET TIME pe c o E Q Fr tez 2 a A 7 o gt L If you set the timer for the One touch Speed Dialing button every document you send with this button will be sent at the same time every day L You can set up to 5 different times in a 24 hour period for sending L You can use this feature together with BATCH TX If BATCH TX is ON the documents will be grouped and sent together at the preset time The fax unit will make only one phone call saving you time and money 16 34 Press Set SET TIME 1 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 9 Set C3 Press Set again SET TIME Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time Enter the time in the 24 hour format e g 1 00 p m as 13 00 SET TIME 00 30 OO CO COO beginning and press Clear at this step then press Set Press Set LA If you want to clear the time you have set do the procedure
223. h Quality UHQ imaging technology allows you to send documents that are very close to the quality of the original document For best results adjust the settings for special documents before sending Follow these guidelines to change a setting L The lighted indicator tells you the current setting L Press the appropriate button repeatedly to light the setting you want L For documents that require special settings you can set the Program button to perform the settings with a single button press 12 5 6 4 Sending Documents Chapter 6 Ultra Fine Super Fine Darker Fine Standard ST ext Standard Lighter Text Photo Resolution Contrast Document Type Resolution Adjusts the resolution for documents with fine text and thin lines The higher the resolution the higher the quality output but the slower the scanning speed Ultra Fine Eight times the Standard resolution Super Fine Four times the Standard resolution Fine Twice the Standard resolution Standard For normal printed or typewritten text Contrast Adjusts the lightness darkness of the document pages scanned for sending Darker For documents with light text or colors Standard For standard printed or typewritten text Lighter For documents with dark text or colors Document Type Select for documents with text only or with text and photos on the same page Text For documents that contain text without photographs Text Photo For documents that contain te
224. have the document relayed to you locally We hope you will have these features set up in the very near future so we can enjoy more efficient secure and economical facsimile communications Chapter 14 Printing Reports and Lists 14 13 Multi transaction Report If the transmission was a sequential broadcast then a Multi transaction Report is printed 12 31 1999 14 05 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 7 001 AA I A a Kk IC aC a ak keke ae ok xxx MULTI TX RX REPORT Kk ok 3 OR RA ISA I A a KC aC a ak ake aie ae ok TX RX NO 0013 PGS 1 TX RX INCOMPLETE 02 761 1298 JOHN BARRISTER TRANSACTION OK 01 732 2233 ADAM BOOKS CPA 03 1 914 438 3619 SEYMOUR GREEN ERROR INFORMATION Error Report RX You can set the fax to print a report every time an error occurs during document receiving Otherwise only an error message is displayed 16 8 12 31 1999 12 50 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 7 001 ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok Ok ok ok ok ok Ok ok Ok kkk RX REPORT Kk k ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok K ok K ok K INCOMPLETE RECEPTION TX RX NO 5005 CONNECTION TEL 1 213 978 3314 CONNECTION ID BELZER INC ST TIME 12 31 12 49 USAGE T 00 20 PGS RESULT 14 14 Printing Reports and Lists Chapter 14 Reception RX Report You can set the fax to print an activity report every time you receive a document 16 8 12 31 1999 14 08 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 7 001 TCC AC AC CC CC ee oe oe He
225. he document you want to send RESEND DOCUMENT TX RX NO 5010 If you want to know the destination telephone number and time of the document press the cursor buttons lt 4 gt Note A vy C JC 4 Press the search buttons to display the transaction number of the document you want to send Then press Set Set LJ RESEND DOCUMENT PASSWORD If you have not set the operation password for the document stored in memory you can skip the next step Chapter 8 Using the Memory Features 8 7 TTI Selector 8 8 Using the Memory Features Enter the four digit password and press Set RESEND DOCUMENT SELECT LOCATIONS le Dial the fax number Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the telephone number and press Set if not Use One touch Speed Dialing Coded Speed Dialing or Group Dialing to dial the number Press Set RESEND DOCUMENT SENDER S NAME SENDER S NAME CANON INC Enter the sender s name Press TTI Selector and keep pressing it until the sender s name you want appears in the display You can also use the search buttons to scroll up and down the TTI list SENDER S NAME 06 CANON J SMITH Press Set The fax sends the document to the number you dialed Chapter 8 Erasing a Document from the Memory Follow this procedure to erase a document from the memory To delete a document from the memory you can use the Delete File button or the Memory Reference button F To select a
226. he numeric keypad to enter the time Enter the time in the 24 hour format e g 1 00 p m as 13 00 gt SET TIME O 00 30 If you want to clear the time you have set do the procedure from the beginning and press Clear at this step then press Set C3 Press Set oS ie e TS Q Fr tez 2 a A 7 o gt Set C Press Set C Enter another time and press Set You can register up to 5 sending times Chapter 4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 19 ao To continue registration for the current button press Data Registration Registration Then go to step 7 OPTIONAL SETTING ZAIN PE if not T sion type items TX TYPE To end registration and return to standby press Stop Perform the transmission type settings Press Set Then press the search buttons to display the transmis REGULAR TX TX TYPE POLLING RX For details about using ITU T subaddresses and passwords see the description of setting up and using a memory box 8 11 The TX TYPE menu includes these items REGULAR TX CONFIDENTIAL TX 1 PASSWORD 2 SUBADDRESS 4 20 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Designates the transaction as a normal transmission with no special features You can cancel the currently set TX TYPE by selecting REGULAR TX Designates the transaction as a transmis sion to a confidential mailbox Press Set then enter the subaddress and password for the confidential mailbox 10 10
227. he procedures below I Make sure you check all the areas described below because paper jams can occur at more than one location L Follow the exact order of the steps below L When removing the paper cassettes remove them gently If a paper jam occurs during printing the Error lamp blinks red and a message will appear in the display REC PAPER JAM Wash off any toner from your hands or clothing immediately with cold water N Nois THE FIXING AREA BECOMES VERY HOT DO NOT TOUCH ANY PARTS IN THE FIXING AREA WHEN YOU ARE REMOVING A Caution PAPER JAM 15 4 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 Locating a Paper Jam A paper jam can occur in any of the following locations shown below You should check each location for jammed paper and remove it 3 IMAGING AREA 2 0UTPUT TRAYS AREA a 1 FACE UP TRAY SS _ 7 a MP TRAY AREA AREA p E l S 5 PAPER CASSETTE 1 AREA OA A eag o gt CH A 6 PAPER CASSETTE 2 AREA LQ T Q if installed 5 6 cs 4 Le Area Page 1 Face up tray area 15 6 2 Output trays area 15 6 3 Imaging area 15 8 4 MP tray area 15 11 5 Paper Cassette 1 area 15 12 6 Paper Cassette 2 area if installed 15 13 P Paper jams can occur in more than one location at a time so ensure all ee locations indicated in the illustration are checked Note Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Que
228. her entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual In order to program this information into your fax machine you should complete the procedure to register your name unit number time and date on page 3 12 WARNING FOR THE LASER CLASS 3170 3175 vi Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual If such changes or modifications should be made you could be required to stop operation of the equipment This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver C
229. hotographs on the same page Automatically adjusts the quality of the image and text on the same page H nk Lu Q 2o O E V 5 Chapter 5 Using the Fax as a Copier 5 5 Making Copies Follow this procedure to use the fax as a copier 1 Set the document on the fax 5 3 2 Press Copy COPY 01 CASSETTE 1 LTR 3 Perform the document settings 5 4 Ultra Fine Super Fine Darker Fine Standard eText Standard Lighter Text Photo Resolution Contrast Document Type 1 M 4 If you want to select another paper cassette or the MP tray open J E all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels then press the search buttons A v CL COPY 01 MP TRAY LGL 5 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies 01 to 99 COPY 03 MP TRAY LGL In order to select MP TRAY USE MP TRAY must be set to ON in the FAX S PRINTER SET menu 2 48 I If you make a mistake and want to start again press Clear Start Scan 6 Press Start Scan to start copying COPY L If you want to cancel the operation press Stop 5 6 Using the Fax as a Copier Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Sending Documents This chapter describes fundamental procedures for dialing and sending documents We will also show you how to send a document to more than one location set a document for delayed sending and send a document with a subaddress and password Li Settinea Document ior Sending eiiean
230. i Paper Cassette 2 is optional for the LASER CLASS 3170 3170MS For the LASER CLASS 3170 Series Check each item against this list as you remove it from the box 1 Fax machine 1 Document feeder tray 1 Document output tray 1 Upper output tray 1 Paper Cassette 1 letter legal A4 size 500 sheet capacity 1 Power cord 1 Telephone line 2 Sheets of destination labels 1 Sheet of tray labels 1 Facsimile User s Guide 1 Warranty registration 1 Limited warranty note 1 Installation completion card 1 FX6 Toner Cartridge O G ee L L L L L L L L L Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 13 For the LASER CLASS 3175 Only L 1 Paper Cassette 2 letter legal A4 executive B5 size 500 sheet capacity For the LASER CLASS 3170MS Only I 1 Printer User s Guide J 1 CD ROM Printer driver L 1 Sheet of End User Licence Agreement PCL Board LASER CLASS 3170 3170MS Paper Cassette 2 LASER CLASS 3175 Paper Cassette 2 is a standard feature for the LASER CLASS 3175 and optional for the LASER CLASS 3170 3170MS 2 14 Setting Up Chapter 2 DOCUMENT OUTPUT TRAY DOCUMENT FEEDER TRAY FAX UNIT with Paper Cassette 1 installed FACSIMILE USER S GUIDE DESTINATION LABELS x 2 PAPER CASSETTE 2 For the LASER CLASS 3170MS Only PRINTER USER S GUIDE CD ROM Printer driver Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 15 Options Available For the LASER CLASS 3170 Series _J HAN
231. ied _1 Cannot copy Is the toner cartridge out of toner Change the toner cartridge 715 17 L Is the copied document reduced Are the document feed guides snug against the sides of the docu ment that you are copying Make sure the document feed guides are both against the sides of the document on the document feeder tray before you start copying 5 3 1 Are copied documents cut at the margins Is the selector on the paper cassettes or the MP tray set for the width of the paper loaded Adjust the selector to the width of the paper loaded 2 32 to 2 34 2 46 Having Other Problems 1 Is sending and receiving documents too slow When sending is the document mode set for Ultra Fine Super Fine Fine or Text Photo If the indicator for Ultra Fine Super Fine Fine or Text Photo is on press Resolution to select Standard or press Document Type to select Text 6 5 15 46 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 Is your fax set for ECM receiving or sending Because the fax is constantly checking for errors during trans mission ECM receiving or sending requires more time The fax is set to conduct all transactions using ECM error correction mode If transmission speed appears to be extremely slow you may be able to speed up transmission time by turning ECM off 16 10 16 14 L Are the documents received not printed out Are the paper cassettes set correctly into the fax Insert the paper cassettes
232. iginator you have to register the tele phone number of the originator s fax unit on your fax unit for a One touch Speed Dialing button or a three digit Coded Speed Dialing code 4 6 4 15 Chapter 7 Receiving Documents 7 13 of Et EF os aT 26 xA Setting Up the Fax for Document Transfer Follow the procedure below to create a file for switching the fax auto matically into the transfer mode 1 Open the TRANSFER menu fh aS Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press He p p 8 P p LS Data Registration Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Set CJ Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS A y CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 6 FILE SETTINGS Set C3 Press Set FILE SETTINGS 1 CONFID MAILBOX A vy CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display below FILE SETTINGS 6 TRANSFER Set CJ Press Set TRANSFER 1 SETUP FILE 7 14 Receiving Documents Chapter 7 C 2 Press Set Then press the search buttons to scroll the display so you can see each setting Jt SETUP FILE 1 FILE NAME SETUP FILE 6 PRINT RX DOC Set C 3 Press Set then follow the summary in the table below to perform the settings y 4 Press Stop to return to standby is Transfer Setup Summary of Ec EF os aT 26 xA The default settings shown in bold below remain in effect unless you change them 1 FILE NAME Enter a file name
233. ime standing around the fax You can start scanning a document for sending even while the fax is busy sending another document 1 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can also select a sender s name with the TTI Selector 6 6 6 12 Sending Documents Chapter 6 so oes 2 Dial the other party s fax number G 2 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number 6 7 5 if not O Press a One touch Speed Dialing button to dial the number 4 29 0 G if not Press Coded Dial and a three digit code to dial the number 4 31 if not Press Directory and search for the name to dial the number 4 35 If you make a mistake during dialing press Stop to return to standby and start again If you use One touch or Coded Speed Dialing with the time out feature Seal on the fax will pause 5 seconds before it starts scanning the document Note 16 11 Start Scan 3 To start scanning right away press Start Scan If you use One touch or Coded Speed Dialing wait for the fax to start scanning automatically The timeout feature can be turned off 16 11 You can start sending a document while it is being scanned into the memory When scanning a multi page document and the telephone line is free the unit will call the other party after the first page is scanned Once the connection is made the fax unit will begin to transmit the i
234. in the paper cassettes The MP Multi Purpose tray holds a stack of up to 100 sheets Paper Cassette 1 holds 500 sheets for a total of 600 sheets Paper Cassette 2 available as an option for the LASER CLASS 3170 3170MS and standard for the LASER CLASS 3175 holds another 500 sheets for a total of 1100 sheets All cassettes and the MP tray can be adjusted to fit a variety of standard paper sizes and are easy to access and re fill 1 2 Welcome Chapter 1 One touch Dial Ls z gt yy Incoming document Chapter 1 Relay sending Confidential sending Sequential broadcasting Polling Receiving immemory Recording documents Automatic dialing Includes One touch and Coded Speed Dialing Directory Dialing as well as Group dialing which allows you to send the same document to several destinations at the touch of a button Variety of send and receive features Includes multiple broadcasting polling relay sending and receiving and confidential mailbox sending and receiving ECM send and receive ECM error correction mode reduces errors during sending and receiving on noisy or poor quality telephone lines Receiving in memory when you run out of paper or toner If you run out of paper or toner while you are receiving a document the fax unit continues to receive by putting the remainder of the document in the fax memory so you can print it out after you refill the paper cassette or replace the toner cart
235. ine will appear on the Te display when you press Tone Note 4 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the numbers requested by the information service 12 4 Other Special Features Chapter 12 Setting and Using the Program Button The program button feature allows you to register a setting so you can automatically perform a routine procedure with a single button press G K 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press E Data Registration Data eoero REGISTRATION C 1 DATA REGISTRATION Set Set 2 Press Set twice DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS USER SETTINGS 1 DATE amp TIME C JC 3 Press the search buttons until you see the display below USER SETTINGS 7 PROGRAM KEY Set 4 Press Set to display the current settings PROGRAM KEY PRINT REPORT A vy C JC 5 Press the search buttons to display the function you want to assign to the Program button P You can select only one function at a time to assign to the Program button Note Features amp Q Q a ku 3 s O Chapter 12 Other Special Features 12 5 Program button Setup Summary The default settings shown in bold remain in effect unless you change them PRINT REPORT REPORT SCANNING MODE STAMP 12 6 Other Special Features Sets the Program button to function as a print transmission report button When ever you need a transmission report for a document you are se
236. ing REMOTE RX with extension phone Memory receiving MEMORY RX Offhook alarm OFFHOOK ALARM Pause length MID PAUSE SET PIN codes PIN CODE Printing Continue TONER SUPPLY printing with toner LOW supply low The fax is set to conduct all transactions using ECM error correction mode If transmission speed appears to be extremely slow you may be able to speed up transmission time by turning ECM off 416 10 16 14 The Energy Saver feature is off and will remain off until you turn it on 43 21 16 31 The initial display language is English Spanish and French are also available 16 30 To start receiving a fax manually by answering an extension telephone connected to the fax dial 25 You can change this number 7 9 16 14 If paper or toner runs out while you are receiving a long document or the full paper sensor detects the trays are full the remainder of the document will be stored in the memory until you can re fill the paper cassette replace the toner cartridge or pick up the paper on the trays You can also set an alarm to sound when the fax starts receiving a document in the memory 16 15 If the handset remains off the hook an alarm will sound The volume of this alarm can be adjusted or it can be turned off 16 6 A pause entered within a number is set for 2 seconds You can lengthen this pause up to 15 seconds A pause entered at the end of a number is fixed at 10 seconds and cannot be adjusted 4 3
237. ing to the Full Power Mode Energy Saver Chapter 3 The display tells you the fax has entered the energy saver mode with this message ENERGY SAVER The indicator under the energy saver button to the right of the LCD display will also light red To restore the full power mode press the Energy Saver button While the fax machine is powering up PLEASE WAIT is displayed for a few moments PLEASE WAIT While the fax unit is powering up you can perform any operation The following actions will automatically restore the full power mode I Receiving a document _I Printing an Activity Management report pre set for printing li Answering a call You can awaken the fax from the low energy sleep mode by L Pressing the Energy Saver button L Setting a document on the fax for sending or copying Getting Started 3 23 Ss 3 sks ihn ee 7a 5 p shs 3 The fax does not enter the energy saver mode in the following cases L When documents are stored in the memory L When a paper or document jam has occurred when the paper cassettes have run out of paper or when the toner cartridge has run out of toner _I When a document has been fed into the automatic document feeder ADF L When you install either the optional Dual line Upgrade Kit or PCL6 Printer Board You cannot press the Energy Saver button to put the fax in the energy N saver mode The fax enters the energy saver mode only afte
238. ings L If you want to add to the list of fax units to receive relay broadcasts from your fax unit make sure that the numbers you want to add are registered for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing L If you want to set your fax unit to confirm the identity of the origina tor before it receives a document for relay broadcasting make sure the telephone number of the originator s fax unit is registered for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing on your fax unit Chapter 9 Using a Relay Network 9 7 Network gt S Q es D D Set OPER__ SYMBOLS Open the RELAY TX GROUP menu 79 4 RELAY TX GROUP 1 SETUP FILE Press the search buttons until you see the display below RELAY TX GROUP 2 CHANGE DATA Press Set CHANGE DATA SET RLY TX GROUP 00 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the group num ber Then press Set CHANGE DATA PASSWORD If you have not set the operation password you can skip the next step Enter the four digit operation password and press Set CHANGE DATA 1 GROUP DIAL NAME Press the search buttons to display the item you want to change and press Set L To change the settings for an item follow the same procedure you used for initial setup of the relay group 49 5 L To delete an item press Clear and then press Set 9 8 Using a Relay Network Chapter 9 L To turn off the relay feature for the group and retain the setup press the search buttons to display 10 RELA
239. ions 1 5 E ECM turning on off for Coded Speed Dialing 4 23 turning on off for One touch Speed Dialing 4 14 ENERGY SAVER setting 16 30 Index Energy Saver button using 3 23 energy saver mode Energy Saver button 3 23 returning to full power 3 23 turning on 3 21 using 3 21 entry mode changing 3 7 name 3 7 number 3 9 text 3 9 error messages listed alphabetically 15 38 listed by number 15 35 Error Report RX sample 14 14 Error Report TX sample 14 11 extension phone connecting 2 40 receiving with 7 8 F fax memory options 1 5 fax unit assembling 2 23 front view 2 17 lifting 2 10 parts 2 17 rear view 2 18 FAX S PRINTER SET OF RX COPIES 16 17 described 16 3 listed 16 16 RX REDUCTION 16 17 SELECT CASSETTE 16 17 SELECT DENSITY 16 18 SELECT OUTPT TRAY 16 19 TONER SUPPLY LOW 16 18 USE MP TRAY 16 17 FILE SETTINGS CONFID MAILBOX 16 21 Index described 16 3 listed 16 20 MEMORY BOX 16 22 POLLING BOX 16 25 PRESET POLLING 16 25 RELAY TX GROUP 16 21 TRANSFER 16 26 G Group Dial List sample 14 4 Group Dialing defined 4 5 registering for Coded Speed Dialing button 4 25 4 26 registering for One touch Speed Dialing button 4 25 4 26 setting timer 4 27 setting up 4 24 using 4 33 H handset option connecting 2 38 required for manual receiving 7 7 using 12 2 using for sending 6 17 using with restrictions on 13 13 view 2 18
240. ive the relay broadcast are registered then press Set You can select up to 200 destinations 9 6 Using a Relay Network Chapter 9 Relay Group Setup Summary Cont d 8 TX REPORT This feature determines if your fax unit returns a relay transmis sion report to the originator after your fax unit receives and relays a document TRANSMIT After your fax unit relays a document it sends a transmission report back to the originator In order for the feature to perform correctly the originator s unit telephone number must be registered on your fax for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing NOT No relay transmission report is sent to the TRANSMIT originator after a document has been relayed 9 TX START TIME You can set your fax to hold documents and then relay them at a preset time If you do not set this item all documents received for relay are relayed immediately If you want to use this feature press Set Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time in 24 hour format You can set up to 5 times to relay documents within a 24 hour period every day 10 RELAY B CAST This feature switches relay broadcasting for this group on and off without altering any of the other settings ON Your fax unit receives and relays a document set for relay broadcasting OFF Your fax unit will not receive and relay a document set for relay broadcasting Changing the Relay Broadcast Settings Follow this procedure to change the relay broadcast sett
241. ke a few minutes to browse through this User s Guide so you know what it contains You do not have to read it all at once from cover to cover We have done our best to give you an accurate easy to use User s Guide but if you still have some questions about how to use your facsimile unit feel free to contact your local authorized Canon dealer sales or service representatives They will be glad to answer your questions Model LASER CLASS 3170 is used for illustration purposes in this manual When there is any difference among three models it is clearly indicated in the text e g LASER CLASS 3170MS only Welcome 1 1 Main Features Improved speed Your fax unit is equipped with the ITU T standard V 34 mode which enables transmission speeds up to 33 600 bps more than double the rate of older G3 fax models Ultra High Quality UHQ image Canon s ultra high quality image processing produces excellent reproductions in documents you send and copy Subaddres Full support of ITU T subaddresses and passwords You can employ ITU T subaddresses and passwords F La fox La lt to communicate not only with other Canon faxes but i i fax machines of other manufacturers as well Laser beam printer DA Quiet clean laser technology guarantees quality a reproduction Cut sheets OK You don t need special recording Large paper capacity A large paper capacity means less time spent loading paper
242. ked Questions Chapter 15 Department Access Code Frequently Asked Questions Q O z G O a t Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 49 Confidential Mailboxes Relay Broadcast Groups Group No Groun Name Password Subaddress RX Password two digit p four digit Max 20 digit Max 20 digit 15 50 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 Memory Boxes Box No Box Name Password Subaddress TX Password RX Password two digit four digit Max 20 digit Max 20 digit Max 20 digit Polling Boxes TX Password Max 20 digit Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 51 Questions Oo wt O N oqa co gt 5 TS cs a Li 15 52 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 16 Summary of Important Settings This chapter contains a comprehensive list of all the settings you can perform with the DATA REGISTRATION menus The settings that determine how the fax unit operates are called user data settings These important settings can be switched on and off to custom ize operation of the fax unit L Opening the Data Registration Menu cc eeeseseseseeseteneeseneeeeseneees 16 2 i Summary ot User Data Settings monni iA 16 3 eu ISG ENDE onia ia suchen oseauadtennanaceonesasasasmoscnannmczeisata 16 4 A Report oeno Sern n A 16 7 Lal EX Send Seine Ss sis acardeacerpentecncaedsaases
243. l a mailbox 1 Open the CONFID MAILBOX menu gt 10 2 Using CONFID MAILBOX 1 SETUP FILE Goa w Q Gx 0 v 2 ya m SS S A v C J J 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below CONFID MAILBOX 3 DELETE FILE DELETE FILE SET BOX OO Set 3 Press Set Chapter 10 Using Confidential Mailboxes 10 7 4 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number of the mailbox you want to delete Then press Set DELETE FILE PASSWORD a a 5 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four digit password protecting the mailbox you want to delete Then press Set DELETE FILE FILE DELETED Press Stop to return to standby 0 I 4 o gt m Cc S w D lt e fe n lt fes fe on CCF 0 I 4 o gt m S w D lt e O n lt ies O on OOOO COCO A A 5 ON Receiving a Confidential Document When the fax receives a confidential document with a subaddress or subaddress and password that match the subaddress password settings for your confidential mailbox the document is stored in the mailbox After the fax unit receives a document in a confidential mailbox it displays a message and prints a report unless this feature has been turned off PRINTING REPORT 12 31 1999 13 34 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 1001 2A 2A AACA RCAC AC AC AC Ce Ce oe ee He ee 2 Kk Kk kk ok kkk CONFID RX REPORT kokk ELETE AC AC ACC Ce ee ee Hee 2 2 Kk 2
244. lay below USER DATA LIST 2 SENDER S NAME 14 6 Printing Reports and Lists Chapter 14 Set 5 Press Set After you press Set the report starts printing PRINTING REPORT Sender Name List 12 31 1999 13 38 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 1001 EEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEE 2 ak ak ak ao KK SENDER NAME kkk SRR ICC Co 2 ak ak ak ao and Lists 01 R LOUIS 02 S ROBERTS 03 R SEAL 04 B THOMAS 05 F DILLON 06 B DWYER C J be fe Q 3 a 5 t J i A Chapter 14 Printing Reports and Lists 14 7 Reports Reports contain information about past fax transactions The Activity Report or the Activity Management Report prints a list of the past 40 transactions and other reports report information about transactions as they occur Here is a summary of some of the abbreviations used in activity reports ST TIME Represents the time the last attempt was made to transmit a document USAGE T Represents the amount of time it took during the last attempt to transmit Note that the usage time does not reflect the total usage time used to transmit all pages of the document when a retry occurs By printing an ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT REPORT and matching the transaction number of the TX REPORT with the transac tion number on the ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT REPORT you can know exactly how many attempts were made to send the document how many pages were sent each attempt as well as the usage time for each attempt The usage time is
245. lay of the other party s fax unit during document transmissions and appear in printed reports and lists Follow this procedure to register telephone numbers for both lines connected to the Dual line Upgrade Kit a Ait 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press ff aS Data Registration Data REGISTRATION paka 1 DATA REGISTRATION a Set 2 Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS C J J 3 Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 8 DUAL LINE OPTIONS After the Dual line Upgrade Kit is installed this item is added to the DATA REGISTRATION menu C3 4 Press Set DUAL LINE OPTIONS 1 2nd LINE TEL Set C 5 Press Set 2nd LINE TEL TELs Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 57 Set Set 2 58 Setting Up Use these buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the telephone number for Line 2 Data entry buttons 0 9 Enters a number Space Enters a space spaces are optional Delete Deletes the rightmost digit of the number you are entering so you can enter a new digit Clear Clears the entire entry if you want to start again You can register a number of up to 20 digits After you enter the telephone number for Line 2 press Set 2nd LINE TEL DATA ENTRY OK DUAL LINE OPTIONS 2 2nd LINE TYPE Press Set 2nd LINE TYPE TOUCH TONE Use the search buttons to alternate the settings and display the setting that
246. lines for Registering Information Always keep these points in mind while you are using the menus L If you pause and do not press a button for 60 seconds the fax returns to the standby mode automatically You must then start the proce dure again from the beginning L If your fax is set to manual receiving and the fax rings while you are registering information pick up the handset If you hear a slow beep tone the other party is trying to send you a document Press Stop and press Start Scan to receive the document Using the Menus x 3 s ihn pe N 5 p J 3 Lo The fax employs a menu system you can use to register important information or to set up important features Here we describe how to display and operate these menus The content and purpose of each menu is described in another chapter 16 3 M K 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels so you can p see the operation panel buttons D e 2 Press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Set C3 3 Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 5 co Set Data Registration A 4 Press the search buttons to display the name of the next or previ ous menu title DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS DATA REGISTRATION 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS Note that displaying menu names with the search buttons is rotational If you press W with the last menu name displayed the display ro
247. long as they too support ITU T standard subaddress password transactions Memory broadcast Allows you to send one scanned document to a maximum of 210 destina tions with One touch Dialing Coded Speed Dialing and regular dialing Just dial the numbers sequentially when you send a document If you must do this frequently register the numbers for Group Dialing Memory file A document stored in the memory is also called a memory file Memory list See document memory list Memory lock Usually a document is printed as soon as it is received but the memory lock feature forces all documents to be received in memory until you enter a password to print them This feature prevents printed documents from piling up on the paper output tray when the office is unattended After you return to the office you can print all documents stored in the memory Memory reception password Protects all documents received and stored in the memory when the memory reception feature is turned on The memory reception password is a four digit number 0000 9999 that you should safeguard to prevent access to your documents stored in the fax memory This password unlocks the memory to print all documents received with memory lock turned on See memory lock Memory sending Scanning the document into the memory before the facsimile dials the number and sends it Scanning is fast and you only have to wait until the original document is scanned not until it i
248. m the PIN code may be entered either before the number as a prefix or after the number as a suffix If your PBX requires a PIN Personal Identification Number to connect to an outside line the fax machine can be set up with the user data settings to prompt you for a PIN code every time you dial Polling transmission Polling means one facsimile unit requests another to send a document This is useful when the sending party the party with the original docu ment is not in the office but the document must be sent out The receiving party dials the fax holding the original and requests that it be sent In other words the receiver always polls the sender Before using the polling feature you have to set up polling boxes Printable area The area of the document that can actually be reproduced and printed on the recording paper by the receiving fax The printing area is smaller than the paper Printer Board I The optional Printer Board I enables your fax to operate as a printer Printer Board I is a standard feature for the LASER CLASS 3170MS Pulse See rotary pulse R Reduction mode The fax unit s automatic feature that slightly reduces the received image to allow room at the top of the page for the sender s ID information You can also reduce the size of large incoming documents using the RX REDUCTION option Registering A process by which you place fax or telephone numbers and names in the fax unit s memory for auto
249. matic dialing so that you can save time dialing frequently called destinations Glossary Glossary Regular dialing Dialing a number with the numeric buttons Use regular dialing to dial a number that is not registered for any of the automatic dialing methods Press Hook then use the numeric buttons to dial the number you want to call Relay broadcast See relay sending Relay sending Also called relay broadcast You can send a document once to a fax ina distant location and then have that fax relay your document to several other destinations in the same area Remote receiving ID The number you dial on an extension to start receiving a fax The default remote receiving ID is 25 so just dial 25 and then hang up the handset of the extension telephone Remote reception Allows you to receive a fax transmission with an extension telephone To start receiving a fax dial the remote receiving ID 25 Reports This is a list of reports printed by the facsimile e Activity Management Report TX or RX You can set the fax to print a report every time you send or receive a document You can also set the fax to print part of the document on the report to remind you of the content of the document To turn printing these activity reports on and off use the user settings e Activity Report Provides a record of the last 40 sending and receiving transactions You can print out activity management reports manually whenever you want to review
250. memory OFF No alarm sounds when the fax runs out of toner or recording paper during document reception ON An audible alarm sounds when the document is stored temporarily in the memory Memory receiving is turned off If the fax runs out of toner or recording paper during a document reception the remainder of the document is not saved in the memory The other party must re send the document Print a footer in the lower right corner of every received page The footer contains the date day time received transaction number and page number 3 13 No RX FOOTER prints at the bottom of the page Turns on printing of an RX FOOTER at the bottom of every page you receive Summary of Important Settings 16 15 Go fe i G E E N e G Pe ihn fe Q z iz Ca 5 t sbs p 3 N Fax s Printer Set Data Registration Set COL 16 16 Summary of Important Settings Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Press the search buttons to display 5 FAX S PRINTER SET DATA REGISTRATION 5 FAX S PRINTER SET Press Set FAX S PRINTER SET 1 USE MP TRAY Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change Chapter 16 Default settings are in bold 1 USE MP TRAY OFF ON 2 OF RX COPIES 3 SELECT CASSETTE 1 CASSETTE SWA
251. mplete a bank transaction without your account number and your personal identification number you cannot complete a memory box facsimile transaction if the subaddress and password do not match A subaddress or password can be up to 20 digits long and consists of numbers or spaces Using the Memory Features 8 11 Q K j 5 H Memory Features Before You Create Memory Boxes Before you set up a memory box there are a few things you should know about the other party s fax machine to ensure efficient transactions You have to know how the other party is using the subaddress and password L Ifthe other party has set a subaddress and password you must register both a subaddress and password for the memory box L If the other party has set a subaddress only then you must also register a matching subaddress L If the other party has set a password only inform them that they must register a subaddress or a subaddress and password Both fax units must register an ITU T subaddress Ai For the most efficient use of the memory box register the numbers of all lt parties who will be receiving your documents or sending you documents Note for a One touch or Coded Speed Dialing number When You Create a Memory Box This is a brief summary of what to do when you create or change settings for a memory box Access settings SET BOX 00 PASSWORD Main settings 1 FILE NAME 2 PASSWORD 3 SUBADDRESS
252. n your unit for speed dialing buttons 414 2 Ask the originator if they would like to receive a report of successful transmission after your fax relays the document Make sure the relay feature on your fax is turned on Follow the procedure in this section to set up your fax as a relay unit When your fax is the relay unit it receives the document from the originator and relays it to several other destinations Using a Relay Network 9 3 Network gt amp Q es D D Setting Your Fax as a Relay Unit Follow this procedure to set your fax to participate in a relay network as a relay unit Data Registration Set Set 9 4 Using a Relay Network 1 Open the RELAY TX GROUP menu Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels and press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 6 FILE SETTINGS Press Set FILE SETTINGS 1 CONFID MAILBOX Press the search buttons until you see the display below FILE SETTINGS 2 RELAY TX GROUP Press Set RELAY TX GROUP 1 SETUP FILE Chapter 9 2 Give the relay group a number from 00 to 99 Set C93 Press Set SETUP FILE SET RLY TX GROUP 00 __ Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the two digit 3 relay group number and press Set NO SETUP FILE 9 1 GROUP DIAL NAME
253. nal Dual line transactions If you have installed the Dual line Upgrade Kit and both lines are in use at the same time press the search buttons to switch the display so you can view either transaction in progress 2 54 6 14 Sending Documents Chapter 6 Direct Sending The fax dials the number connects the call and then scans and sends the document one page at a time Direct sending is slower than memory sending but because this method bypasses memory you can send a document ahead of other documents stored in the memory I Direct sending scans and sends each page one at a time L With direct sending you can watch each page as it is scanned and sent L Although direct sending is slower than memory sending you can use direct sending when you need to send an urgent document ahead of other documents stored in the memory L You can also use direct sending when the memory is full and there is no space to hold another document in memory 1 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can also select a sender s name with the TTI Selector 6 6 D S Q V Documents Chapter 6 Sending Documents 6 15 Direct TX 2 Press Direct TX o The Direct TX lamp lights The fax is now in the direct sending mode 3 Dial the other party s fax number Der Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number gt 6 7 if not Press a One t
254. nce facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunc tions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas xi CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electri cian as appropriate This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada WARNING FOR THE ETHERNET BOARD EB 52 FX IN STALLED This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada xii Preface IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Preface Read these safety instructions and refer to them later if you have any questions Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the LASER CLASS 3170 Series Place the LASER CLASS 3170 Series on a le
255. ncorrect subaddress password Contact the other party and confirm that you are using the correct subaddress password COMMUNICATING You tried to use direct sending while the fax was sending another PLEASE WAIT document Wait until the transmission is finished then try again 15 38 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 MESSAGE WHAT IT MEANS DOCUMENT TOO LONG The document is longer than 39 4 inches 1 meter Cut the document into smaller sheets Reduce them on a copy machine if necessary Then paste them on standard letter or A4 size sheets for scanning ENTER DAC You have to enter department access code to send document HANG UP PHONE The transaction has completed but the handset is not sitting completely on its cradle Make sure the handset is sitting completely on its cradle MEMORY FULL The memory is full If the document has been received in the memory print the document 8 6 If documents have been received in confidential mailboxes print them 10 8 If documents have been received in memory boxes print them 8 25 Check the content of the memory and if there are documents in the memory that you do not need delete them from the memory 8 9 If you tried to send a document with Ultra Fine Super Fine or Text Photo try sending by direct sending or set to Fine or Text and send by memory sending MEMORY FULL The memory is full Wait until the current document tran
256. nd passwords L Perform the procedure to register a telephone number for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing 4 6 4 15 If the speed dialing buttons are already set up perform the procedure to change the One touch or Coded Speed Dialing settings 4 6 4 15 L When you do the speed dialing settings turn on the OPTIONAL SETTING feature and select TX TYPE Select ORIG RELAY TX and then set the ITU T subaddress and password 4 11 4 21 Confirm that the other party is set up properly to relay documents received from your fax Your fax cannot confirm whether or not the other fax has been set up properly for relaying a document sent from your fax Sending with the Relay Broadcast Button Follow this procedure to send the original document for a relay broad cast with the Relay Broadcast button F You can set only one destination 1 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can also select a sender s name with the TTI Selector 6 6 9 12 Using a Relay Network Chapter 9 Relay Broadcast Set L Chapter 9 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels and press Relay Broadcast ORIG RELAY TX SELECT LOCATIONS TEL Dial the relay units Use regular dialing 6 7 if not Press a One touch Speed Dialing button or press Coded Dial followed by a three digit code 4 29 4 31 if not Dial the number with directory dialing 4 35 TEL
257. nd transferred documents are not printed at the transfer unit ON A copy of every document received and transferred is printed at the transfer unit OF RX COPIES To enter the number of copies 01 99 use the numeric keypad to enter the number or press the search buttons to increase or decrease the number and press Set Turning the Transfer Mode ON and OFF You can use this procedure to move the fax into and out of the transfer mode if the timer has not been set to switch the fax in and out of the transfer mode automatically If the timer has been set to move the fax into and out of the transfer mode automatically you can still use this procedure to put the fax in the transfer mode before the timer switches the fax into the transfer mode Turning Transfer Mode ON Follow this procedure to turn the transfer mode on manually at any time M aS 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press ES Transfer Transfer C PASSWORD 2 Ifyou have registered a password use the buttons on the numeric 210 keypad to enter your four digit password then press Set 588 90G The fax is now in the transfer mode and will transfer documents to the destinations you specified in the transfer setup file Chapter 7 Receiving Documents 7 17 of a EF 05 9 6 26 A Turning Transfer Mode OFF Follow this procedure to turn the transfer mode off manually at any time TRANSFER M aS Transer 1 Open all three
258. ndicator should be on 2 Every time you hear the telephone ring pick up the handset 1 If you hear someone on the line you can talk if not an If you hear a slow beep tone this means another fax is trying to send you a document Chapter 7 Receiving Documents 7 7 of Ec EF os a 26 xA Start Scan 3 Press Start Scan to start receiving the document Then hang up the handset by placing it back in the handset cradle The fax will start to receive the document The fax will make a beeping sound if the handset is not com pletely on its handset cradle This is called the offhook alarm The offhook alarm can be turned off 716 6 Receiving a Document Manually with an Extension Telephone ve 20sManual RX C f an You can connect one extension telephone to the facsimile unit 2 40 When the telephone rings with the fax in the manual receive mode you can use the extension telephone to start receiving the document without walking over to the fax machine This is called remote receiving Make sure the extension telephone is connected properly 2 40 Check the operation panel and make sure the fax is in the manual receive mode The Manual RX indicator should be on If it is off press Manual RX to turn on the indicator and switch the fax into the manual receive mode When the connected extension phone rings pick up the handset If you hear someone on the line you can start talking to the othe
259. nding just press the Program button and a transmission report will print after the document is sent Assigns the Program button to the functions of the Report button Whenever you need to print a report all you have to do is press the Program button This saves you the effort of opening all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels to press the Report button Set up the Resolution Contrast or Document buttons for sending special documents and then store the settings under the Program button The next time you need to set them before a document transmission you can set them with a single button press If you had the optional stamp feature installed for you this feature is available If you select STAMP you can turn the stamp feature on and off without opening all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels to press the Stamp button Chapter 12 Set Program A v L Set A v Set Chapter 12 To set transmission report feature Press the search buttons until you see the display below PROGRAM KEY PRINT REPORT Press Set To use this feature press the Program button before you dial to have a report printed for the transaction To set up the Report button feature Press the search buttons until you see the display below PROGRAM KEY REPORT Press Set Now any time you need a report press the Program button Use the search buttons to choose the report you want Then press Set REPORT 1 ACTIVITY REPO
260. nds and a report prints unless this feature has been turned off 16 8 PRINTING REPORT D D Q V Documents Chapter 6 Sending Documents 6 9 Dialing Long Distance with Regular Dialing Follow this procedure to dial a long distance number and send a docu ment with regular dialing 1 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 e You cannot select a sender s name after you press Hook or pick up the handset e You cannot insert a pause when you dial using the numeric keypad after pressing Hook or after picking up the handset Press Hook if you want to use manual sending After you press Hook the In Use lamp blinks green and you will be able to hear the dial tone If you know the other party s fax is set to automatic receiving go to the next step 3 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the long distance number LA If you did not press Hook in step 2 you may have to insert a pause into a j number for long distance dialing 74 2 For details about the location Note and length of the pause contact your local telephone company or local authorized Canon dealer TEL 011p81 6 10 Sending Documents Chapter 6 ee 4 Dial the remainder of the number then press Start Scan After a 2 few moments the call will connect VO eee amp 2 Start Scan Ai If you did not press Hook in step 2 you may have to in
261. ne during any phase of user operation CDRH Regulations A Caution xvi The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2 1976 These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States USE OF CONTROLS ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED IN THIS USER S GUIDE MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE The label is attached to the laser scanner unit inside the fax and is not in a user access area DANGER Invisible laser radiation when open AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM CAUTION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM ATTENTION RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTENZIONE RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBILE IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCION RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO VARO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NAKYMATTOMALLE LASERS TEILYLLE L KATSO S TEESEEN VARNING OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR OPPNAD BETRAKTA EJ STRALEN ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASER STR LING NAR DENNE ER BEN UNDG BESTR LING ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRALING N R DEKSEL PNES UNNG
262. ne line a distortion or blank area can occur in the document received by the other party ECM divides one page into a number of blocks and checks for lost data block by block When some data is lost in a certain block ECM repeats transmission from the begin ning of that block after confirming that all data within the block can be transmitted successfully In this way ECM guarantees that a good image can be received at the receiving end ECM is very effective in countries where the telephone lines are in poor condition There may be occasions when you want to turn ECM off For instance when you feel the transac tion speed is extremely slow you can turn ECM off Error lamp Blinks red when a paper jam occurs or the fax is running out of toner or paper F Fine Use this setting for documents with very small characters and lines It is twice the Standard resolution G G3 Group 3 fax machines defined by CCITT ITU T Uses encoding schemes to transmit image data while reducing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted thus reducing transmission time G3 fax machines can transmit one page in less than one minute Encoding schemes for G3 fax machines are Modified Huffman MH Modified Read MR Modified Modified Read MMR and JBIG Group dialing Group Dialing allows you to dial up to 199 previously registered One touch Speed Dialing or Coded Speed Dialing numbers together as a group This means you only need to press a One
263. nformation while the remaining pages are being scanned This feature is called Quick on line TX and can be turned off and on 16 11 When the fax sends a document messages report the following information about the transmission Transaction number TRANSMIT 0031 TRANSACTION NUMBER SCANNING DOC P001 A transaction number is assigned to every document sent from your fax starting with 0001 up to 4999 When the number 4999 is reached numbering will begin again from 0001 Chapter 6 Sending Documents 6 13 D S Q O Documents Other party s fax number and name 12 31 1999 FRI 23 01 DIALING 12 31 1999 FRI 23 01 123 4567 12 31 1999 FRI 23 01 CALLING 12 31 1999 FRI 23 01 TX RX NO 0031 12 31 1999 FRI 23 01 CANON CANADA Displayed only if the other party s telephone number and name are registered for the speed dialing button used to dial the number ECM transmission mode 12 31 1999 FRI 23 05 ECM TX P 001 Unless this feature has been turned off the document is sent in the ECM error correction mode for transmission 16 10 Successful completion 127 3171999 FRI 238 05 TRANSMITTING OK 12 31 1999 FRI 23 05 TX RX NO 0031 Alternating messages tell you the transmission was successful The message will disappear after approximately 10 seconds Transmission error If a transmission error occurs read the error message in the display and look it up in the error message table 15 38 Optio
264. ng Follow these simple procedures to keep the fax clean and operating smoothly Before you clean the fax print all documents received in the memory Cleaning the Fax Unit 1 Before you clean the fax disconnect the power cord of the fax unit from the power source 2 Moisten a soft cloth with water and a small amount of diluted mild detergent Ai To prevent damage to the surface of the fax unit never use thinner lt benzene alcohol acetone or any other organic solvent to clean the fax Note CN 15 24 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 Cleaning the Transfer Guide Area 1 Disconnect the power cord of the fax unit from the power source 2 Lift the document feeder tray the document output tray and the upper output tray 3 Open the printer cover and remove the toner cartridge Store the cartridge in its original protective bag to avoid exposure to light Questions 3 Oo wt O A oqa co gt 5E 2s ss a Li Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 25 4 Using a soft clean cloth wipe any paper dust off the black plate of the transfer guide TRANSFER GUIDE 5 While holding the green lever flip the transfer guide up Wipe the edge of the transfer guide with a soft clean cloth to remove toner and paper dust from both sides of the transfer guide GREEN LEVER TRANSFER GUIDE 15 26 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 1
265. ng receiving copying and other operations Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 3 Operation Buttons One touch panels open Press to enter a plus sign in a fax number 2 Delayed Confidential Relay Registration Transmission Polling Mailbox Broadcast Pin Code _ _ _ _ _ Displays the PIN code message so you can enter the PIN code for dialing through a PBX Memory Memory Memory Box Reception Transfer Reference Report TTI Selector Enters a registered sender s name to appear at the top of the document you are sending I Stamp Option i Subaddress Allows you to enter an ITU T subaddress so you can send a document with a subaddress Password Allows you to enter an ITU T password so you can send a document with a password a Y Search buttons Scrolls the display so you can see other options and selections in the menus during data registration lt gt Cursor buttons Moves the cursor left or right during data registration Space Enters a space between letters and numbers on the LCD display when you are registering information Delete During a step when you are registering or entering a number press this button to delete the number This button deletes number entries only Data Registration Memory Reception Starts data registration for speed dialing sender information and Switches the fax in and out of the memory lock mode In the other important settings for sending and receiving memory lock mode
266. ng a Polne BOK ss sis cbuccutnae dap cutis ystlantgedeesMededed ann ennncuceshee 11 23 Chapter12 Other Special Features cosinor onies ensesine caions n nieas 12 1 Usine the Telephone suseni a 12 2 Tone Dialing owa Pulse Line sscciscctalesseestanssseesti estmeseadueenasiteerwnesgiarees 12 3 Setting and Using the Program Button sssssseseesessesrseereeesereresrereseees 12 5 Setting Up and Using the Optional Stamp Feature eee 12 8 Setting Up the Stamp Feature s s senessssssesessesesessesesessereseseeseseseseess 12 8 Turning the Stamp Feature ON OFF sssessseeeeeeeeesierrsrsrese 12 10 How the Fax Operates with Default Settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 12 12 Chapter13 Restricting Use of the Fax escini iadesinin 13 1 Contents xxi Setting and Using the System Settings Password seseseeeeees 13 2 Setting the System Settings Password cecssceeeseeeeteeeeteeeeaeees 13 2 Changing or Canceling the System Settings Password 13 4 Restricting Pax Operation noiera E 13 6 Betting Operation REStriCtlONS asesan a 13 6 Operating the Fax with Restrictions ON cesseseseeseeeeeeeeeees 13 11 Sending a Document with Restrictions ON seers 13 11 Making a Copy with Restrictions ON ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 12 Printing a Report with Restrictions ON s es 13 13 Using the Telephone with Restrictions ON eeseeseeeees 13 13 Turning Restrictions OFF and ON sesvdisssteseysessveratiasestnaneenosaes 13
267. ng button that you want to register If a number is already registered for a button you will see that number displayed If a button is registered for Group Dialing you will see GROUP DIAL 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL 10 CJ With the number of the button you want to register displayed on the LCD press Set 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL 1 TELEPHONE NUMBER Set C3 3 Press Set pe c o E Q Fr tez 2 a A 7 o gt TELEPHONE NUMBER TELS Enter the telephone number number 6 O L Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the fax I To enter a space press Space Spaces are optional and ignored 0 G during dialing L After you have entered the number if you see that one of the digits is incorrect press the left cursor key lt 4 to move the cursor to the digit you want to correct and press Delete Then enter the correct number Chapter 4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 7 L If you make a mistake press Clear to erase the number and start again TELEPHONE NUMBER TEL 123 4567_ TELEPHONE NUMBER DATA ENTRY OK Set C3 4 Press Set 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL 2 NAME Set 5 Enter a name C Press Set NAME A Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name for the number up to 16 characters long 3 7 9 NAME A O CANON U S A NY 6 Press Set NAME A DATA ENTRY OK 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL 3 OPTIONAL SETTING This completes the minimum settings for registering a One touc
268. ng for tered for this button letter group is displayed 0 TEL 123 4567 10 PACIFIC BEACH 6 For example if you press PRS the first name and number regis pe c o E Q Fr tez 2 a A 7 o gt Chapter 4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 35 a 7 4 Press the directory search buttons on the front of the operation panel to display the other names and numbers registered for the button letter group TELS 123 4567 12 SOUTHWEST L The names for One touch Speed Dial are prefixed with two digits and the names for Coded Speed Dial numters are prefixed with an asterisk and three digits J When you reach the last number and name registered for the letter group you will return to the first number and name in the group L To see numbers and names registered for other letter groups ABC for example you will have to press the ABC button on the numeric keypad L After you press a button if you see NO TEL in the display this means there are no names that begin with a letter of the button you just pressed L After you press the directory search keys if the display does not change this means only one name and number is regis tered for the button you just pressed ace 5 With the telephone number you want to dial displayed press Start Scan to start the document transmission TRANSMIT 0031 SCANNING DOC P 001 4 36 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 5 U
269. ng on a Single Line Follow this procedure to cancel receiving a document 1 Visually check the display to confirm that a document is being received 12 31 1999 FRI 12 20 RECEIVE 5012 sop 2 To cancel the reception press Stop The following message is displayed CANCEL DURING TX RX YES NO or 3 Press to cancel receiving the document or press to let receiving continue After you press an alarm sounds document reception is canceled and the following messages are displayed 12 31 1999 FRI 12 25 STOP KEY PRESSED 12 31 1999 FRI 12 25 TX RX NO 5012 If the receive report feature is on or set to PRINT ERROR ONLY an RX REPORT also prints 16 8 PRINTING REPORT Chapter 7 Receiving Documents 7 11 of Et EF os aT 26 xA 12 31 1999 12 50 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 1001 INCOMPLETE RECEPTION TX RX NO CONNECTION TEL 1 213 978 3314 CONNECTION ID BELZER INC ST TIME 12 31 12 49 USAGE T 00 20 PGS RESULT Then the fax returns to standby To Cancel Receiving on a Dual Line If you have installed the Dual line Upgrade Kit and both lines are in use at the same time and you want to select a transmission which you want to cancel follow this procedure A vy C J 1 Press the search buttons to view the displays for each transaction 12 31 1999 FRI 12 20 RECEIVE 12 31 1999 FRI 12 20 RECEIVE If you are using direct sending you cannot change the line 2 Pres
270. nter function When you use it as a paper supply for fax you can load letter legal or A4 size paper only L For high quality printings we recommend using Canon standard 17 24 Ib 64 90g m weight paper L Use of print media not meeting the paper s requirements may cause severe paper jams or result in excessive mechanical wear of the fax L Do not use the following paper in the paper cassettes Moist paper Paper that is wavy curled or damaged Folded clipped or stapled paper Paper containing materials that melt vaporize offset discolor or emit dangerous fumes at a temperature of 374 F 190 C or higher li To avoid paper curling do not open paper packs until you are ready to load the paper in the fax unit Store unused paper from opened packs in a cool dry location L Let the paper run out before you refill the paper cassettes Avoid mixing new paper with paper remaining in the paper cassettes Do not load different sizes of paper in the paper cassettes at the same time e If a printed page comes out of the fax all curled up you can correct the problem by turning over the paper stack in the paper cassettes so that the bottom sheet in the stack is now at the top If the leading edge of the paper is curled straighten it out as much as possible before loading it into the paper cassettes e Do not set the paper size guides so tight that the paper stack bends Do not set the paper size guides so loose
271. ntil you see the display below TX SETTINGS 2 MID PAUSE SET Set 4 Press Set MID PAUSE SET 02SEC st 5 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a new time You Q can enter a number from 01 to 15 seconds Then press Set 909 DOD SO ys 6 Press Stop to return to standby gt 4 4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 What is Speed Dialing Speed dialing allows you streamline and customize dialing procedures by registering a telephone number and other important settings so you can start a document transmission while pressing only a few buttons The three methods of speed dialing include One touch Speed Dialing One touch Speed Dialing allows you to start a document transmission by pressing only one button You can register up to 72 destinations for One touch Speed Dialing The first group of buttons numbered 1 to 25 are on the operation panel Open the first panel to see buttons 26 to 50 then the second panel to see the last set of buttons 51 to 72 Coded Speed Dialing Coded Speed Dialing allows you to start a document transmission by pressing the Coded Dial button followed by a three digit code of your choice While Coded Speed Dialing requires you to press more buttons it allows you to register up to 128 numbers Group Dialing Group Dialing allows you to dial a group of registered One touch or Coded Speed Dialing fax numbers By registering each group for One touch or Coded Speed dialin
272. o enter a two digit code for the box Then press Set SETUP FILE 1 FILE NAME P If the other party s fax does not support ITU T subaddress password mn transactions set the box number to 00 so the other party can poll your Note fax unit and receive the document 11 16 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 11 4 Create a file name to store the document in the memory where it will wait to be polled by other fax units Set C Press Set FILE NAME A Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name of up to 24 characters 3 7 FILE NAME A 4 O 9 CANON TOKYO Set O Press Set SETUP FILE 2 PASSWORD A v CJC 5 Ifyou don t want to set password press the search buttons to go to the next step if not Set TE If you want to enter a password to protect the polling box setup file Press Set PASSWORD Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four digit password S PASSWORD 7 9 1147 2 ge 5 E Q gt 28 5 2 ir 3 A Chapter 11 Setting Up and Using Polling 11 17 Set C Press Set SETUP FILE 3 SUBADDRESS Ai If you set the box number to 00 for a party whose fax unit does not support ITU T subaddress password transactions you do not have to Note register 3 SUBADDRESS and 4 TX PASSWORD Just press the search buttons to display 5 ERASE AFTER TX then go to step 8 6 Press Set SUBADDRESS This is the ITU T subaddress An ITU T subaddr
273. oe He Ho ok oe ok kkk RX REPORT TCC CAC CAC HCC ee oe oe ae He Heo oe ook RECEPTION OK TX RX NO 5008 CONNECTION TEL 1 213 978 3314 CONNECTION ID BELZER INC ST TIME 12 31 14 07 USAGE T 00 17 PGS 1 RESULT OK Confidential Receive Report When the fax receives a confidential document it displays a message and prints a report RECEIVED IN MAILBOX 12 31 1999 13 34 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 7 001 eC A eH He He ee ee 2 2 2 2 ek kk kk ak kee ak kkk CONFID RX REPORT kkk EEEE He HH eC ee 2 2 2 2 ek kk kK ak ak ee ak CONFID MBOX CONFID MBOX NAME TX RX NO CONNECTION TEL 1 213 978 3314 SUBADDRESS 1111 CONNECTION ID BELZER INC ST TIME 12 31 13 33 USAGE T 00 18 PGS 1 RESULT OK Printing this report can be turned off with the User Data Settings 16 8 Chapter 14 Printing Reports and Lists 14 15 C Pe ihe fe Q 3 a 5 t s i A Fale My eS Memory Box Report The fax prints a Memory Box Report as soon as a document is received in a memory box 12 31 1999 13 29 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 7 001 ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok OK Ok ok ok ok ok ok ok OK ok K Ok ok OK ok ok xxx MEMORY BOX REPORT Kk ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok OK ok OK Ok ok Ok ok ok BOX FILE NAME TX RX NO CONNECTION TEL 1 213 978 3314 SUBADDRESS 0000 CONNECTION ID BELZER INC ST TIME 12 31 13 29 USAGE T 00 18 PGS 1 RESULT OK
274. of a EF 05 9 6 26 A Canceling the Transfer Settings Follow this procedure to delete the transfer setup file and cancel the transfer settings 1 Open the TRANSFER menu gt 7 14 TRANSFER 1 SETUP FILE C JC 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below TRANSFER 3 DELETE FILE Set C3 3 Press Set DELETE FILE PASSWORD If you have not set the password you can skip the next step ae 4 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four digit 2 z password and press Set O 3 DELETE FILE oes FILE DELETED OOO Stop 5 Press Stop to return to standby O 7 20 Receiving Documents Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 8 Using the Memory Features This chapter shows you how to use the memory features of the fax unit Some operations require that a document resides in the memory before it is sent For example if you scan a document and set the timer it will wait in the memory until it is time for the fax to send the document If you scan a document for polling sending the document will wait in the memory until it is requested for sending by a polling request from another fax While such documents are residing in memory you can view their transaction numbers list them in a printout delete them before they are sent or re route them to another destination J When the Fax Displays RECEIVED IN MEMORY ossec 8 2 L Displaying the Transaction History 0 0 0 scssscecessesseceseesseese
275. of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press p Transfer x i PASSWORD If you have registered a password use the numeric keypad to ABC DEF 2 enter your four digit password then press Set O 12 31 1999 FRI 08 30 OPER__ SYMBOLS OOGO ee OO The fax is now in the standby mode and is ready for normal operation Changing the Transfer Settings Follow this procedure to change settings in the transfer setup file 1 Open the TRANSFER menu gt 7 14 TRANSFER 1 SETUP FILE C 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below TRANSFER 2 CHANGE DATA Set 3 Press Set CHANGE DATA PASSWORD If you have not set the password you can skip the next step 7 18 Receiving Documents Chapter 7 C3 4 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four digit password protecting the transfer setup file Then press Set OPER__ SYMBOLS C JC 5 Press the search buttons to display the desired setting CHANGE DATA 1 FILE NAME CHANGE DATA 6 PRINT RX DOC Set C 6 With the setting you want to change on the display press Set 7 To change the settings follow the same procedure you used to set up the transfer setup file 47 15 e To delete any settings press Clear and press Set e To change the password enter the old password first and press Set Note Then enter the new password ts 8 Press Stop to return to standby vi Chapter 7 Receiving Documents 7 19
276. of the pin code setting 713 22 is OFF you can operate as described below 1 Set the document on the fax machine DOCUMENT READY 2 Enter the telephone number MEES 123 4567 3 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels press Pin Code then press Set TELS 123 4567C Set 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each number in a sequential broadcast Start Scan 5 Press Start Scan ENTER PIN CODE a 6 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the PIN code GHL kL MNO ENTER PIN CODE O sles sk ok ok ok kk LOLO The PIN code is not displayed as it is entered ETOO 7 Press Set to start the transmission 13 24 Restricting Use of the Fax Chapter 13 Dialing with a PIN Code before the Number When NECESS PIN CODE of the pin code setting 13 22 is OFF you can operate as described below OPER__ SYMBOLS Start Scan ay Qe U D n Cc lt x lt R OPER__ SYMBOLS Set L Restricting Use of the Fax 13 25 Chapter 13 Set the document on the fax machine DOCUMENT READY Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels and press Pin Code TELS C Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the other party s fax number Then press Set TELs C123 4567 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each number in a sequential broadcast Press Start Scan ENTER PIN CODE Enter the PIN code with the buttons on the nume
277. on use of fax 13 6 system password 13 2 turning restrictions off on 13 14 using handset option with restrictions on 13 13 send report See TX REPORT 14 12 16 8 send settings AUTO REDIAL 16 11 BATCH TX 16 11 ECM TX 16 10 listed 16 10 MID PAUSE SET 16 10 PIN CODE 16 12 QUICK ON LINE TX 16 11 TIME OUT 16 11 TX STAMP option 16 12 sender information defined 3 12 registering 3 13 RX footer 3 13 RX PAGE FOOTER 16 15 setting 3 13 unit name 3 15 16 5 unit telephone number 3 14 16 5 Sender Name List sample 14 7 sender names changing 3 20 deleting 3 20 printing list 14 6 registering 3 18 selecting before sending 6 6 sender s name setting 16 5 sending adjusting scanning settings 6 4 BATCH TX 16 11 16 34 canceling 6 8 confidential document with speed dialing 10 10 confidential documents 10 10 contrast 6 5 direct sending 6 15 document from memory box 8 24 document to relay unit 9 10 document type 6 5 document with restrictions on 13 11 manual sending 6 17 memory box 8 25 memory full 6 15 memory sending 6 12 more than one location 6 22 polling 11 15 preparing document 6 2 QUICK ON LINE TX 16 11 re sending document in memory 6 19 re sending to different destination 8 8 regular dialing 6 7 relaying document with speed dialing 9 12 resolution 6 5 selecting sender name 6 6 sequential broadcasting 6 22 setting document on fax 6 3 I 8 setting timer 6 2
278. only the person with the correct password to read You cannot use the conventional Canon confidential mailbox feature L Setting Up and Using the Standard Mailbox Features ee 10 2 C reann a MAD OX ieonta ae A a EE E 10 2 Cha ging Mailbox Settings sissierensinoranie n 10 6 Canceling a Maillb X cincsssssigsiansesietiseonsiact toatesdess E 10 7 e Receiving a Confidential Document ssssseserseeersseerersersrsrrerreserses 10 8 ld Sending a Confidential Document ssseeseeeeeeeeerersrerrrsrerrrsrsrrrersrress 10 10 e Sending a Confidential Document with Speed Dialing 10 10 e Sending a Confidential Document with the Confidential Meatlb GX Duto mesara doncoheone nau easiest cue oatieges 10 11 Using Confidential Mailboxes 10 1 Using Coa w Q C x 0 v 2 ya m S Setting Up and Using the Standard Mailbox Features In this section we will describe how to create your own mailbox change the mailbox settings when necessary and delete the mailbox when it is no longer needed Creating a Mailbox Follow this procedure to create a mailbox to hold confidential documents in a private mailbox protected with a password 1 Open the CONFID MAILBOX menu Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press P Data Registration Data Registration R EG ISTRAT O N 1 DATA REGISTRATION Set Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS CJC Press the search buttons until
279. onnect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Use of shielded cable is required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules WARNING FOR THE ETHERNET BOARD EB 52 FX IN STALLED This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Use of shielded cable is required to comply with Class A limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules Preface Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual If such changes or modifications should be made you could be required to stop operation of the equipment Preface vii WARNING FOR THE LASER CLASS 3170MS viii Facsimile Transceiver Model H12168 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Opera
280. ons TRANSMIT Documents received in the memory box can be transmitted to other destinations NOT TRANSMIT Documents received in the memory box cannot be transmit ted to other destinations If you turn on TRANSMIT for RECEIVED DOCU MENT you can set the memory box to send a transaction report to the originator every time it sends a received document to another destination This setting is effective only when 6 RECEIVE 1 SELECT ORIG UNIT is ON TRANSMIT A transaction report for the transmission is sent to the origi nator NOT TRANSMIT A transaction report for the transmission is not sent to the originator Determines whether to transmit documents scanned in the memory box TRANSMIT Documents scanned into the memory box are transmitted NOT TRANSMIT Documents scanned into the memory box are not transmitted Using the Memory Features 8 19 O r aed D m Memory Features Memory Box Setup Summary Cont d 3 TX START TIME EVERYDAY SELECT DAYS 8 POLLING TX 1 ERASE AFTER TX Allows you to set the timer for the transmission of a document received or scanned into the memory Enter the time in 24 hour format that you want to transmit the documents from the memory box You can set up to 5 times to transmit documents every day Select one or more days of the week to transmit documents from the memory box Enter the time in 24 hour format that you want to transmit the documents from the mem
281. onsumer Protection Act of 1991 in the United States Your number is prefixed with the word FAX 43 12 16 4 16 5 Features amp Q Q a ihn 3 s O Chapter 12 Other Special Features 12 15 12 16 Other Special Features Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Restricting Use of the Fax In this chapter we will show you how to protect the fax from unautho rized access Some of these features also allow you to keep track of fax transactions based on division numbers or user access codes that you can assign to individuals or sections inside your company L Setting and Using the System Settings Password c cesses 13 2 e Setting the System Settings Password cseceseeeeeteteeeneeseeeesees 13 2 e Changing or Canceling the System Settings Password 13 4 lel Restricting Fax perali Om ses ciies cic 2i20s siaxscocactiesses cascatepeas E a 13 6 Setting Operation ReEStriChOns siic2gecssccc2 cviwicucsnusiariaencdvitaaetesacbvesens 13 6 e Operating the Fax with Restrictions ON eeeeseeeeeereeeeeeeeeees 13 11 Turing Restrictions OFF and ON waseistsceutenineievoncauentsnesduttoronseys 13 14 I Receiving Documents from Registered Senders Only 13 16 ea Lsin Memory LOC Keresimesi 13 17 e Setting a Time and Password for Memory Lock cee 13 17 e Turning the Memory Lock ON ssessssssessssssisrsrssrsrsreresrsresresrsreseses 13 20 e Turning the Memory Lock OFF
282. ory capacity for the LASER CLASS 3170 Series For details on these options refer to the Printer User s Guide Customer Support Your Canon LASER CLASS 3170 Series is designed with the latest technology to provide trouble free operation The warranty card pro vided with this facsimile machine describes Canon s limited warranty for its products Be sure to read this warranty information If you encounter a problem try to solve it by referring to the information in Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions If you cannot solve the problem or if you think your Canon LASER CLASS 3170 Series needs servicing contact your local authorized Canon dealer 1 6 Welcome Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 2 Setting Up This chapter shows you how to set up the fax unit Even if your fax unit has been set up for you take a few minutes to glance through this chapter to become familiar with how to use this User s Guide You may also want to check the fax installation to confirm that it has been done correctly Il owt Use TMS Giideon a Rete E ores cere cry errr 2 3 ell Where to Set Up the Fix pacts cel eeatat dase nasian a R ts 2 4 eM SPACE Around He Far cersrseinsnon rani aei 2 6 Power REG UIPOI CIES sismeere iie EEA 2 7 General Precautions csatornan aa AAA eas 2 8 Moving the Fax Unit euessui eer Papeete Re ee one ae e a 2 10 L Unpacking Have You Got Everything eeesesreereeirrerrrseererreree 2 11 Ia We Ezeh coo tid ge
283. ory box You can set up to 5 times for each day you select Determines whether the memory box is to be used as a polling box A polling box holds a document in the memory so that the fax is polled by another fax unit requesting that the document be sent NO YES The memory box is not set up as a polling box The documents received or scanned into the memory box are not sent in re sponse to a polling request from another fax unit The memory box is set up as a polling box The documents received or scanned into the memory box are sent in response to a polling request from another fax unit Determines whether the document is erased from the memory after it is sent in response to a polling request ON OFF 8 20 Using the Memory Features The document is erased after it is sent The memory box is polled and sends the document only once The document is not erased after it is sent The memory box can be polled to send the document indefinitely Chapter 8 Memory Box Setup Summary Cont d 2 TX DOCUMENT 1 RECEIVED DOCUMENT 2 5CAN DOCUMENT Chapter 8 This setting determines which document is to be sent when the memory box is polled 1 only documents received in the memory box or 2 only documents scanned into the memory box Determines whether to transmit the documents received in the memory box when the memory box is polled TRANSMIT When the memory box is polled documents received from other f
284. other hand Use a firm even pull to avoid breaking the seal P e Do not pull the tab upwards or downwards the tape may break Seal e If the tab breaks off from the tape pull the tape out by pulling on the Note end of the tape where the tab was originally attached e Wash off any toner from your hands or clothing immediately with cold water Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 19 8 To avoid pinching your fingers between the toner cartridge and the fax unit grip the cartridge as shown below KEEP THE DRUM SLOT FREE OF DUST AND OTHER FOREIGN OBJECTS DO NOT TOUCH THE PROTECTIVE SHUTTER ON THE BOTTOM OF CARTRIDGE __1 9 Load the cartridge in the direction indicated by the arrow Gently slide the cartridge into the printer until it is completely down inside the fax unit and level L Ifthe printer cover does not shut completely do not force it down Remove the toner cartridge and insert it again L To avoid exposing the light sensitive drum never leave the printer cover open 15 20 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 L The fax unit will not operate if the cover is not closed com pletely If the printer cover is open you will see a message CHECK PRINTER COVER Open the printer cover again and make sure the toner car tridge is sitting level and close the printer cover again 11 Lower the upper output tray the document output tray and the document fee
285. ouch Speed Dialing button to dial the number 4 29 9 if not 0 Press Coded Dial and a three digit code to dial the number 4 31 if not Press Directory and search for the name to dial the number 4 35 If you make a mistake during dialing press Stop to return to standby and start again sae 4 Press Start Scan The fax dials the other party s number and sends the fax Each page is sent as it is scanned A series of messages report the other party s name telephone number and transaction number in the LCD display The final message reports successful transmission 12 31 1999 FRI 12 05 TRANSMITTING OK F When sending a small sized document such as a STMT size document lt the document may remain in the ADF after sending This document Note might then be sent again with the next sender s document Therefore when sending a small sized document make sure that the document does not remain in the ADF after sending Direct TX 5 Press Direct TX to turn off the direct sending mode J 6 16 Sending Documents Chapter 6 Manual Sending Manual sending allows you to talk to the other party before you send the document This method is useful if the operator of the other fax must manually set the other fax to receive before it can receive a document P L The sending speed is 14400 bps or less when sending manually i L The handset is available as an option 2 16 1 Set the document on the fax
286. ough edges Weight 16 22 lb 60 g m to 82 5 g m Thickness 0 003 in to 0 005 in 0 08 to 0 13 mm Storage 64 F to 75 F 18 C to 24 C 50 to 60 RH Document Thickness The thickness of documents that you feed into the fax should be within the range 0 002 0 005 in 0 06 0 13 mm If you have to feed a thick document first make a copy of the document on a copy machine and then send the copy Appendix B Documents You Can Scan B 1 3 ai 2 f am F 50 e A Document Size Make sure the documents you feed into the fax are within the dimensions shown below For documents that are larger or smaller than these recom mended limits reduce them or enlarge them on a copy machine and then send the copy Maximum Document Size Minimum Document Size 11 279 mm 5 8 148 mm ja ja 7 5 128 mm 39 4 1 meter 1 Scanning Area on the Document The shaded areas in the illustration below show the parts of the document page that are not scanned by the fax Before you send a document make sure the document margins are wider than the margins shown below Letter Legal max 0 16 4 mm 15 7 mm 16 2 mm max 0 22 5 5 mm at the standard scanning mode B 2 Documents You Can Scan Appendix B Printing Area Note that the fax unit cannot print completely from the edge of one border to another The size of the margin differs slightly with the paper size ma
287. ow change any of the settings listed in the table above 3 DELETE FILE Delete the general memory box SET BOX Enter the box number of the memory box you want to delete PASSWORD Enter the password protecting the memory box that you want to delete 16 24 Summary of Important Settings Chapter 16 4 PRESET POLLING 1 SETUP FILE SET BOX 1 FILE NAME 2 PASSWORD Set up preset polling receiving setting 711 5 Set up a setting to poll at preset time Create a two digit preset polling box Enter the name of the file 24 characters Enter a four digit password to protect the polling settings 3 SELECT LOCATIONS Select the numbers of the fax units you want to poll Use the One TEL 4 START TIME EVERY DAY SELECT DAYS 2 CHANGE DATA SET BOX PASSWORD 3 DELETE FILE SET BOX PASSWORD 5 POLLING BOX 1 SETUP FILE SET BOX 1 FILE NAME 2 PASSWORD 3 SUBADDRESS 4 TX PASSWORD 5 ERASE AFTER TX ON OFF 2 CHANGE DATA SET BOX Chapter 16 touch or Coded Speed Dialing buttons to enter the numbers of the fax machine that you want to poll Set the time s that you want to start polling Set up to 5 times for every day Set up to 5 times for each day selected Change the settings for preset polling receiving Enter the number of the box you want to change Enter the password protecting the preset polling settings You can now change any of the settings listed in the table above 1 SETUP FILE
288. p To cancel redialing If you are using direct sending press Stop gt if not Delete File l If you are using memory sending press Delete File 8 9 Delete File To erase the document from the memory Use the Delete File button to delete the file from the memory 98 9 Setting Up Redialing Follow this procedure to set up these redialing features L The number of times the fax attempts to redial J The length of the time interval the fax waits between dialing attempts 1 Open the TX SETTINGS menu M K Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press p Data Registration lt d e REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS op D CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 3 TX SETTINGS Set C Press Set TX SETTINGS 1 ECM TX 6 20 Sending Documents Chapter 6 C J 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below TX SETTINGS 3 AUTO REDIAL AUTO REDIAL Set CJ Press Set ON If OFF is displayed press the search buttons until you see ON Press Set A C JC 3 Press the search buttons to display the item you want to set up then press Set 4 Press Stop to return to standby Auto Redial Setup Summary The default settings shown in bold remain in effect unless you change them 1 REDIAL TIMES Sets the number of times the fax attempts to dial a number before it cancels the
289. p of numbers for a One touch Speed Dialing button or for a Coded Speed Dialing code To register the group for a One touch Speed Dialing button Press the search buttons to scroll the number display Press the down search button to scroll to the next number or press the up search button to scroll to the previous number if not Close the appropriate One touch Speed Dialing panel and press the One touch Speed Dialing button you want to register If a number is already in use you will see 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL CODED SPD DIAL or GROUP DIAL is displayed With an empty button number displayed press Set To register the group for Coded Speed Dialing Press Coded Dial Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the three digit code you want to use for group dialing 000 127 GROUP DIAL O20 wo c o E Q Fr tez 2 a A 7 o gt Press Set GROUP DIAL 1 TELEPHONE NUMBER Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 25 3 Register all the numbers for the group Press Set To register a One touch Speed Dialing button J Close the appropriate One touch Speed Dialing panel Press the One touch Speed Dialing button with the telephone P 8 P 72 ___ number you want to include in the group lg D To register a Coded Speed Dialing button Press Coded Dial then use the numeric keypad to enter the three digit code where the telephone number you want to include in the group is registered VCO
290. per from this area After removing the paper gently guide the transfer guide back to its original position N 3 Imaging area 1 Lift the document feeder tray the document output tray and the upper output tray 15 8 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 2 Open the printer cover and remove the toner cartridge Store the cartridge in its original protective bag to avoid exposure to light 3 While holding the green lever flip the transfer guide up Gently ease the edge of the paper away from the guide After the paper rear most edge has come out slowly pull the paper forward and out of the fax unit GREEN LEVER J O wi On Oq E S G am SHO o 356 cs o re TRANSFER TRANSFER CHARGING ROLLER GUIDE e The spring for the transfer guide is strong Always guide the transfer F guide slowly back to its original position by holding the green lever Note Never let it jump back by releasing the lever e When removing the jammed paper be careful not to touch the transfer charging roller If the roller becomes dirty the print quality will deteriorate Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 9 4 Ifyou cannot reach the paper open the MP tray and remove the envelope feeder slot cover if attached ENVELOPE FEEDER SLOT COVER 5 Pull out the jammed paper holding its leading edge while opening the release guide as far as it will go RELEASE GUIDE Replace
291. per sensor is resting on top of the paper The paper sensor must rest on top of the paper not just touch the edge of the paper A PAPER SENSOR ACCEPTABLE NOT ACCEPTABLE e To avoid damaging the MP tray close it when not in use Remove and store any remaining print media Slide the extension tray in before closing the MP tray Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 47 Turning on and off USE MP TRAY and Setting the Paper Size in the USE MP TRAY Menu Data Registration oo 5 2 48 Setting Up To use the MP tray as one of the input trays you need to select ON for USE MP TRAY in the FAX S PRINTER SET menu Also to use the MP tray for the fax function with the LASER CLASS 3170MS or the LASER CLASS 3170 3175 with the Printer Board I installed it is necessary to set the same paper size on the printer menus as on the fax menus For details about setting the paper size of the MP tray on the printer menus refer to Printing from the Multi Purpose Tray in the Printer User s Guide Follow this procedure to turn on and off USE MP TRAY and to select the paper size in the fax menus Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 5 FAX S PRINTER SET Press Set FAX S PRINTER SET 1 USE MP TRAY Chapter 2
292. pment unless otherwise specified in the manual If such changes or modifications should be made you could be required to stop operation of the equipment Canon U S A Inc One Canon Plaza Lake Success NY 11042 U S A TEL No 516 328 5600 Preface Preface WARNING FOR THE ETHERNET BOARD EB 52 FX IN STALLED This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Use of shielded cable is required to comply with Class A limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual If such changes or modifications should be made you could be required to stop operation of the equipment 1x Users in Canada PRE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CANON FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT A Location Supply a suitable table cabinet or desk See Appendix A Specifica tions fo
293. pplicable to each port This equipment if it uses an optional telephone receiver is hearing aid compatible IN CASE OF EQUIPMENT MALFUNCTION Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the proce dures described in this User s Guide disconnect the equipment from the telephone line and unplug the power cord The telephone line should not be reconnected or the switch turned on until the problem is com pletely resolved Users should contact their local authorized Canon Facsimile Service Dealer for servicing of equipment Preface Preface RIGHTS OF THE TELEPHONE COMPANY Should the equipment cause harm to the telephone network the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service The telephone company also retains the right to make changes in facilities and services which may affect the operation of this equipment When such changes are necessary the telephone company is required to give adequate prior notice to the user Also you will be advised of your right to file a compliant with the FCC if you believe it is necessary WARNING The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or ot
294. r party if not If you hear a slow beep dial 25 on the extension telephone and hang up to start receiving the document F You can change the number for the remote receiving ID 00 to 99 or turn the feature off 7 9 7 8 Receiving Documents Chapter 7 Changing the Remote Receive ID he Data Registration Set Set Chapter 7 Follow this procedure to change the remote receive ID Open the RX SETTINGS menu Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press Set 1 USER SETTINGS DATA REGISTRATION Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 4 RX SETTINGS RX SETTINGS 1 ECM RX Press Set Press the search buttons until you see the display below RX SETTINGS 3 REMOTE RX Press Set REMOTE RX ON If OFF is displayed press the search buttons until you see ON Receiving Documents 7 9 of Et EF os aT 26 xA Set 7 10 Receiving Documents Press Set REMOTE RX ID 20 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a new number 00 to 99 for the ID if not Press the search buttons to increase or decrease the number Then press Set To turn off remote receiving Press the search buttons in step 3 until you see the display below REMOTE RX OFF Press Set Press Stop to return to standby Chapter 7 Canceling Receiving a Document To Cancel Receivi
295. r Board needs to be installed Before you use the fax you should set the correct date and time register the fax unit telephone number and register the unit name your personal name or a company name If these tasks have been done for you then you may want to enter your own sender name 3 18 First we will describe the operation panel buttons and give a brief introduction to the basic procedures for browsing through the menus and finding the items you want Then we will guide you step by step through the basic procedures that must be performed before you use the fax for the first time L Operation Buttons One touch panels closed 3 2 L Operation Buttons One touch panels Open 00 ceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeees 3 4 LI Using the Menus ard BUtONS essione 3 5 e General Guidelines for Registering Information eee 3 5 OU Si NG MENUS saonenn 3 5 e Entering Names for Registration cece ceeeeeseeseeseeseeeseeseeeeeeeeees 3 7 Men Button Summary lable xccits ciaebsotsitiategonsdder n i 3 9 I Checking and Setting the Telephone Line sesers 3 10 I Registering Required Sender Information cee eeeeseeseeeeseeseeeees 3 12 e What is Sender Information 0 se sssscesseceeceseeeseecseteneesececeaesees 3 12 L Registering the Sender Information TX TERMINAL ID 3 13 lel Registering DENCEL N AMES casaxessrssecsichetsessadi dace iatatscs tu eueesandtaantaceesiees 3 18 Registering a oender Name cer
296. r details about unit s weight and dimensions B Order Information 1 Provide only a single line or touch tone or rotary telephone set terminated with a standard 4 pin modular phone plug Touch tone is recommended if available in your area 2 Order an RJ11 C modular wall jack USOC code which should be installed by the phone company If the RJ11 C wall jack is not present telephone fax operation is not possible 3 Order a normal business line from your telephone company s business representative The line should be a regular voice grade line or the equivalent Use one line per unit DDD Direct Distance Dial line if not IDDD International Direct Distance dial line if you communi cate overseas Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards such as the 2500 touch tone or 500 rotary pulse dial telephones A dedicated extension off a PBX without Camp On signals is also permitted with a fax unit Key telephone systems are not recommended because they send non standard signals to individual telephones for ringing or send special codes which may cause a fax error C Power Requirements The power outlet should be a three prong grounded receptacle single or duplex It should be independent from copiers heaters air condi tioners or any electrical equipment that is thermostatically controlled The rated value is 120 volts and 15 amperes The RJ11 C modular jack should be relatively close to the po
297. r it The document starts printing CONFIDENTIAL RX PRINTING P 001 002 Sending a Confidential Document Sending a document with a subaddress and password does not ensure that the document will be received as a confidential document Before your fax sends a document it cannot confirm that the other party has their fax set up for confidential receiving You can use two methods to send a confidential document L If you frequently use the confidential sending feature you can register a telephone number for confidential sending with One touch or Coded Speed Dialing registration L You can also enter the ITU T subaddress and password with Confidential Mailbox button Sending a Confidential Document with Speed Dialing You can register a telephone number for confidential sending at the touch of a One touch Speed Dialing button or by pressing Coded Dial followed by a three digit code Check these points before you send a confidential document to another party L Contact the other party and ask for the ITU T subaddress and password they are using for receiving confidential documents 10 10 Using Confidential Mailboxes Chapter 10 L The other party s fax unit does not have to be a Canon fax unit but make sure the other party s fax unit supports the use of ITU T subaddresses and passwords L Perform the procedure to register a telephone number for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing 4 6 4 15 L If the speed dialing but
298. r the PCL6 Printer Board this function will not work Turning the Energy Saver Feature ON I K 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration Registration R EG ST RAT ON 1 DATA REGISTRATION Set Ss 3 sks ihn G ee 7e 5 p shs 3 2 Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS C J J 3 Press the search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS Set o 4 Press Set SYSTEM SETTINGS 1 PASSWORD C JC 5 Press the search buttons until you see the display below SYSTEM SETTINGS 10 ENERGY SAVER Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 21 Set C 6 Press Set ENERGY SAVER OFF CJC 7 Press a search button to display ON ENERGY SAVER Set C3 8 Press Set ENERGY SVR TIME O3MIN z Z 9 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a number for the 3 time minutes you want the fax machine to remain idle before it 6 automatically enters the low energy sleep mode You can set a time from 03 to 30 minutes ENERGY SVR TIME 0 30MIN Set 10 Press Set LJ SYSTEM SETTINGS 11 PHONE NO CHECK Stop 11 Press Stop to return to standby 6 After the fax machine enters the energy saver mode only the energy saver indicator on the operation panel remains on and the LCD display shows O U m D n lt iss O wn ENERGY SAVER 3 22 Getting Started Chapter 3 Return
299. r the speci Note fied time has elapsed A 3 24 Getting Started Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing This chapter introduces some basic dialing features then shows you how to set up the speed dialing buttons Speed dialing includes One touch Speed Dialing Coded Speed Dialing and Group Dialing Directory dialing also described in this chapter allows you to locate a number for dialing by searching names and numbers registered on the fax for speed dialing After you set up your speed dialing buttons we recommend that you occasionally print a list of all telephone numbers registered in the fax and store it for reference 14 2 L Read This before Entering Telephone Numbers s es 4 2 Fritering Pauses for Dialing sciisccuesaeniicsstens sia vies AnS 4 2 e Adjusting the Length of a Pause 00 0 tesssesecesesseeeeeeeseeseeersesseaseees 4 3 lal WWinabsi Speed Dialing l seicita sca octets tanta taste eve cast A yee ten hee 4 5 L Setting Up One touch Speed Dialing oo eeeeeseeeeseteeeeseteeeeneeeees 4 6 E ld Setting Up Coded Speed Dialing eeeeeeesseeeeeesesesrreresrrrrerrrrrrrrrrrerreererns 4 15 a D D Eli Setine Up Group Dalng socso r ann a A nee 4 24 D T A Usmo Speed Dialing rerprersenre niren eae E EST 4 29 S a e Using One touch Speed Dialing eeseeeseeeeseeseesrerisrsrsrrsrsrerrsrsresess 4 29 05 Using Coded Speed Dialing ssissrsruiiis isasi 4 31 hs Using Group Dialihe aecisisoshesscpa
300. rd of the polling box file you want to delete Set the fax unit to transfer the documents it receives to other faxes 7 14 Create a file to receive and transfer documents Enter a file name 24 characters 2 SELECT LOCATIONS Select the numbers of the fax machines where you want TEL 3 PASSWORD documents transferred Use the One touch or Coded Speed Dialing buttons to enter the numbers of the fax machines where you want documents transferred Enter a four digit password to protect the transfer file settings 4 SELECT ORIG UNIT Select the telephone numbers of the fax machines you want have OFF ON TEL 5 TIME SETUP 1 START TIME EVERY DAY SELECT DAYS 2 END TIME EVERY DAY SELECT DAYS 6 PRINT RX DOC OFF ON received and transferred All fax transmissions are received and transferred The fax machine receives and transfers transmissions only from fax units that you designate by fax telephone number Use the One touch or Coded Speed Dialing buttons to designate originator fax machines for receive and transfer Set a time period wherein documents are to be received and transferred Set a specified time to start transfer operation Set up to 5 times every day Select one or several days for document transfer You can set 5 times for any day s you select Set a specified time to end transfer operation Set up to 5 times every day Select one or several days for document transfer You can set 5 times for
301. receive documents only from speed dialing numbers registered in your fax unit Rotary pulse A rotary pulse or pulse dial telephone is dialed by manually rotating a dial to send pulses to the telephone switching system When you pulse dial you will hear clicks With tone dialing you will hear tones Glossary Glossary RX password The ITU T password set on your fax to match the ITU T password of all incoming documents If your RX password matches the ITU T password of the incoming transmission the document is received If the passwords do not match the document is not received The maximum length of the password is 20 digits and may consist of numbers spaces asterisk and pound mark S Scanning area The scanning area is narrower than the original document size on the entire border around the document Documents you send should have some margin on the sides and the top and bottom Anything over this margin cannot be scanned for sending Sender s name Name or company name your fax number date and time the document sent to the receiving party are printed on each page you send The sender s name which is your own name can be printed on the docu ments that you send You can register up to 19 sender names that can be selected with the TTI selector before sending Your name and facsimile number are printed at the top of documents that you send Sending speed The rate at which documents are sent over the phone line
302. reception mode 12 31 1999 FRI 11 34 ECM RX P 001 If the other party s fax supports ECM sending your fax receives every document in the error correction mode ECM 16 14 Optional Dual line transactions If you have installed the Dual line Upgrade Kit and both lines are in use at the same time press the search buttons to switch the display so you can view either transaction in progress 2 54 Receiving Documents 7 3 of Et EF os aT 26 xA Successful reception You will see these alternating messages displayed after a document is successfully received 12 31 1999 FRI 11 34 RECEPTION OK 12 31 1999 FRI 11 34 TX RX NO 5011 You can also confirm reception of a document by printing an Activity Report or an Activity Management Report 14 9 Receive error messages Here are few of the most common error messages The fax has run out of paper while printing or copying a document SUPPLY REC PAPER Open the paper cassette and load paper into the paper cassette As soon as you re fill the paper cassette and close it the remainder of the document in the memory is printed 2 31 The toner cartridge has run out of toner while printing or copying a document REPLACE CARTRIDGE Open the printer cover and replace the toner cartridge As soon as you close the cover the fax returns to standby and the remainder of the document in the memory starts printing automatically 715 17 If you see any other error messages
303. red number on the other party s fax The number is not registered on the other party s fax or the number registered on the other party s fax is not correct Make sure the subaddress passwords match the settings on the other party s fax unit If the other party s fax is a Canon fax and can set a polling ID request that they set the polling ID to 255 decimal or 1111 1111 binary Correct the One touch or Coded Speed dial registration settings 74 6 4 15 Open the optional settings for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing and make sure that you have entered a subaddress and password if required for the telephone number 74 8 4 18 Open the settings for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing and make sure the settings have not been changed 44 6 4 15 Send the document without confidential settings or send the document to a fax that supports the use of ITU T subaddresses Contact the other party and confirm the settings on the other party s confidential mailbox Send the document by regular transmission Contact the other party and confirm that their relay settings match the relay settings on your fax unit Before you try to clear the memory you may want to print a memory list for reference 8 5 If there are documents in the memory that you do not need erase those documents from the memory 8 9 Call the other party and ask the other party to register the number or to correct the number Or set PHONE NO CHECK of
304. removed before you use the fax unit 2 22 Setting Up Chapter 2 Assembling the Fax Follow the instructions in this section to assemble the fax and prepare it for full operation Installing the Toner Cartridge Install only a Canon FX6 Toner Cartridge in your fax machine INSTALLING ANY OTHER TYPE OF CARTRIDGE IN THIS FAX UNIT COULD DAMAGE THE FAX UNIT AND VOID YOUR WAR Caution RANTY LEAVE THE TONER CARTRIDGE IN ITS PROTECTIVE BAG UNTIL YOU ARE READY TO INSTALL THE CARTRIDGE HANDLE THE TONER CARTRIDGE CAREFULLY 715 22 1 Open the printer cover Save the protective bag You can use it later to cover the cartridge if you have to remove it from the fax machine Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 23 Save the protective bag and all other shipping material You will need this material later when you dispose of the cartridge after it has run out of toner 15 18 3 Hold the cartridge by the ends and rock it gently five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge 4 Place the new cartridge on a stable flat clean surface and snap the tab to detach it from the cartridge 5 As you steady the cartridge with one hand remove the seal by gently pulling the plastic tab with your other hand Use a firm even pull to avoid breaking the seal e Do not pull the tab upwards or downwards the tape may break e If the tab breaks off from the tape pull the tape out by pulling on the
305. repeat this procedure to set up another mailbox if not Stop Press Stop to return to standby Q Using Co w Q C x 0 v 2 ya m SS S Chapter 10 Using Confidential Mailboxes 10 5 Changing Mailbox Settings Follow this procedure to change the settings for a mailbox To open a mailbox to view and change the settings you must know the mailbox number and password Set OPER__ SYMBOLS OPER__ SYMBOLS Open the CONFID MAILBOX menu 10 2 CONFID MAILBOX 1 SETUP FILE Press the search buttons until you see the display below CONFID MAILBOX 2 CHANGE DATA Open the mailbox with its number and password Press Set CHANGE DATA SET BOX OO Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the two digit code of the mailbox you want to change Then press Set CHANGE DATA PASSWORD Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four digit password protecting access to the mailbox Then press Set CHANGE DATA 1 FILE NAME 10 6 Using Confidential Mailboxes Chapter 10 4 ress the search buttons to display the item you want to change CJC P h hb display the item y hang CHANGE DATA 1 FILE NAME CHANGE DATA 5 OF RX COPIES Set CJ 5 With the item you want to change shown in the display press Set 6 To change an item follow the same procedure you used to perform the initial settings 10 3 Stop 7 Press Stop to return to standby Q Canceling a Mailbox Follow this procedure to cance
306. ric keypad A maximum of 20 digits can be entered ENTER PIN CODE PRERE ak 2K 2k The PIN code is not displayed as it is entered Press Set to start transmission Q a ae Ou ww O o 0 Q ce Setting PIN Code Access for Speed Dialing This method allows you to register One touch and Coded Speed Dialing buttons for PIN Code Access When a user attempts to dial with a speed dialing button the fax machine will prompt the user to enter a PIN Code When NECESS PIN CODE of the pin code setting 713 22 is OFF you can operate as described below 1 Select the speed dialing location to register the telephone number 4 7 4 16 TELEPHONE NUMBER i o_o Pin Code C 2 Ifthe PIN code is to be dialed before the telephone number press Pin Code then enter the telephone number TELEPHONE NUMBER TEL C123 4567 if not If the PIN code is to be dialed after the telephone number enter the telephone number then press Pin Code TELEPHONE NUMBER TEL 123 45670 Set C 3 Press Set Pin Code 4 Repeat the procedure to continue registering additional numbers St 5 When you are finished press Stop 6 13 26 Restricting Use of the Fax Chapter 13 Using Speed Dialing with PIN Code Access If you register the PIN Code entry when registering automatic dialing 13 26 do the following procedures 1 Set the document on the fax machine DOCUMENT READY iC_ 2 Press a speed dialing button 2 jf T
307. ridge A memory backup function also safeguards the contents of the memory for approximately 12 hours after a power failure Delayed sending Scan a document into the memory and set for sending at a later time so you can take advantage of holiday or late night telephone rates Dual access Even while you are sending or receiving a document you can continue to use the fax to register information with the fax or record documents into the memory Welcome 1 3 Sending starts immediately Tn i 50 Private memory boxes i 1 4 Welcome Quick on line TX Before the fax is finished scanning a long document it will start dialing and sending the pages that are already scanned By the time the last page is scanned the document transmission is well under way Easy to use A larger display and operation panel with larger buttons makes the fax easier to use Economical and quiet Canon s RAPID Fusing System realizes quiet opera tion while you save money If the fax machine remains idle for a specified length of time the fax machine automatically shuts itself down and enters the low energy sleep mode and will remain in this low energy mode until the fax machine receives a document transmission or until you press the Energy Saver button Better security with PIN Codes For PBXs private branch exchanges that require PIN Personal Identification Number codes to acquire an outside line you can now turn on the PIN code
308. rt prints e Multi TX RX Report When you send a document to more than one destination the fax prints a report to show you the name and numbers of the other parties whether the transactions were completed or not and errors if any The fax automatically prints multi transaction reports for sending documents to more than one destination delayed sending documents to more than one destination sending documents through a relay fax to more than one destination and sending confidential docu ments to more than one destination if the mailboxes are the same on every fax unit e Relay Broadcast Report After sending a document through a relay fax you may receive a relay broadcast report from the fax machine that relayed the document This shows whether or not the document was successfully relayed to all the final destinations To receive a report the other machine must be set to print a relay broadcast report Resolution The density of dots for an output device like a fax scanner or printer Expressed in terms of dots per inch dpi Low resolution causes font characters and graphics to have a jagged appearance Higher resolution means smoother curves and angles as well as a better match to tradi tional typeface designs Resolution values are represented by horizontal data and vertical data for example 600 x 600dpi Restricted reception The ability of the fax unit to restrict incoming documents With this feature turned on the fax unit will
309. s Then press Report REPORT 1 ACTIVITY REPORT Press the search buttons until you see the display below REPORT 3 USER DATA LIST Press Set USER DATA LIST 1 USER DATA Press Set to start printing After you press Set the report starts printing PRINTING REPORT WORLD ESTATE INC 1001 User s Data List 12 31 1999 13 36 FAX 833 4423 EEEE AC IAC CH 2 E RE USER S DATA LIST KK 2 ACR IC CH 2 E 1 USER SETTINGS UNIT TELEPHONE 833 4423 UNIT NAME WORLD ESTATE INC TX TERMINAL ID ON TTI POSITION OUTSIDE IMAGE TELEPHONE MARK FAX 8 DUAL LINE OPTIONS 2nd LINE TEL 2nd LINE TYPE TX LINE PRIORITY TOUCH TONE LINE TX PRIORITY TOTAL FAX MEMORY TMByte Printing Reports and Lists 14 5 and Lists C Pe ihe fe Q 3 a 5 t sks i A Printing the List of Sender Names Follow this procedure to print a list of sender names registered in the fax L The sender names are names registered to print at the top of docu ments you send in place of the unit name 3 12 I Sender names are selected by pressing TTI Selector just before you send a document 6 6 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press At Report REPORT 1 ACTIVITY REPORT C JC 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below REPORT 3 USER DATA LIST Set 3 Press Set USER DATA LIST 1 USER DATA C J J 4 Press the search buttons until you see the disp
310. s 3 18 Changing or Erasing a Sender Name csseeeseeereeeeseeeeeeeseees 3 20 Using the Energy Saver Mode For the LASER CLASS 3170 3175 Only o eeeeesseseseeeeeeeeeeseeeees 3 21 Turning the Energy Saver Feature ON sesser 3 21 Returning to the Full Power Mode cceesseseeeeseneeeeneeeeseseeeees 3 23 Chapter4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing sessossossoeseeseossesseoseessessesssesseseses 4 1 Read This before Entering Telephone Numbers seeeseeeeeee 4 2 Pnterine Pauses for Dialing eessen anA nese 4 2 Adjusting the Length of a Pause secssesseeeeceesseseeeceeseasereeees 4 3 What ib Speed Diane ironiese eure teers emer acre 4 5 One touch Speed Dialing csscsiesrdoch sec aactososscesibascateasansesgounsossi pnts 4 5 Coded speed Dialihg sesdrora ena ER 4 5 Cop DANN oiiire n rT A E Mang ees 4 5 Setting Up One touch Speed Dialing seeeeseeeseesseesisresrssreresesrsseses 4 6 petting Up Coded Speed Dial siiasaccstsssonstonesseaussvcasnusthevaserusaninstenss 4 15 xviii Contents Setting Llp Group Diane 4asjcssuninonserti sadareoosshdsoeadies sededuseaneyedooeanvantines 4 24 Usine Speed Dane sesssk ss ovencccascocoeend T teauenaes 4 29 Using One touch Speed Dialing es eeeesseeseeeseceseeseeeeseeseeesees 4 29 Using Coded Speed Dialing sninen a ensies 4 31 Using Group Diane vs csssacsrsswesosasonscieaslatoanmobontognsanaangbeataedangentionines 4 33 Using Directory Dialing cities tine eee 4 35 ChapterS
311. s Set 8 Follow the same procedures you used to set the initial settings or change the defaults 8 16 If you want to change the operation password first you will have to enter the old password it will not be displayed and then enter the new Note password it will be displayed as you enter it r Q 25 ap 9 When you are finished making changes press Stop to return to Su standby Sa i Q Canceling a Memory Box Follow this procedure to cancel a memory box 1 Open the MEMORY BOX menu 8 14 MEMORY BOX 1 SETUP FILE C J J 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below MEMORY BOX 3 DELETE FILE DELE TEFILEE SET BOX OO Set C 3 Press Set CJ 4 Enter the number of the box you want to delete and press Set DELETE FILE O O PASSWORD If you have not set the operation password you can skip the next step Chapter 8 Using the Memory Features 8 23 Set 3 C3 5 Enter the four digit password protecting the memory box settings 0 Q N and press Set 9 w g DELETE FILE ZROD FILE DELETED 90G Stop 6 Press Stop to return to standby Sending a Document Stored in the Memory Box Follow this procedure to store a document in the memory box for sending according to the memory box setup gt 8 14 1 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can also select a sender s name with the TTI Selec
312. s Stop CANCEL DURING TX RX YES NO 7 12 Receiving Documents Chapter 7 or 3 Press to cancel receiving the document or press if you change your mind and do not want to cancel After you press an alarm sounds document reception is canceled and the following messages are displayed 12 31 1999 FRI 12 21 STOP KEY PRESSED 12 31 1999 FRI 12 21 RECEIVE 5012 If the receive report feature is on or set to PRINT ERROR ONLY an RX REPORT also prints 16 8 PRINTING REPORT Transferring Documents The transfer mode tells the fax to receive documents and then transfer them automatically to a fax at your home or at another work site The day and time for the fax unit to switch to the transfer mode can be preset This feature is especially convenient for receiving important documents coming from countries overseas several time zones removed from your own Before You Set Up Document Transfer Note these important points before you create a transfer setup file _I You can create only one transfer setup file L In order for the fax unit to transfer documents to a destination you must enter the destination telephone number of the fax unit with a speed dialing button This means the destination fax unit must be registered on the fax for a One touch Speed Dialing button or a Coded Speed Dialing code 4 6 4 15 L You can set the fax to transfer documents only from selected origina tors In order to select an or
313. s a button to enter a letter or number UNIT NAME A CANON DIV 20 When you are finished entering the unit name press Set UNIT NAME A DATA ENTRY OK This completes registering all of the required sender information for your fax Press Stop to return to standby Getting Started 3 17 Ss 3 sbs ihn G ee 7e 5 p shs 3 Registering Sender Names Registering alternative sender names is optional but you may want to register sender names if many people are using the fax If each user registers his or her personal name as a sender name they can enter their sender name to replace the UNIT NAME printed at the top of documents they send 43 12 Note F To enter the sender name press TTI Selector when you scan the document for sending gt 6 6 Registering a Sender Name Follow this procedure to register sender names 1 ejay Set CJL 4 Open the USER SETTINGS menu 3 13 Press the search buttons until you see the display below USER SETTINGS 4 SENDER S NAME Press Set SENDER S NAME 01 Press the search buttons to display the number where you want to register your name if not Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number ll Up to 19 numbers are available One number can accept a single name entry L Ifaname is already registered you will see that name to the right of the number 3 18 Getting Started Chapter 3 L Keep pressing the search
314. s and the printer messages Manual RX Switches the fax between the auto and manual receive mode Direct TX Sets the fax in the direct sending mode so you can send a document ahead of other documents stored in the fax memory Direct sending scans a document and sends it immediately without storing the document in the memory Set Selects a menu item during data registration x 3 s ihn pe N 5 p J 3 Lo Directory Allows you to search for fax telephone numbers by the name under which they are registered for speed dialing and then use the number for dialing AV Search buttons for directory dialing Coded Dial A press on the button followed by a three digit code dials the telephone number registered for Coded Speed Dialing under that three digit code Redial Redials the previous number dialed manually with the buttons on the numeric keypad Hook Allows you to dial even with the handset still in the handset rest Copy Copies a document Clear Clears an entire entry during information registration Error Blinks red when paper jam occurs or the fax is running Stop out of paper or toner The problem is described by a Cancels sending receiving data registration and other Message MNS Rep display above operations and returns the fax to the standby mode In Use Memory Start Scan Blinks green when the fax is using the telephone line Lights green when there are documents in the memory Starts sendi
315. s checked with connected number and if they match then the document is sent The number is not checked The fax uses the last six digits of the number you dial to match with the last six digits of the other party s number registered on the remote fax If the numbers match the document is sent Otherwise the document is not sent Summary of Important Settings 16 31 E sE asop sts FE ESO 5 Eu N Dual Line Options Data Registration Set COL 16 32 Summary of Important Settings R Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Press the search buttons to display 8 DUAL LINE OPTIONS DATA REGISTRATION 8 DUAL LINE OPTIONS Press Set DUAL LINE OPTIONS 1 2nd LINE TEL Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change Chapter 16 Default settings are in bold 1 2nd LINE TEL Register your second fax number gt 2 57 This setting is required in the United States 2 2nd LINE TYPE Set the second telephone line type 2 58 TOUCH TONE The telephone line is set for touch tone dialing ROTARY PULSE The telephone line is set for rotary pulse dialing If you need to dial into an information service that requires tone dialing use the Tone button on the operation panel 12 3 3 TX LINE PRIORITY Set the telephone line priority on Line 1 and Line 2
316. s sent You can get the original back much faster and spend less time standing around the fax MP multi purpose tray Folds out from the fax and holds a variety of print media including cut sheet standard paper envelopes adhesive labels and transparencies Multitransaction Also called multiple transmission or sequential broadcast this term refers to scanning a document once and sending it to more than one location You can send a single document to a maximum of 210 destinations N Noise A general term applied to a number of problems that adversely affect the operation of telephone lines used for modem and fax communication Normal mode Using the fax with its default settings Glossary Glossary Numeric buttons The numeric buttons are the round buttons on the operation panel marked the same as a standard telephone keypad Press to perform regular dialing The numeric buttons are also used to enter numbers and letters when registering numbers and names O One touch Speed Dialing Each One touch Speed Dialing button holds a facsimile telephone number After the numbers are registered all you have to do is press one button to dial Up to 72 numbers can be registered for One touch Speed Dialing P Pause By pressing Pause you can enter a pause between digits of a telephone number when you register the number for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing or during regular dialing A pause may be required for a connec tion to
317. s stored e Name and number the fax was sent to if they are registered for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing e Number of pages in the document e Date and time each document was stored in the memory and when it will be sent e Sender s name TTI Document feeder tray The document feeder tray can hold 50 sheets of letter or A4 size paper or 20 legal 11 x 17 in or B4 size paper You load a document once and the fax then feeds each sheet of the document one by one Document output tray Holds documents ejected from the fax unit after they have been scanned into memory copied or sent by direct sending Dual access Enables you to scan a transmission even if the fax is copying sending or receiving a document You do not have to wait until the fax finishes the current send receive transmission While the facsimile sends a document from the memory you can load other documents into the memory copy documents print out reports or register information Dual line Upgrade Kit I The optional Dual line Upgrade Kit II allows you to connect two telephone lines to the fax unit Both lines can be used simultaneously for facsimile transactions either line can be given priority for transactions or either line can be temporarily disabled Glossary Glossary E ECM Stands for error correction mode Reduces system and line errors when sending or receiving from another fax with ECM capability When there is noise on the telepho
318. se of the Fax Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 14 Printing Reports and Lists This chapter shows you how to print lists and reports You can print lists of telephone numbers and transmissions settings registered in the fax as well as print reports about document transactions LI Printing the Speed Dialing Lists 0 eee eeeeesseeeeeeeeeseneeeaeaeeeees 14 2 lal Printing the User Data histdes Miata e 14 5 LI Printing the List of Sender Nannies vide cscscadcsscecsneniscoetszenstdosteednsnduodutase 14 6 LEN IR CPOE ES anior esa os O E R eben Vectp R 14 8 e Printing the Activity Management Report 0 0 ceeeeeeeeteeeseees 14 9 e Setting and Using Activity Reports oe eeeeeseeeeeeseneeees 14 11 lel Memory LIS ES aeara a i ER EAEAN T 14 17 Printing Reports and Lists 14 1 and Lists C Pe ihe fe Q 3 a 5 t sks i A Printing the Speed Dialing Lists Follow this procedure to print the speed dialing lists You can print two types of One touch or Coded Speed Dialing list a standard list List 1 or a detailed list List 2 f 1 Open the SPEED DIAL LIST menu Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Report Report REPORT 1 ACTIVITY REPORT 5 TD Press the search buttons until you see the display below REPORT 2 SPEED DIAL LIST Set C Press Set SPEED DIAL LIST 1 1 TOUCH LIST A v C J J 2 Press the search buttons to display the name of the list you want to print 1 1 TOUCH L
319. search buttons until you see the display below DATA REGISTRATION 6 FILE SETTINGS Press Set FILE SETTINGS 1 CONFID MAILBOX 8 14 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display below FILE SETTINGS 3 MEMORY BOX Set C3 Press Set MEMORY BOX 1 SETUP FILE o os 2 Give the memory box a number ol gt Set i O C Press Set ae Q SETUP FILE SET BOX OO Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a two digit code for the memory box 5 6 L You can enter a number from 00 to 99 for the memory box number You can also use the search buttons to change the number Press O Q the down arrow to increase the number and the up arrow to decrease the number SETUP FILE SET BOX 33 Set Press Set D Ca 3 Press the search buttons to display the desired setting SETUP FILE 1 FILE NAME SETUP FILE 8 POLLING TX Chapter 8 Using the Memory Features 8 15 Set C93 4 With the item displayed that you want to set press Set Then perform the settings as described in the summary below Stop 5 When you are finished setting up the memory box press Stop to M return to standby Memory Box Setup Summary The default settings shown in bold remain in effect unless you change them 1 FILE NAME NAME This setting allows you to enter a personal name for the memory box that will appear in printed reports Enter a name of up to 24 characters and press S
320. sert a pause at the end of the telephone number The pause at the end of the number is 10 seconds For details about the necessary length of the pause contact your local telephone company or local authorized Canon dealer If you have installed the optional handset when the other party answers you can pick up the handset and talk Tell the other party to press the start button on their fax then hang up their handset When you hear a high pitched tone the other fax is ready to receive if not If you hear a high pitched tone as soon as the call connects the other party is ready to receive Start Scan 5 Press Start Scan on your fax and hang up your handset The fax starts to send the document If the offhook alarm starts beeping make sure the handset is sitting correctly on the handset cradle The volume of the offhook J alarm can be adjusted 16 6 To take advantage of the speed dialing features register frequently S dialed long distance numbers for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing Note buttons 4 6 4 15 D D S Q V Documents Chapter 6 Sending Documents 6 11 Overview of Sending Methods This section briefly describes the methods and advantages of the three main sending methods memory sending direct sending and manual sending Memory Sending With memory sending document scanning and sending is fast allowing you to get your document back quickly so you do not have to spend so much t
321. sing the Fax as a Copier This chapter describes all the settings and procedures for using the fax unit as a copier L Preparing the DOCUMeM tte paccssacaccsact Adieetescndesteetietgisohvan isa ceadtiacseel 5 2 ll Setting a Document On the Fac nchice nat hesitate 5 3 L Performing the Document Settings 00 ce eseeeseeeeteseeeeteneesseeeeeneeeees 5 4 W Makine Copies orrena n ONO 5 6 Using the Fax as a Copier 5 1 H nk i Q 2o O E V 5 Preparing the Document Follow these simple guidelines to check your document before you set the document on the fax for copying Ly E For best results load only documents of recommended standard size and weight Refer to Appendix B gt B 1 The document guides on the document feeder tray can be adjusted to the width of non standard size paper For best results however all sheets in the stack should be of the same width Although the document guides on the document feeder tray indicate 11 x 17 in size and such a document can be set on the document feeder tray the effective scanning width is up to B4 size 10 in To avoid document jams never feed thick documents or documents backed with carbon paper To avoid document jams and possible damage to the fax avoid wrinkled or creased paper carbon paper curled paper coated paper and onion skin or other very thin paper The fax does not scan completely to the edges of the paper and anything beyond this recommen
322. sks 3 7 2 SELECT REDUCE DIR Select the direction of reduc tion for the percentage of fixed reduction selected above VERTICAL ONLY Reduction performed in the vertical direction only HORIZ amp VERTICAL Reduction performed in the horizontal and vertical direction 5 SELECT DENSITY Adjust the print density of documents you receive LT Light STD Standard DK Dark 6 TONER SUPPLY LOW Set the fax to continue printing even after toner runs low and the Change Cartridge indicator lights and the REPLACE CARTRIDGE message appears RX TO MEMORY Stop printing and receive the remainder of the document in the memory KEEP PRINTING Ignore the warning and keep printing until the document is completely printed This setting is convenient when a new toner cartridge is not at hand However even if the toner cartridge is out of toner the fax will not receive the document in the memory After installing the new toner cartridge be sure to set to RX TO MEMORY 16 18 Summary of Important Settings Chapter 16 7 SELECT OUTPT TRAY Select one output tray for each function FAX COPY REPORT and PRINTER to classify the output documents OFF All the printed documents are delivered to the lower output tray When the full paper sensor detects the tray is full the paper delivery automatically switches to the upper output tray If the face up tray is open the paper is delivered to the face up tray ON Select either the upper output tra
323. smission has PLEASE WAIT completed NO ANSWER The other party did not answer Start the procedure again from the beginning and try again If the connection fails again make sure the other party is using a G3 compatible fax machine Questions Q O z G O a Frequently Asked NO CONFID TX The other party s fax unit may not support the use of confidential mailboxes Contact the other party and confirm whether or not they can set up confidential mailboxes You may be using the wrong ITU T subaddress password Contact the other party and make sure you are using the correct subaddress password The memory of the other party s fax unit may be full Contact the other party and request that they clear the memory on their fax unit NO DOC STORED You have tried to check the contents of the memory but no documents are currently stored in the memory NO ORIGINAL RELAY TX The other party s fax unit may not be able to function as a relay station or it may not be set up correctly to receive and relay documents Contact the other party and make sure it can function as a relay station If the fax unit can be set up as relay station confirm that it is set up correctly for relay transmissions Make sure you have both registered the same ITU T subaddress password If the memory of the other party s fax unit is full it will not be able to receive and relay documents Ask them to clear part or all of the memory on
324. ss A 4 Telephone Mea tte Siorino E A 5 TST Sioana EE NTE E O O A A 5 Operating Environment eoa Seas ectes A 5 Wers Ft see sis eee seac tac ces eee hee hac ences scat ON A 5 Contents Dimensions cccccccsccccecsccccsccccscecsccessceceecscesuecsccecscsececsceccecscesesescesecesees A 6 Appendix B Documents You Can Scan seessessseesoesseessocssesssesssossoeessessoeescesssessoeesoessosssoe B 1 Document Media 16 Avold wee ete ie ee eee eee B 1 Specifications for Paper Documents You Can Scan eee B 1 Document Thickness ccuacitedai a cam E ocee B 1 IB ierobbaqisigidtel VA meme eee ret oe E Mee ren creer inter ore een errere B 2 Scanning Area on the Document uu seeesesseceeeesseseeceeeseasecenees B 2 Pining ATC saad saute inaa suse eaees E a R eset B 3 COS SAVY sus ci E E T E E E A E E E E G 1 XxX10 Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing the new Canon LASER CLASS 3170 Series This new facsimile unit with its features and options and greater flexibil ity enabled by full support of ITU T subaddress password sending and receiving will help you expand your work capacity and efficiency This Facsimile User s Guide shows you how to get the most out of your new facsimile unit Whether you are sending a quick memo to the home office on the other side of town or automatically receiving from a branch overseas or across the country this book shows you how to do it all quickly and easily Ta
325. ss the One touch Speed e o Dialing button where the number is registered Je OCOC Subaddress C Note p Q 2 T YEO oO O I Sa gt m Qj R ioe OQLIQ no lt Chapter 6 ies O o OOOO To dial with a Coded Speed Dialing press Coded Dial and then use the numeric keypad to enter the three digit dialing code Then press Set TELS 123 4567 02 JOHN BARRISTER 3 Immediately after pressing Set open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels and press Subaddress SUBADDRESS You must press Subaddress within 5 seconds of pressing Set If you wait longer than the timeout interval before pressing Subaddress the fax will start scanning the document The timeout interval can be turned off 16 11 St 4 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU T LJ subaddress Then press Set TELS 123 4567 02 JOHN BARRISTER Sending Documents 6 29 D S Q V Documents Password C 5 Ifyou want to enter a password press Password PASSWORD You must press Password within 5 seconds of pressing Set If you wait longer than the timeout interval before pressing Password the fax will start scanning the document The timeout interval can be turned off 16 11 c3 6 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU T pass word Then press Set 02 JOHN BARRISTER O TEL 123 4567 Start S o 7 Press Start Scan The fax star
326. ssing the button until the upper or lower case letter you want appears If you go past the letter you want you will have to keep pressing the button until it appears again Each button contains the upper and lower case letters for its group of letters For example ABCabc Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 7 Ss 3 sbs ihn ee 7a 5 p shs 3 3 Ifthe next letter you want to enter is under another button just press that button to move the cursor right and enter the first letter of that group with a single button press if not If the next letter you want to enter is under the same button you just pressed press to move the cursor to the right one space Then keep pressing the button again until the letter you want appears L You can also enter symbols Just press until you see the symbol you want I To enter a space press Space To Correct a Mistake C JC Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor left or right to position it under the incorrect letter Then enter the correct letter if not Clear Press Clear to delete the entire entry so you can start again 3 8 Getting Started Chapter 3 Menu Button Summary Table Chapter 3 When you come to a step where you must enter a number or name for data registration in this section or in any part of this Facsimile User s Guide refer to the table below To see some of the buttons described below you may have to open all
327. stions 15 5 1 Face up tray area Gently pull out the jammed paper If the jammed paper cannot be easily removed do not force it This can happen when the trailing edge of the paper is still within the paper feed area The pressure from the pressure roller must be released before removing the paper To do this open the printer cover and follow the instructions 15 9 to hold the green lever and flip the transfer guide up Then try removing the jammed paper from this area After removing the paper gently guide the transfer guide back to its original position 2 Output trays area 1 Open the face up tray 15 6 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 If you can see the edge of the paper Gently remove the jammed paper If you cannot see the edge of the paper 2 Use both hands to pull the paper up Questions Oo ot O N oqa co gt 5E 2s ss a Li Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 7 3 After the paper s edge has rolled out pull the paper forward carefully If the jammed paper cannot be easily removed do not force it This can happen when the trailing edge of the paper is still within the paper feed Note area The pressure from the pressure roller must be released before removing the paper To do this open the printer cover and follow the instructions 15 9 to hold the green lever and flip the transfer guide up Then try removing the jammed pa
328. t Feed Janis issvsiescsusceisodnedsssnieswstentanstancesusevensteoss 15 2 Removing Printer Feed ats ctisscosicsvacssteictswadatenagiardepanstaaaasienytveds 15 4 OCA i Paperin e a R 15 5 Eac ap MAV are Eiaeia a A OOT 15 6 2 DULL AY S ATON er TN 15 6 J naL INe ITOT is A E 15 8 A WAT AV ACA isea ra vais cia ssadeluncusnig an aeumn alnvacans avenues 15 11 5 Paper Cassette Aled asinen N 15 12 6 Paper Cassette 2 ATE Aai E 15 13 Stonne RECORGING PAPE ke i asitscnascvascsnis evens n aai 15 15 XX11 Contents Recommended Paper 1cidccqccichtcasanteshvautendesnendcsvaneaeyndedansien peceaeceaares 15 15 Storie the Paper Supply aa anaa E streets 15 16 Changing the Toner Cartridge is isso yiseadtnctinlsiactladistedesaleeicauatecabetcee 15 17 Storing loner Cartride OS xicsi cisions dass odsashevatvaueestia ste eaoaoudnenson 15 22 Plame Cartrid SCS ccssecssssauenasascanssassotesncawonutsdetoagncecasgneanguaanneas 15 22 SOTIN Caride eS aa a E Rute 15 23 Disposing of Used Toner Cartridges eeeesesessererserersrrererrerses 15 23 PSO die Clean mine E asuciomss sioed oneuamuesy shesueesunien 15 24 Cleaning the Fax Unit aera nearer ier raee ine tran ae ere nee ree nery 15 24 Cleaning the Transfer Guide Area n se 15 25 Cleaning the Scanning Area s ssesessssesesesresesesreresenseseseseesereseseese 15 27 Refilling the Stamp Ink Compartment option 0 0 sees 15 33 Error Code Table listed by number 000 ee eeeseeeseeeseeseeeeseeeeeees
329. tates to the first menu name If you press a with the first menu displayed the display rotates to the last selection To Open a Menu and Select an Item Press the search buttons until the name of the menu you want to open is displayed then press Set Press the search buttons to browse through the menu items then press Set to go to the next level To Return to the Previous Level Press Data Registration to return to the previous level so you can continue browsing If you continue to press Data Registration you will return to the standby mode To Return to Standby Immediately Press Stop to return to standby If you do not press a button for 60 seconds the fax will automatically return to standby 3 6 Getting Started Chapter 3 Entering Names for Registration When you come to a step that requires entering a name for data registra tion follow the procedure below In a display that requires a name entry the letter or number in the upper right corner of the LCD display tells you the entry mode UNIT NAME A 1 Press to change the entry mode Display Entry mode What it does LA Text Allows you to enter upper and lower case letters You can also press to enter a symbol 1 Number Allows you to enter numbers You can also press to enter a symbol The numeric keypad buttons are clearly labeled with one number and some letters 2 Press the appropriate button to enter the letter or number 6 Keep pre
330. te electrical noise which often interferes with communications equipment and the sending and receiving of documents iii U CONNECTION OF THE EQUIPMENT This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the rear panel of this equipment is a label that contains among other informa tion the FCC Registration Number and Ringer Equivalence Number REN for this equipment If requested this information must be given to the telephone company This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive REN s on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but all areas the sum of the REN s should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total REN s contact the telephone company to deter mine the maximum REN for the calling area An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant Note RENs are associated with loop start and ground start ports Do not use for E amp M or digital ports Even if the dual line option is installed the REN is a
331. ted at the top of the message you send Usually you register your company name as the TTI but you can also use personal names G 15 TX password The ITU T password set on your fax that accompanies the document you send and must match the RX password on the fax where it is received If your TX password matches the RX password of the other party s fax the document is received If the passwords do not match the document is not received The maximum length of the password is 20 digits and may consist of numbers spaces asterisk and pound mark U UHO Stands for ultra high quality image Allows you to send documents that are very close to the quality of the original Ultra Fine This button increases the clarity of documents you send The lamp shows you the current setting It is eight times the Standard resolution Urgent document Use direct sending to send an urgent document ahead of documents in the memory waiting to be sent Just feed the urgent document into the facsimile and dial and press Direct TX As soon as the facsimile finishes sending the current document from the memory it will send the urgent document See also direct sending G 16 Glossary A Activity Management Report sample 14 9 setting 16 9 Activity Management Report TX RX separate sample 14 10 setting 16 9 Activity Report RX sample 14 15 setting 16 8 Activity Report TX sample 14 12 setting 16 8 Activity Report TX with ima
332. ted receiving on and off Restricted receiving limits document reception to fax units whose telephone numbers are registered on your fax for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing buttons You cannot receive a document from another fax unless it is registered on your fax for a speed dialing button so the fax will not receive unsolicited direct mail 1 Open the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu with your system settings password 13 4 C JC 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below SYSTEM SETTINGS 4 RX RESTRICTION 3 Press Set A v C JC 4 Press the search buttons to display the setting you want then press Set Set BD RX RESTRICTION OFF RX RESTRICTION ON OFF Your fax will receive a document even if the fax tele phone number of the originator is not registered on your fax for a One touch Speed Dialing or a Coded Speed Dialing button However other restrictions like pass words subaddresses and so on still apply ON Your fax will receive a document only if the fax tele phone number of the originator is registered on your fax for a One touch Speed Dialing or a Coded Speed Dialing button Stop 5 Press Stop to return to standby Q 13 16 Restricting Use of the Fax Chapter 13 Using Memory Lock Normally a document prints as soon as you receive it However there may be occasions when you want the fax to store all documents in the memory until you are ready to print them Locking the fax to receive and stor
333. th the TTI Selector button 6 6 Zit 2 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels and press Hy Stamp TX STAMP Stamp Option O FF 12 10 Other Special Features Chapter 12 L Set Chapter 12 If you want to stamp document pages press the search buttons until you see ON TX STAMP if not If you want to turn the stamp feature off press the search buttons until you see OFF TX STAMP OFF Press Set Close all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels and send the document Other Special Features 12 11 amp Q Q a ihn 3 s O Features How the Fax Operates with Default Settings There are many minor features that you can change to customize the operation of the fax Some of these features are listed in the table below The description in the third column is the default setting In other words this is how the fax will operate unless you change the referenced setting If your fax is not operating as described this means the default may have already been changed In such a case you may want to go to the refer enced page to restore the default setting Batch sending BATCH TX If several documents for the same destination with the same telephone number are stored in the memory for delayed sending when the timer goes off for one of the documents all other documents for the same destination are sent together in the same transmission regardless of their time setting 716 11
334. the location you wish to use the fax after the cassette has been installed P You will need to move the fax unit if you want to use it in the same location it now occupies Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 29 Caution N Note 7 Lift up the fax unit and hold it over Paper Cassette 2 LIFTING THE FAX UNIT REQUIRES TWO PEOPLE TO MOUNT THE FAX UNIT ONTO PAPER CASSETTE 2 FOLLOW THE GENERAL GUIDELINES AND ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 2 10 ALWAYS LIFT THE FAX UNIT BY THE LIFTING HANDLES AT THE BOTTOM TO AVOID TRAPPING YOUR FINGERS BETWEEN THE FAX UNIT AND PAPER CASSETTE 2 WHENEVER YOU MOVE THE FAX BE SURE TO LIFT THE FAX UNIT AND PAPER CASSETTE 2 SEPARATELY DO NOT TRY TO LIFT THEM TOGETHER If the fax unit is heavy to lift remove Paper Cassette 1 and toner cartridge before placing it on Paper Cassette 2 8 Make sure the front of the fax unit is facing the same direction as the front of Paper Cassette 2 Slowly lower the fax unit onto the four positioning poles on the corners of Paper Cassette 2 A 2 30 Setting Up Chapter 2 Loading Paper in Paper Cassettes 1 and 2 Before you load paper follow these general guidelines L The paper cassettes can be adjusted to hold various sizes of paper Paper Cassette 1 holds letter legal or A4 size paper and Paper Cassette 2 holds letter legal A4 executive or B5 size paper You can load executive or B5 size paper in Paper Cassette 2 only when you use it for the pri
335. the envelope feeder slot cover onto the MP tray after removing the jam Note 15 10 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 4 MP tray area 1 Ifa paper jam occurs in the MP tray area follow the procedure for removing the paper jam in the imaging area on pages 15 8 to 15 10 2 Ifyou cannot easily reach the paper to clear the jam slowly pull the jammed paper out from the front J O wi OAA Oq E S G am SHO o 356 ss Li Do not pull the jammed paper upwards when removing it from the fax lt unit This could damage the paper sensor Note P If the paper does not come out easily do not force it Follow the i J instructions from step 2 of the Paper Cassette 1 area description to Note remove the jammed paper 15 12 Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 11 5 Paper Cassette 1 area 1 Remove Paper Cassette 1 If Paper Cassette 2 is installed be sure to remove it first If you can see the edge of the paper Locate the jammed paper inside the fax unit and gently pull it out If the paper does not come out easily or you cannot grasp the edge of the paper easily do not force it Go to step 2 Always release the transfer guide Note inside the fax unit before removing the paper 15 9 After removing the paper gently guide the transfer guide back to its original position N If you cannot see the edge of the paper 2 Open the printer cover
336. the fax stores all documents it receives in the memory Delayed Transmission Sets a time for delayed sending Transfer Switches the fax in and out of transfer mode In the transfer mode Polling the fax unit sends all documents it receives to another fax Sets a document for polling sending and also used for polling machine at your home or another office receiving Memory Reference Confidential Mailbox Performs operations with documents currently stored in the Sets a document for sending to a confidential mailbox so you can memory including printing a list of documents printing a print documents received in the mailbox document sending a document to another destination or deleting a document Relay Broadcast Sets a document to be sent to another fax for relay sending Report Prints reports about information registered in the fax Memory Box Sets a document to be stored in a memory box or opens a Stamp Option memory box so you can print documents received in the memory Switches the fax in and out of the stamp mode In the stamp box mode the fax marks all documents scanned for sending in memory mode or direct sending mode If you want to use the stamp feature call your authorized Canon dealer and request installation of this option 3 4 Getting Started Chapter 3 Using the Menus and Buttons This section provides a brief overview on how to use the menu buttons to open menus make selections and register data General Guide
337. the last 40 transactions set the fax up to print them automatically after every 40 transactions print the report at the same time every day or print the report showing the sending trans actions of individuals or departments in your company using depart ment codes registered on the fax as well as a list of receptions e Confidential RX Report After you receive a confidential document in a mailbox the fax prints out a confidential message notice No special settings are required Each notice shows the date and time you received the confidential document the name and telephone number of the party sending the confidential document whether the document was success fully received and other useful information G 11 G 12 e Error TX Report Ifthe fax fails to send a document because the other party does not answer even after automatic redialing or if an error oc curs then your fax will immediately print an error transmission report The report includes the facsimile number of the other party so you can try sending again and can print part of the first page of the document so you can identify it e Memory Clear Report When documents are stored in the memory if power to the fax is cut off for more than 12 hours the documents stored in the memory will be erased After power is restored a Memory Clear List will print to show you what documents have been erased If power is restored within 12 hours the documents are not erased and no repo
338. the search buttons until you see the display below SYSTEM SETTINGS 3 MEMORY LOCK RX MEMORY LOCK RX OFF Press Set Turn on the memory lock feature Press the search buttons until you see the display below MEMORY LOCK RX ON Press Set Press the search buttons to display the setting you want and press Set MEMORY LOCK RX 1 MEM LOCK PASSWORD MEMORY LOCK RX 3 TIME SETUP For details about setting up the memory lock feature refer to the summary below Chapter 13 Memory Lock Setup Summary The default settings shown in bold remain in effect unless you change them 1 MEM LOCK PASSWORD 0000 to 9999 2 REPORT 3 TIME SETUP Chapter 13 This password protects the memory lock settings You must also use this password to unlock the memory so you can print documents stored in the memory Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four digit password and press Set Set the fax to print reports or not This setting affects only reports that print automatically such as Activity Reports for sending and receiving and Activity Management Reports OUTPUT NO No report prints while in the memory lock mode OUTPUT YES A report prints while the fax is in the memory lock mode Set the times for the fax to enter and leave the memory lock mode The time settings are optional If you do not set the times you can use the Memory Reception button to turn the memory lock feature on and off OFF Turns off the timer s
339. their fax unit Chapter 15 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions 15 39 MESSAGE WHAT IT MEANS NO RX PAPER The other party s fax unit has run out of paper and cannot receive your document Contact the other party and ask them to re supply recording paper to their fax unit NO TEL You have pressed a One touch Speed Dialing button or pressed Coded Dial followed by a 3 digit code but no telephone number is registered If you have forgotten where the number is registered use directory dial 4 35 You can also print a list of all numbers registered for speed dialing 14 2 NOT AVAILABLE NOW You pressed a One touch Speed Dialing or pressed Coded Dial followed by a 3 digit code that is not registered for the feature you are trying to use NOT FOUND TRY AGAIN The box number you specified does not exist Try again with a different number OUTPUT TRAY FULL The output tray is full of paper Pick up the printed pages on the tray PASSWORD POLL REJECT You set up a polling box for polling sending with an ITU T password but the other party s fax unit does not support use of an ITU T password for polling receiving PASSWORD TX REJECTED You attempted to send a document with an ITU T password but the other party s fax unit does not support use of an ITU T password for receiving PRT ALT PAPER SIZE The size of the available recording paper does not match the size of the YES NO document waiting to be printed If
340. ther metal fasteners Make sure all the documents are dry They should not have wet ink glue or paste on their surfaces Before you feed a stack of documents into the fax make sure all the pages are the same size and thickness Do not attempt to feed documents of mixed sizes and thickness 6 2 Sending Documents Chapter 6 Setting the Document on the Fax You can set a stack of up to 50 letter or A4 size pages or 20 legal or 11 x 17 in or B4 size pages into the fax for scanning However the effective scanning width is up to B4 size 10 in 1 Place the document face up on the document feeder tray of the fax unit 2 Ifthe document is too long for the document feeder tray e g legal size 11 x 17 in size pull out the document extension tray D D Q V Documents Chapter 6 Sending Documents 6 3 4 Make sure the document is below the load limit marks for A4 LTR and B4 LGL sizes 5 Insert the document fully into the fax until the leading edge of the document stops in the ADF The fax will display some messages MEMORY IN USE 36 DOCUMENT READY If the fax already displays DOCUMENT READY before you set a sf document a small sized document such as a STMT size document may Note have remained in the ADF from a previous fax or copy job In such a case remove the small sized document from the ADF and then set your document Adjusting the Scanning Settings Canon s original Ultra Hig
341. three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Buttons for registering information AV Set The search buttons display the next or previous menu item Press to display the next item of the menu If you press v when the last item is displayed the display rotates to the first item on the menu Press a to display the previous item of the menu If you press a when the first item is displayed the display rotates to the last item on the menu Press Set to select the current item and display the next level of the menu Switches the entry modes A Text entry mode You can enter letters 1 Number entry mode You can enter numbers More than one letter is assigned to a button Press to enter the text entry mode then press the button for the letter you want to enter If the letter you want to enter is not displayed first keep pressing the button until it appears If the next letter is under another button just press that button to enter the first letter of the group and then keep pressing the button until the letter you want appears if not If the next letter is under the same button press P to move the cursor right one space then press the button again to enter the first letter of the group Keep pressing the button until the letter you want appears The cursor buttons move the cursor left or right Press to enter a symbol You can enter symbols in the text or number entry mode Keep pressing until the symbol you w
342. tion is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interferences and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Use of shielded cable is required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules Do not make any changes or modifications to the equi
343. tons are already set up perform the proce dure to change the One touch or Coded Speed Dialing settings 4 6 4 15 L When you do the speed dialing settings turn on the OPTIONAL SETTING feature and select TX TYPE Select CONFIDENTIAL TX and then set the ITU T subaddress and password 4 11 4 20 L Confirm that the other party has set up a confidential mailbox with the subaddress you have been given Your fax cannot confirm whether or not the subaddress has been used to set up a confidential mailbox Sending a Confidential Document with the Confidential Mailbox Button Note these points about sending a confidential document to a confiden tial mailbox l You can dial only one telephone number L If you frequently need to send a confidential document to more than one location register the number subaddress and password for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing so you can use multiple broad casting 4 6 4 15 L If you use One touch or Coded Speed Dialing to dial the number after you perform the following operation the transmission mode settings registered for the speed dialing button are ignored L The password setting is optional but required if the other party has set a password on the other fax unit 1 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can also select a sender s name with the TTI Selector 6 6 Chapter 10 Using Confidential Mailboxes 10 11
344. tor 6 6 A Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press ESS Memory Box Memory Box MEMORY BOX m 1 MEMORY BOX TX Set C 3 Press Set SUBADDRESS _ 4 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU T Oe subaddress of the memory box Then press Set OPER__ SYMBOLS SENDER S NAME SENDER S NAME Q 9 O O O MEMORY BOX TX 2 CANON INC 8 24 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 TTI Selector 5 Press TTI Selector until you see the sender name you want to use You can also use the search buttons to scroll up and down the TTI list A v SENDER S NAME L_ 01 R LOUIS Set 6 Press Set TRANSMIT 0037 SCANNING DOC P 001 The fax begins to scan the document O r aed D m Memory Features The document is stored in the memory box and will be sent according to the memory box settings 8 14 Printing a Document Received in a Memory Box Follow this procedure to print a document that has been received and stored in a memory box according to the memory box setup 8 14 F You can use this procedure to print a document from the memory box only after you have set PRINT RX DOC to ON and set PRINT METHOD to MAN under the RECEIVE item of the memory box setup After the fax receives a document in a memory box the fax displays a message and prints a report unless this feature has been turned off 16 8 PRINTING REPORT 12 31 1999 13 29 FAX
345. transaction automatically Even if the fax machine is set to redial several times it will redial only once if there is no tone or there is a ring back tone during the first attempt 0O2TIMES You can set between 01 to 10 dialing attempts 7 2 REDIAL INTERVAL Sets the length of time the fax waits DE between dialing attempts E 02MIN You can set the time interval between 02 T O to 99 minutes Chapter 6 Sending Documents 6 21 Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One Location LA Note nC Follow this procedure to scan a document once and send it to several locations With this sending method called sequential broadcasting you can send the same document to a maximum of 210 locations If you frequently send the same document to several locations use Group Dialing With Group Dialing you can register up to 199 facsimile numbers and send the same document to these numbers at the press of only one or four buttons 4 24 If you use sequential broadcasting frequently and you want to make sure that all transactions are completed assign the REPORT function to the Program button Then before you send a document press Program to have the fax unit print a Multi transaction Report to confirm that the document was sent to all the destinations 12 5 14 14 1 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can also select a sender s name with the TTI Selector
346. ts to scan the document TRANSMIT 0021 SCANNING DOC P 001 L The fax dials the number and sends the document with the subaddress and password you just entered L To cancel the transmission press Stop and press when you are prompted to confirm the cancellation li To cancel a transmission set for delayed or timer sending use the Delete File button 8 9 6 30 Sending Documents Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Receiving Documents of ES 2 05 9 6 26 A This chapter describes the basic receive features You can receive document transmission automatically or manually In the automatic receive mode the fax will receive a document automatically In the manual receive mode if you have installed the optional handset kit you can answer the telephone by picking up the handset on the fax and pressing Start Scan to start receiving the fax You can also start manual receiving from an extension telephone with remote receiving In the last section of this chapter we will show you how to put the fax unit in the transfer mode and send all documents automatically to a fax at your home or at another work site ld Receiving Documents Automatically sesseeseeeeeeeeeeeesrreererrrrrrrrerrrrreses 7 2 e Setting the Automatic Receive Mode s sssssssssesesesesesesesesrsseseseseseses 7 2 e Messages Displayed When Receiving a Document 0e eee 7 2 e Turning on and Adjusting the Auto Switch Time seers 7 5 L Receiving Documents M
347. u want to monitor all incoming calls yourself When you hear the ringer pick up the handset and answer the phone If you hear a slow beep this means someone is trying to send you a facsimile transmission Press Start Scan and hang up the handset to start receiving the document You cannot receive documents if there is another document fed into the fax Manual redialing When you use regular dialing you can redial a number manually simply by pressing Redial on the operation panel The last number called is the number re dialed Manual sending Use manual sending when you have installed the optional handset kit or connected an extension phone and you have to talk to the other party before you send the document You may have to do this to send trans missions to older fax units Put the document in the fax and then dial the number After the call connects if you hear a high pitched tone press Start Scan to send the facsimile and then hang up If the other party or the other fax does not answer hang up the handset If the other party answers tell him that you are going to send a facsimile transmission and that he should press start button on his own machine Press Start Scan on your own fax then hang up the handset Memory box The memory box provides features that allow you to set up an ITU T subaddress and password and allows you to use advanced features such as confidential sending and relay sending with fax units of any manufac ture as
348. ucceed the subaddresses and passwords on the sending and receiving fax units must match You can use two methods to send a document with an ITU T subaddress and password L Press a One touch or Coded Speed Dialing button registered for subaddress password sending L Enter the subaddress and password with the Subaddress and Password buttons on the operation panel when you send the document Subaddress Password Sending with Speed Dialing If you register the subaddress and or password for a One touch or Coded Speed Dialing button the subaddress password are entered for you automatically after you press the speed dialing buttons 4 6 4 15 1 To use subaddress password sending with a speed dialing button you must first register the subaddress password for the telephone number when you register the number for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing 4 6 4 15 2 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can also select a sender s name with the TTI Selector 6 6 Chapter 6 Sending Documents 6 27 D D Q V Documents c 3 Press the One touch Speed Dialing button registered for subaddress password sending 4 29 if not Coded Speed Dialing number registered for subaddress pass Goad Dral AAA Press the Coded Dial button followed by the three digit code for the word sending 4 31 Vie if not Directory
349. up to 24 characters long 2 SELECT LOCATIONS Select the numbers of the fax machines where you want documents transferred TELS Close the One touch Speed Dialing panels and press a One touch Speed Dialing button or press the Coded Dial button followed by a three digit code for the Coded Speed Dialing number to enter the number of the fax machine where you want documents trans ferred The telephone number of the destination fax must be registered for One touch or Coded Speed Dialing on your fax 3 PASSWORD 0000 9999 Enter a four digit number 0000 9999 to protect the transfer file settings Use of a password is recommended This operation password protects the transfer file from unauthorized access to your settings You will also need to enter this password when you put the fax in the document transfer mode Chapter 7 Receiving Documents 7 15 Transfer Setup Summary Cont d 4 SELECT ORIG UNIT Allows you to set the fax to receive and relay documents 5 TIME SETUP 1 START TIME EVERY DAY SELECT DAYS 2 END TIME EVERY DAY SELECT DAYS only from originator fax units that you designate OFF All fax transmissions are received and transferred ON The fax machine receives and transfers transmissions only from fax units that you designate by fax telephone number TEL Press the One touch Speed Dialing button or press the Coded Dial button followed by the three digit code to designate the originator fax machines for
350. ur digit password and press Set O0 5 SETUP FILE G 3 SELECT LOCATIONS OPER__ SYMBOLS OOC cep D Press Set Dial the other party s fax number L G O Press a One touch Speed Dialing button to dial the number 4 29 DOD stow W A Press Coded Dial and a three digit code to dial the number 4 31 If you make a mistake during dialing press Stop to return to standby and start again F You can enter up to 200 numbers to be polled by your fax Note Set CJ Press Set SETUP FILE 4 START TIME You can set the fax to poll other faxes everyday or only for se lected days For any day you can set up to 5 times for the fax to poll another unit during a 24 hour period 11 8 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 11 8 Set the fax to poll other faxes every day or on selected days To set preset polling for every day SETUP FILE 4 START TIME CJ Press Set START TIME EVERYDAY Set C Press Set EVERYDAY Set C Press Set EVERYDAY Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time Enter the time in the 24 hour format e g 1 00 p m as 13 00 again L If you make a mistake press Clear to erase the number and try EVERYDAY 00 30 3 5 Set CJ Press Set mi O Q CJC If you want to set more than one time for your fax unit to poll the i other faxes press the search buttons to display another empty g2 setting EVERYDAY Chapter 1
351. utton should only be used by authorized Canon dealers Please do not press this button CC 1 CY A aa aS A TELEPHONE LINE JACK L Connect the telephone line here POWER SOCKET Connect the power LIFTING HANDLE cord here Grip the fax here and on the opposite side to lift the fax unit PARALLEL INTERFACE PORT Connect a parallel interface cable This port is a standard feature for TELEPHONE LINE JACK L2 the LASER CLASS 3170MS and Connect an additional telephone available for the LASER CLASS line here after installation of the 3170 3175 after installation of the optional Dual line Upgrade Kit for optional PCL6 Printer Board the LASER CLASS 3170 Series Handset option RINGER VOLUME SWITCH Adjust the volume of the ringer Use a pen or other pointed object to adjust the switch to HIGH LOW or OFF OFF HIGH 2 18 Setting Up Chapter 2 Removing the Shipping Material All shipping materials must be removed Shipping materials are at tached inside the fax unit and inside the paper cassette to protect delicate parts from vibration during shipping Removing the Shipping Tapes Remove all the shipping tapes from the unit Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Fax Unit 1 Gently lift the ADF cover and remove the styrene foam sheet from inside the feeder area P Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 19 2 Close the ADF cover 3 Open the printer cover and the MP tray
352. ve a document stored in your polling box the document is sent if the following conditions are met L If you entered both a subaddress and a password when you created the polling box the subaddress and the password of the other party s polling request must match the subaddress and the password for the polling box L The password setting is optional However if you have registered a password for the polling box the other party s polling request must contain a matching password L Ifno password is registered for the document in the polling box and the other party s polling request contains a password then the document is not sent Changing the Polling Box Setup Follow this procedure to change the setup of the polling box 1 Open the POLLING BOX menu 11 15 11 16 POLLING BOX 1 SETUP FILE 5 2 Press the search buttons until you see the display below POLLING BOX 2 CHANGE DATA O 5 F Q gt 28 5 2 ir 3 A Chapter 11 Setting Up and Using Polling 11 21 Set OPER__ SYMBOLS OC L OPER__ SYMBOLS p L Set Press Set CHANGE DATA SET BOX OO Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the polling box number Then press Set CHANGE DATA PASSWORD _ If you have not set the operation password you can skip the next step Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four digit password protecting the polling box setup file Then press Set CHANGE DATA 1 FILE
353. vel surface To avoid serious damage from falling never place the LASER CLASS 3170 Series on an unstable cart stand or table Do not use the LASER CLASS 3170 Series near water Slots and openings on the cabinet and on the back or bottom are provided for ventilation To ensure reliable operation of the LASER CLASS 3170 Series and to protect it from overheating never block or cover these openings Do not block the openings by placing the unit on a bed sofa rug or other similar surface or near a radiator or heat register Do not place the LASER CLASS 3170 Series in a closet or built in installation unless proper ventilation is provided Operate the LASER CLASS 3170 Series only from the type of power source indicated on the unit s label If you are not sure of the type of power available consult your dealer or local power company The LASER CLASS 3170 Series is equipped with a 3 prong ground ing type plug provided with a third grounding pin This plug will only fit into a grounding type outlet This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into your outlet contact an electrician to replace your outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the ground ing type plug by breaking off the third prong or using a 3 to 2 adapter Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the LASER CLASS 3170 Series where the cord will be walked on xiii xiv 10 11 12 13 If you use
354. venl veseetenissniap te eeenaetenidliagbeld 16 10 tel RX Receive Settings arstisanidreserionioeirs inoi i 16 13 Ea SPE Set eana a a eee 16 16 SFE SENE S riu EEE OR 16 20 ED Sy eaS Ea T E AE EEEE EE A A T 16 27 A Dual Tei HOTS nonin A 16 32 L Relationship between BATCH TX QUICK ON LINE TX and Timer SOLELY Sai a E 16 34 Summary of Important Settings 16 1 E sE Looy ot s EE ESO 50 N Opening the Data Registration Menu ata Registration Set A y CL Set A y CLO 16 2 Summary of Important Settings Follow this procedure to display the user data settings Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press Set to display the next menu DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS DATA REGISTRATION 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS Display the item you want to set or change and press Set For details refer to the following section The user data menu selections are displayed one line at a time Use the search buttons to display these settings so you can check the settings or change them Chapter 16 Summary of User Data Settings Here is a summary of the user data menus 1 USER SETTINGS Use these settings to set up the operating environment of the fax unit These settings include important features like registering the names telephone
355. veuU U VOU e c We hope you will have these features set up in the very near future so we can enjory more efficient secure and ecomical facsimile communications ADAM BOOK CPA 001 Chapter 3 Note For documents that you receive you can turn on the RX FOOTER feature which displays the date time received transaction number and page number in the lower right corner of the document gt 16 15 12 31 1999 FRI 03 57 TX RX NO 5015 7 001 Registering the Sender Information TX TERMINAL ID Data Registration Set Set Set Getting Started 3 13 Chapter 3 Follow this procedure to set the current date and time register the number of your own fax unit and register your name or company name 1 Open the USER SETTINGS menu Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Press Set Press Set USER SETTINGS 1 DATE amp TIME 2 Open the DATE amp TIME menu Press Set DATE amp TIME 12 31 99 11 30 Ee 3 sks ihn G ee 7e 5 p shs 3 Set Set 3 14 Getting Started Register the date and time Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the month day and year DATE amp TIME 01 02 00 11 30 Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the current time L Use the 24 hour format to enter the time e g 1 00 p m as 13 00 L
356. wer outlet to facilitate installation x Preface Preface NOTICE The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certifica tion means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications networks protective operational and safety requirements The Depart ment does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permitted to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent deterioration of service in some situations The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminal allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the require ment that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Number of all the devices does not exceed 5 The REN of this equipment is 0 3 Even if the dual line option is installed the REN is applicable to each port Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Cana dian maintena
357. will prompt you SET DOCUMENT L If you press a One touch Speed Dialing button or press Coded Dial followed by a three digit code where no number has been registered the fax will display NO TEL 12 If you want to cancel the transmission after you press a One touch or Coded Speed Dialing button press Stop When you register a number for One touch Speed Dialing Coded Speed ch Dialing and Group Dialing you can as an option set the time you want Note your document to go out up to 5 different times in a day If you are using a speed dial button that was set by someone else and you would like your document to go out at the preset time verify if the preset time feature is being used for that button 4 9 4 18 4 27 16 34 N 4 34 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 Using Directory Dialing Follow this procedure to look up the other party s name and retrieve the number for dialing This feature is convenient when you know the other party s name but cannot recall the One touch Speed Dialing button the code for Coded Speed Dialing or Group Dialing where the number is registered 1 Set the document on the fax 6 3 Set the document resolution contrast and document type 6 4 You can also select a sender s name with the TTI Selector 6 6 2 Press Directory DIRECTORY DIAL 1ST LETT OF NAME A 3 Press a numeric keypad button to enter the first letter of the name of the party you are searchi
358. word for the relay broadcast 9 10 1 PASSWORD The ITU T password for the relay broadcast 2 SUBADDRESS The ITU T subaddress for the relay broadcast Chapter 4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4 11 PSWD SUBADDRESS Allows you to enter an ITU T password or subaddress for the transmission 6 28 1 PASSWORD The ITU T password for the transmis sion 2 SUBADDRESS The ITU T subaddress for the transmis sion POLLING RX Allows you to set a One touch Speed Dialing button to poll another fax every time you use it to dial Press Set then enter the ITU T subaddress and password 11 3 1 PASSWORD The ITU T password for the other party s polling box 2 SUBADDRESS The ITU T subaddress for the other party s polling box Display the TX TYPE you wish to register then press Set Next set the ITU T password and subaddress for the feature you selected You can cancel the currently set TX TYPE by selecting REGULAR TX F Only one feature can be set for TX TYPE The next time you open the TX TYPE menu to change the setting you will see the currently set item Note displayed first OPTIONAL SETTING 3 LONG DISTANCE 10 If you experience transmission errors during long distance sending change the long distance setting OPTIONAL SETTING 3 LONG DISTANCE Set C Press Set LONG DISTANCE DOMESTIC 4 12 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing Chapter 4 CJC Press the search buttons until you see the display you want
359. x 0 16 4 mm max letter 0 53 13 5 mm a max legal 0 54 13 9 mm oe ee max 0 18 4 5 mm max 0 26 6 5 mm 3 ai sg f am F 50 e A Appendix B Documents You Can Scan B 3 B 4 Documents You Can Scan Appendix B Glossary Glossary A Activity report Journal of transactions both sent and received ADF Stands for automatic document feeder Automatic dialing Dialing fax or telephone numbers by pressing one or four buttons To use automatic dialing you must register the numbers in the fax unit s memory See also One touch Speed Dialing Coded Speed Dialing and Group Dialing Automatic redialing When the other fax is busy or does not answer the fax waits 2 minutes and then automatically re dials the same number If there is still no answer it makes 1 more attempt after waiting for 2 minutes After the last unsuccessful attempt the fax prints an Error TX report Automatic reduction of received image At the top of the received document the date time company name and fax number can be printed Because this extra information at the top of the received document requires additional space the number of pages of the received document may increase Automatic reduction of the re ceived image avoids this by reducing the size of the printed image B Batch sending When several documents are scanned into the memory to be sent to the same destination at a specified time the docum
360. xt and photographs on the same page Automatically adjusts the quality of the image and text on the same page If the other party does not have the ultra fine feature and you send a document with Text Photo set for the document type setting and Ultra Fine set for the resolution setting the image the other party receives will reproduce at the other party s maximum resolution setting D S Q V Documents Chapter 6 Sending Documents 6 5 Selecting a Sender Name Follow this procedure to select one of the registered sender names L Sender names are selected by pressing the TTI Selector button L This setting is optional If you do not select a sender name before sending a document the registered unit name will be printed at the top of the document in the sender information area 43 12 I If you select a sender name before you send a document it will replace the unit name printed in the sender information area 43 12 ll Up to 19 sender names can be registered At least one sender name must be registered so you can use this feature 3 18 1 Set the document on the fax and adjust the document guides to the width of the document 6 3 2 Dial the number Press the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number if not Press a One touch Speed Dialing button to dial the number 4 29 if not Press Coded Dial and a three digit code to dial the number 4 31 if not Use directory dialing
361. y OFF The stamp feature is turned off and disabled Note The stamp feature is available as an option If the stamp option is not provided on your fax machine this item will not appear in the menu and PIN CODE will appear as item 7 8 PIN CODE Turns on the PIN code feature for dialing through a PBX that requires PIN codes 413 21 OFF Turn off the PIN code feature ON NECESS PINCODE The Force PIN Code feature requires entering PIN code for every transaction OFF ON PIN CODE BEF AFT Set the PIN code to appear as a prefix or suffix of the telephone number BEFORE TEL NO The PIN code appears as a prefix AFTER TELNO The PIN code appears as a suffix 16 12 Summary of Important Settings Chapter 16 RX Receive Settings Data Registration Set L Chapter 16 R Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGISTRATION Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS Press the search buttons to display 4 RX SETTINGS DATA REGISTRATION 4 RX SETTINGS Press Set RX SETTINGS 1 ECM RX Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change Summary of Important Settings 16 13 Go fe i G E E N e G Pe ihn fe Q z iz Ca 5 t sbs sks 3 7 Default settings are in bold 1 ECM RX Turn the ECM error correction mode receiving off and on This switch does not affect th
362. y or the lower output tray for each function 1 FAX UPPER OUTPUT TRAY Received documents by fax are delivered to the upper output tray LOWER OUTPUT TRAY Received documents by fax are delivered to the lower output tray 2 COPY UPPER OUTPUT TRAY Copied pages are delivered to the upper output tray LOWER OUTPUT TRAY Copied pages are delivered to the lower output tray 3 REPORT UPPEROUTPUTTRAY Printed reports are delivered to the upper output tray LOWER OUTPUT TRAY Printed reports are delivered to the lower output tray 4 PRINTER UPPEROUTPUT TRAY Data input from a PC are printed and delivered to the upper output tray LOWER OUTPUT TRAY Data input from a PC are printed and delivered to the lower output tray E sE Looy ot s EE ESO 50 N Chapter 16 Summary of Important Settings 16 19 File Settings M aS 1 Open all three of the One touch Speed Dialing panels Then press p Data Registration a R EG ST RAT O N 1 DATA REGISTRATION 2 Press Set DATA REGISTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS ep 2 C J J 3 Press the search buttons to display 6 FILE SETTINGS DATA REGISTRATION 6 FILE SETTINGS Set 4 Press Set FILE SETTINGS 1 CONFID MAILBOX C JC 5 Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or change 16 20 Summary of Important Settings Chapter 16 Default settings are in bold 1 CONFID MAILBOX 1 SETUP FILE SET BOX 1 FILE NAME 2 PASSWORD 3 SUBADDRESS 4 RX
363. you do not mind printing on a different paper size press If you want to print the correct paper size press Stop and install the correct size paper Then press Start Scan REC PAPER JAM Paper has jammed in the paper cassette or inside the printer Clear the paper jam 15 4 RECEIVED IN MAILBOX A confidential document has arrived in a mailbox of your fax unit and the message will remain displayed until you print the document 10 8 RECEIVED IN MEMORY The fax unit has run out of recording paper the toner supply of the toner cartridge is exhausted or the output tray is full of paper Supply paper to the paper cassettes change the toner cartridge or pick up the printed pages on the tray As soon as you accomplish this task the document prints automatically 78 2 RECEIVED IN MEM BOX You have received a document in a memory box Print out the document in the memory box 8 25 REPLACE CARTRIDGE The toner cartridge has run out of toner Replace the toner cartridge 15 17 15 40 Maintenance amp Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 15 MESSAGE WHAT IT MEANS SELECTIVE POLL REJECT You have set up a polling box for polling sending with an ITU T subaddress but the other party s fax unit does not support use of an ITU T subaddress for polling receiving START AGAIN An error has occurred on the telephone line or in your fax unit Start the procedure from the beginning If the problem persists call for service STOP KEY PRESS
364. you need 2nd LINE TYPE TOUCH TONE 2nd LINE TYPE ROTARY PULSE The fax unit is set to operate through a tone line without making any adjustments Chapter 2 Set Set CL Chapter 2 10 11 12 Press Set DUAL LINE OPTIONS 3 TX LINE PRIORITY TX LINE PRIORITY LINE1 TX PRIORITY The fax unit is set to operate with the first setting LINE1 TX PRIORITY without making any adjustments Press Set Press the search buttons until you see the setting you need LINE1 TX PRIORITY When both lines are open transmission is sent on Line 1 If Line 1 is busy and Line 2 is open transmission is sent on Line 2 LINE2 TX PRIORITY When both lines are open transmission is sent on Line 2 If Line 2 is busy and Line 1 is open transmission is sent on Line 1 LINE1 TX PROHIBIT Even if both lines are open transmission is sent on Line 2 Line 1 is only available for receiving LINE2 TX PROHIBIT Even if both lines are open transmission is sent on Line 1 Line 2 is only available for receiving Press Set then press Stop to return to standby Setting Up 2 59 2 60 Setting Up Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started This chapter describes some important settings that you should perform before you use the fax Regarding the settings needed to use the fax as a printer refer to the Printer User s Guide To use the LASER CLASS 3170 3175 as a printer the PCL6 Printe
365. your name or company name 43 15 In the United States you are required to enter your name or company name 4 SENDER S NAME Register up to 19 alternate sender names Before you send a document press the TTI Selector button and select a name to replace the name you registered for 3 UNIT NAME 3 18 5 TX TERMINAL ID Print your ID transmitting terminal ID on each page you transmit 3 12 In the United States this setting must be ON ON After you turn the terminal ID ON you can do the follow ing settings 1 TT POSITION OUTSIDE IMAGE Terminal ID prints outside the image border INSIDE IMAGE Terminal ID prints inside the image border 2 TELEPHONE MARK You can prefix your number with the abbreviations FAX or TEL in your sender ID FAX Prefixes the number with the gt a abbreviation FAX st sc TEL Prefixes the number with the a abbreviation TEL 50 OFF No terminal ID is printed on the pages you send 6 DENSITY CONTROL Adjust the scanning density from 1 5 for DK 2 is default 2 6 for STD 4 is default 3 7 for LT 6 is default Chapter 16 Summary of Important Settings 16 5 7 PROGRAM KEY Use the program button to streamline the procedures for printing activity reports or doing the scanner settings 712 5 PRINT REPORT Press the Program button whenever you need a transmis sion report for a document you are sending REPORT If you select this setting you do not have to open all three of the
366. ze WHEN YOU SET TO A4 SIZE You can load executive or B5 size paper in Paper Cassette 2 only when j you use it for the printer function When you use it as a paper supply for Note fax you can load letter legal or A4 size paper only N Turn the dial on the right front side of the cassette and adjust it to the size of paper you are loading e Make sure the mark on the paper size setting dial corresponds with the m size of the installed paper otherwise a paper jam may occur Note e Do not set the paper size dial on this unit to CUSTOM This setting is not supported by this fax N 2 34 Setting Up Chapter 2 3 Before you load a stack of paper into the paper cassettes tap the leading edge of the paper stack on a flat surface so that the edges are evenly aligned 4 Place the stack of paper in the paper cassettes with the print side facing down Insert the stack of paper so that it fits neatly to the back of the paper cassettes P When loading 500 sheets into the paper cassettes divide the stack in two evenly sized stacks then load each stack separately Chapter 2 Setting Up 2 35 5 Press down on the front of the paper stack to make sure the corners are below the paper size guide clips Then press the stack down again to make sure it is below the paper limit marks

Canon LASER CLASS 3170series user manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents